Script | Spoken-Tutorial - User contributions [en]

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Ohm's-Law-and-its-Applications/English

2020-07-31T11:54:56Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
||Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Ohm's law and its applications.'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
||At the end of this tutorial you will be able to:
* Verify Ohm’s Law.
* Solve a numerical based on Ohm’s law.
* Draw a graph to find the relation between voltage and current.
* Solve a numerical based on series and parallel combination.
* Calculate the value of current in the circuit.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
||Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
||To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisite tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Link for the Apps on Physics'''

'''http://www.walter-fendt.de'''
||Use the given link to download the Apps.

'''http://www.walter-fendt.de'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
||In this tutorial we will use

'''Ohm’s Law''' and

'''Combinations of Resistors''' '''Apps'''.

|-
|| From the '''phen''' folder Search '''ohmslaw.'''

Right click on the '''ohmslaw_en.htm''' file.

Select option '''Open With Firefox Web Browser.'''
||I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

Right click on the '''ohmslaw_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open With Firefox Web Browser '''option.

'''Ohm’s Law App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to the circuit and 200 ohm resistor.
||The '''App '''shows a simple circuit containing one resistor.

|-
|| Point to the following buttons

'''Increase resistance '''

'''Reduce resistance '''

'''Increase voltage '''

'''Reduce voltage'''
||Green panel has two yellow buttons for resistance and two blue buttons for voltage.

|-
|| Click on the '''Increase resistance''' button.
||Click on '''Increase resistance '''button.

|-
|| Point to the ammeter in the circuit.

Cursor on the resistance and then on the current.
||Notice that as we increase the resistance, ammeter shows decrease in the current.

This increase in resistance, decreases the current in the circuit.

|-
|| Point to show the value at the bottom of the green panel.
||The value of current decreased from 0.03 A to 0.02 A.

|-
|| Click on the '''Increase voltage''' button.
||Click on the '''Increase voltage''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the voltmeter.
||Change in voltage is shown by the voltmeter connected in the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the '''Maximal voltage''' drop down.
||The maximum voltage of a circuit is 10 '''V'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Maximal voltage''' drop down.
||Click on the '''Maximal voltage''' drop down.

|-
|| Move the cursor on the '''Maximal voltage '''drop down.
||Here we can see various ranges for the maximum voltage.

We can vary the voltage between these measuring ranges.

|-
|| Click on '''Maximal voltage''' drop down and select 100 v.
||From the '''Maximal voltage''' drop down select 100 '''V'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Maximal voltage'''.
||Note that we can vary voltage between 1 to 100 '''V'''.

|-
|| Continuously click on the '''Increase voltage''' button.

Point to show the value of voltage '''u'''.
||Click on the '''Increase voltage''' button continuously.

Notice that the voltage increases in the steps of 10 '''V'''.

|-
|| Point to the voltmeter in the circuit.
|| When voltage crosses the maximum voltage range, circuit prompts '''Maximum exceeded'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Maximal amperage '''drop down.

Point to the ammeter in the circuit.
||Note that the''' Maximal amperage''' range is 100 mA.

So when the current in the circuit exceeds 100 mA circuit shows '''Maximum exceeded''' below the ammeter.

|-
|| Cursor on the '''Maximal amperage'''.
||Let us change the '''Maximal amperage''' to 300 mA.

|-
|| Click on '''Maximal amperage''' and select 300 mA.
||Click on the '''Maximal amperage''' drop down.
Select 300 '''milliampere''' from the drop down.

|-
||
||Now let us calculate current in the circuit using '''Ohm'''’s law.

|-
|| Scroll down the screen.
||Scroll down the screen.

|-
|| Point to the Law.
||Here the '''App''' has stated the '''Ohm'''’s law.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
||Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Numerical '''

The value of current is 0.0300''' A '''and resistance in the circuit is'''

'''200 '''ohms. '''Using '''Ohm''''s law find the voltage through the circuit'''.'''
||Let us solve this numerical.

First let us change the values of the parameters according to the numerical.

|-
|| On the interface show this text box.

'''1 A = 1000 mA'''

'''0.03 A = 30 mA'''

From the''' Maximal amperage '''drop down select''' 30 mA.'''

Point to the resistance in the circuit.

Show the increase or reduce resistance buttons.
||For that we have to convert the value of current to milliampere.

1 A = 1000 mA

So, 0.03 A = 30 mA

Next from the '''Maximal amperage''' drop down select 30 '''mA'''.

Default value of resistance is 200 '''ohms'''.

|-
|| Show it on the interface.

Ohm’s Law

'''V= IR'''

'''<nowiki>= 0.0300 </nowiki>x 200'''

'''<nowiki>= </nowiki>6 V'''
||Let us calculate the value of voltage using the formula.

Substitute the values of current and resistance into the formula.

The calculated value of voltage is 6 '''V'''.

It is same as the value shown in the '''App.'''

|-
||
||Let us find the relation between voltage, current and resistance using a graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key.
||Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Select 100 volts from '''Maximal voltage''' drop down.
||From the '''Maximal voltage''' drop down select 100 '''volts.'''

From the '''Maximal amperage''' drop down select 1 '''Ampere'''.

|-
|| Click on''' Increase voltage''' button once.
||Next click on''' Increase voltage''' button.

We can click on '''Increase voltage''' button in the steps of 10 '''V'''.

Observe the change in the current as we change the voltage.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Tabular column'''

'''show the table with values of voltages.'''
||Now make a tabular column to note the values of voltage and current.

Next note the values of current for a given voltage.

|-
||Point to the value of current at 10 volts.
||Go to the interface and check the value of current for 10 '''V'''.

The value is 0.05 Ampere.

|-
|| Click on''' Increase voltage''' button.
||Again click on''' Increase voltage''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Tabular Column'''
||Note the value of current at 20 '''V''' in the tabular column.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Tabular column'''
||Similarly I have noted the values of current in the table.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Current v/s Voltage Graph'''
||Here I have drawn the graph of current v/s voltage.

The graph is linear.

Voltage is directly proportional to current in a metallic conductor.

Here straight line shows the constant of proportionality, that is resistance.

This verifies the''' Ohm'''’s law.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the '''Maximal voltage''' to 1000 V and''' Maximal amperage''' to 10 A.

Make a tabular column to note the values of voltage and current.

Change the voltage in the steps of 100 V.

Draw the graph and explain your observation.
||As an assignment,

Change the '''Maximal voltage''' to 1000 '''V''' and''' Maximal amperage''' to 10 ampere.

Make a tabular column to note the values of voltage and current.

Change the voltage in the steps of 100 V.

Draw the graph and explain your observation.

|-
|| Show the steps here to open Combinations of Resistor.

'''Downloads'''>>''' html5phen'''>> '''phen'''>>'''combinationresistors_en.htm'''
||Let us open the next '''App'''.

Open '''Combinations of Resistor App''' in a similar way as we opened '''Ohm’s Law App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the title.
||'''Combinations of Resistor App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to show the circuit.
||Here the '''App''' shows a simple circuit. It consists of a resistance and battery.

|-
|| Point to '''Voltage of the battery '''and '''Resistance''' text boxes.
||Here we can see '''Voltage of the battery '''and '''Resistance''' text boxes.

We can change the values of voltage and resistance using these text boxes.

|-
|| Enter the value 1000 volts in '''Voltage of the battery''' text-box and show.
||The maximum limit of '''Voltage of the battery '''is 1000 '''V'''.

|-
|| Similarly enter 1000 ohms in''' Resistance '''text-box.
||The maximum limit of '''Resistance '''is 1000''' ohms.'''

|-
|| Click on''' Reset '''button.
||Click on '''Reset''' button to get the default values.

|-
||
||In this '''App''' we will learn about series and parallel combinations of resistances.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in series.'''
Point to the resistance value.
||To add resistors in series click on '''Add resistor in series '''button.

Notice that the added resistor is in series with the original resistor.

It also has the same resistance value, 100 ohms.

|-
|| Point to the selected resistor then point to the '''Resistance''' text-box.

Enter 50 ohms in text-box.
||We can change the value of the selected resistor in the '''Resistance''' text-box.

Change the value of '''Resistance''' to 50 ohms.

|-
|| Cursor at the bottom of the yellow panel.
||Here we can see the values of''' Voltage''', '''Amperage''' and '''Resistance '''of the circuit.

|-
|| Cursor on these 2 meters.
||At the bottom of the green panel there are two check-boxes for meters.

'''Voltage''' and '''Amperage'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Voltage''' check box.
||Click on the '''Voltage''' check box.

|-
|| Cursor on the resistance that is bold.
||Observe that voltmeter is connected to the resistor which is selected by default.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Voltage '''check-box.
||Uncheck the''' Voltage''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on the first resistance.
||Click on other resistance in the circuit.
|-
|| Click on the '''Voltage''' check box.
||Again click on '''Voltage''' check-box.

|-
|| Cursor on the resistance and voltmeter.
||Now the voltmeter is connected to the selected resistance.

|-
|| Click on''' Amperage''' check-box.
||Next click on '''Amperage '''check-box to see the value of current.

|-
|| Point to ammeter and then voltmeter.
||Note that ammeter is connected in series and voltmeter is connected in parallel.

|-
|| Cursor on the ammeter.
||Ammeter is a device of a lower resistance value.

So it allows current to pass through it.

Hence it is connected in series.

|-
|| Cursor on the voltmeter.
||On the other hand voltmeter is a device with high resistance.

If we connect it in series it will resist the flow of current in the circuit.

|-
|| Cursor on the voltmeter.
||That is why it is connected in parallel to allow the current to pass through.

|-
|| Click on''' Reset''' button.
||Click on the '''Reset '''button.

|-
|| Enter 250 in '''Resistance''' text-box.
||Change the value of '''Resistance''' to 250 ohms.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in series '''for 2 times.
||Next click on '''Add resistor in series '''to''' '''add 2 more resistances.

Remember that we can only use three resistors in series.

|-
|| Click and move the cursor on the resistors.
||Click and move the cursor on the resistors in the circuit.

It shows 750 ohms.

This is the value of equivalent resistances in series.

|-
||
||Now let us know how to calculate the series and parallel resistances.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in parallel'''
||Next click on '''Add resistor in parallel '''button.

|-
|| Point to the resistor added parallelly.
||Note that a resistor of 250 ohms is added parallelly to the series resistances.

|-
|| Click and move the cursor over the resistances.
||Again click and move the cursor over the resistances.

|-
|| Point to the value.
||Here the value of equivalent resistance is 188 ohm.

|-
||
||Let us see how the '''App '''has calculated the value of equivalent resistance.

|-
|| Shown on the interface.

Series and Parallel Resistance

R = R1 + R2 + R3

<nowiki>= 250 + 250 + 250</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 750 ohm</nowiki>

1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2

<nowiki>= 1/ 750 + 1/250</nowiki>

<nowiki>= (250 x 750 )/ (250 + 750)</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 187500/ 1000</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 187.5 ohm</nowiki>
||The three resistance are in series combination, so we will add these resistances.
That is

R = R1 + R2 + R3

<nowiki>= 250 + 250 + 250</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 750 ohm</nowiki>s

This 750 ohms resistance is connected in parallel with a 250 ohms resistance.

To calculate parallel combination we use this formula:

1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2

I will substitute the value of R1 as 750 ohms and R2 as 250 ohms.

I have solved the equation and got the value as 187.5 ohm.

|-
|| Cursor on the equivalent resistance value.
||Back to the interface, calculated value is comparable to the observed value.

|-
||
||Let us solve a numerical based on series combination.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Numerical'''

'''Consider a series circuit with three resistors of resistances 110 ohms,

50 ohms and 180 ohms with a 20 volts battery.'''

'''Calculate the equivalent resistance and current in the circuit.'''
||Please pause the video and read the numerical.

Now according to the numerical let us form a circuit on the interface.

|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button
||Click on the '''Reset''' button.

|-
|| Enter 20 V in '''Voltage of the battery '''text-box.
||Change the '''Voltage of the battery '''to 20 '''V'''.

|-
|| Enter 110 ohms in '''Resistance''' text-box. And press '''Enter'''.
||Enter 110 ohms in '''Resistance''' text-box and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in series '''button.
||Click on '''Add resistor in series '''button.

|-
|| Enter 50 ohms in '''Resistance''' text-box. and press '''Enter'''.
||Change the value of selected resistor to 50 ohms.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in series '''button.

Enter 180 ohms in '''Resistance''' text-box and press '''Enter'''.
||Similarly add the third resistor and change the value to 180 ohms.

|-
|| Show the text-box for calculation on the interface.

R = R1 + R2 + R3

<nowiki>= 110 + 50+180</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 340 ohms</nowiki>
||As the resistors are connected in series we will add the resistances.

So, the calculated value of resistance is 340 ohms.

|-
|| Show the formula first on the interface.
V=IR
||Next to calculate the current in the circuit we will use the ohm’s law.

|-
|| Show the formula on the interface.
I = V/R
||Rearrange the equation so as to calculate the value of current.

|-
|| I= 20/ 340

<nowiki>= 1/17</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 0.0588 A</nowiki>
||Substitute the value of voltage and equivalent resistance.

Click on the '''Amperage '''check-box to see the value of current.

Observe that the values are same.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Assignment'''

In a circuit three resistors of resistances 10 ohm, 30 ohm,
and 60 ohm are connected in parallel.

The voltage of the battery is 15 V.

Calculate the equivalent resistance and current in the circuit.

||As an assignment solve this numerical.

|-
||
||Let us summarize

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Summary'''
||Using these '''Apps '''we,
* Verified Ohm’s Law.
* Solved a numerical based on Ohm’s Law.
* Drawn a graph to find the relation between voltage and current.
* Solved a numerical based on series and parallel combination.
* Calculated the value of current in the circuit.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
||These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
||The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

||The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
||This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Wheatstone's-Bridge-and-Potentiometer/English

2020-07-31T11:50:07Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Wheatstone Bridge '''and '''Potentiometer.'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to
* Simulate the working of wheatstone bridge.
* Solve a numerical based on wheatstone bridge.
* Simulate the working of potentiometer.
* Solve a numerical based on potentiometer.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://spoken-tutorial.org/ https://spoken-tutorial.org/] '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.
For the Pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,

'''Wheatstone's Bridge''' and''' Potentiometer Apps'''.

|-
|| Downloads folder>> html5phen>>phen>>

'''wheatstonebridge_en.htm''' file>> Right click >> open with Firefox web browser.
|| To open the App, right-click on '''wheatstonebridge_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox Web Browser '''option.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The '''App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to the rectangle with Question mark'''(?)'''
|| Wheatstone’s bridge is a simple circuit for measuring the unknown resistance.

|-
|| Point to the circuit.
|| Meter bridge uses the same principle for practical purposes.

First we will learn about the circuit connections.

|-
|| Point to the four resistances.
|| The circuit shows a simple series-parallel arrangement of resistances.

|-
|| Point to voltage supply connections.
|| The resistances are connected between the voltage supply and ground.

|-
|| Point to the galvanometer.
|| A galvanometer is connected between the two parallel branches of resistances.

Galvanometer is a device to detect small changes in current in the circuit.

|-
|| Point to show the connection.

Point to the scale.

Drag the sliding contact show the changes.
|| The negative terminal of the galvanometer is connected to the wire of 1 cm.

The measurement of the wire is shown by the scale.

We can drag the sliding contact along the wire.

|-
|| Point to show the sliding resistor.
|| In the green panel the Sliding resistor is that of the wire.

|-
|| Change the value in the text field and show.
|| We can vary the Sliding resistor from 1 ohm to 1000 ohms.

|-
|| Point to '''Comparable resistance.'''
|| In the green panel we can also edit the values of '''Comparable resistor .'''

It is the standard resistance of the circuit.

|-
|| In the green control panel point to '''Voltage of the power supply.'''
|| '''Voltage of the power supply''' can take values from 1-10 '''Volts'''.

We can also change the '''Resistance of the meter.'''

'''Resistance of the meter '''depends on the comparable resistor.

|-
|| Point to the check-box
'''Indicate voltage '''

'''Indicate amperage'''
|| At the bottom of control panel there are two check boxes.

'''Indicate voltage '''

'''Indicate amperage'''

|-
|| Select both check-box.

Point to the values of voltage and current.
|| Select both the check-boxs.

Observe that the values of voltage and current are shown in the circuit.

|-
|| Point to show the unkown resistance.
|| We can calculate the unknown resistance when the bridge is balanced.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us now see how to balance the bridge.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Select''' Indicate voltage '''and''' Indicate amperage''' check-boxes.
|| Click on '''Indicate voltage '''and''' Indicate amperage''' check-boxes.

|-
|| Drag the sliding contact to get 0 amperage.
|| To balance the bridge, drag the sliding contact to get a zero amperage.

|-
|| Point to the slider '''Position of the sliding contact.'''

Also show by dragging the slider.
|| We can also drag the slider in the green panel to change the amperage.

|-
|| Point the values of voltage.
|| Observe the value of voltage and current at each resistances.

The values are balanced in series- parallel arrangement of resistances.

|-
|| Point to the 0.00 mA.

At the bottom point to the white box at the bottom of the yellow panel.
|| At the point when amperage is zero we can calculate the unknown resistance.

At the bottom of the yellow panel, a message appears.

It reads “'''Now the resistance can be calculated”.'''

|-
|| Point to '''Calculate resistance''' button.
|| '''Calculate resistance''' button is now active.

|-
|| Click on '''Calculate resistance '''button.
|| Click on the '''Calculate resistance '''button.

|-
|| Point to the value of '''Rx.'''
|| In the white coloured box the value of unkown resistance is displayed.

|-
|| Point to the Rx '''value '''
|| The measured value for '''Rx '''is 908 ohms.

Here the value may change for you.

|-
|| Click on the '''New measurement '''button.
|| Click on the '''New measurement '''button''' '''for measuring the next set of values.

|-
|| Drag the slider contact to zero.
|| Again drag the sliding contact to zero.
|-
|| Click on '''Calculate resistance '''button.
|| Click on '''Calculate resistance''' button.

|-
|| Point to the value.
|| Observe the change in the value of unkown resistance.

This is because, galvanometer is a sensitive device.

It will change the value every time when we click on the '''New measurement''' button.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Edit the value of Comparable resistance to 1000 ohms and show the change in the Resistance of the meter.
|| Let us change the C'''omparable resistor '''to 1000 ohms.

Observe that '''Resistance of the meter''' changes to 10 ohms.

|-
||
|| Now let us calculate the unknown resistance.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Unknown Resistance'''

'''Rx={R2/R1}*R3'''

'''R1 and R2 is the sliding resistor. '''

'''R3 is the comparable resistance.'''
|| The formula to calculate the unknown resistance is,

Rx={R2/R1}*R3

R1 and R2 is the sliding resistor.
R3 is the comparable resistance.

|-
|| Click on '''New measurement button.'''
|| Click on the '''New measurement button.'''

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Comparable''' '''resistance '''to 800 ohms. And press Enter.
|| Change the '''Comparable resistance''' to 800 '''ohms '''and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Drag the '''Sliding contact''' to get zero ampere
|| Again get the zero amperage by dragging the slider.

|-
|| Show this in a text-box on the interface.

Point to the calculated value.
|| Now in the formula substitute the values of R1, R2, and R3.

Substitute the value of R1 as 93

R2 as 107 and R3 as 800 ohms.

Here the calculated value of unkown resistance in 816.16 '''ohms'''.

Here you can get a different value as the galvanometer is sensitive.

|-
||
|| Now let us compare with the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| and then click on '''Calculate resistance.'''
|| Click on the '''Calculate resistance '''button.

Observe that the calculated value is comparable with the measured value.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment '''

In the circuit change the value of comparable resistance to 100 ohms and

sliding resistance to 65 ohms.

Calculate the unknown resistance of the circuit.

|| As an assignment solve this numerical.

|-
||
|| Let us explore the '''Potentiometer''' '''App'''.

|-
|| Directly open from the '''phen '''folder.
|| Follow the same steps to open the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the circuit
|| The interface opens with the potentiometer circuit.

The potentiometer is a voltage divider used for measuring voltage.

It is also used to control the flow of current.

|-
|| Point to the three resistors.

Point to the '''Sliding resistor.'''
|| The circuit has three resistors.

Here two resistors are connected in series and used as a sliding resistor.

|-
|| Point to the 3rd resistor in the circuit.
|| The third resistor is the '''Resistance of the''' '''appliance.'''

|-
|| Point to the voltmeter.
|| The voltmeter is connected in parallel to the resistance.

The volmeter shows the output voltage of the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the scale.
|| A scale is provided to take the measurement of voltage at that particular point.

The reading on scale is from 0.0 cm to 1.0 cm.

|-
|| Drag the '''Position of the sliding contact''' to 0.4 cm
|| Drag the '''Position of the sliding contact''' to 0.4 cm.

|-
|| Point to the '''Voltmeter'''.
|| The value of voltage at this point is 1.90 V(Volts).

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Resistance of the appliance''' to '''1000 Ohms.'''
|| Now increase the '''Resistance of the appliance '''to 1000 ohms.

|-
|| Point to the voltage in the voltmeter.
|| Observe that the value of output voltage increased to 1.98 volts.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| If we increase the value of potentiometer resistance, output voltage increases.

|-
||
|| We can also calculate the Voltage using the '''Ohm’s Law.'''

|-
|| Click on the check-box of '''Indicate amperage'''.
|| Check the check-box '''Indicate amperage'''.

|-
|| Point to the value in the circuit.
|| Note that resistance till the point 0.4 cm is 40 ohms.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Ohm’s Law'''

'''V=IR'''

'''<nowiki>=0.048 * </nowiki>40'''

'''<nowiki>=1.</nowiki>942V'''
|| So we can calculate voltage using formula

V=IR

Substitute the value of current and resistance from the App.

The value for voltage is almost same as that for measured value.

|-
|| Point to the the graph.
|| The graph is plotted for Voltage v/s length of the scale.

|-
|| Point to the blue point in the graph.
|| The blue point shows the value of voltage at point 0.4 cm.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Sliding resistor''' to 1000 Ohms in the control panel.

Press '''Enter.'''
|| Change the value of '''Sliding resistor''' to 1000 ohms and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to the value of current.
|| Observe that the value of current has decreased to 0.003 A.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| So here we can say that potentiometer controls the flow of current.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Let us make a tabular column to study a graph of voltage v/s length.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart '''App'''.

|-
|| Edit the '''Voltage of the power supply''' to 10 V. And Press Enter.
|| Change the value of '''Voltage of the power supply''' to 10 V and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Drag the Sliding contact to 0.0 cm.
|| Drag the sliding contact to 0.0 cm.

|-
|| Point to the value of resistance and voltage.
|| The resistance and voltage at this point are zero.

|-
|| Drag the Sliding contact to 0.1 cm.
|| Drag the sliding contact to 0.1 cm.

|-
|| Point to value of length, current, and voltage.
|| Tabulate the values of length, current and voltage in the tabular column.

|-
|| Drag it to 0.2 cm
|| Drag sliding contact to 0.2 cm and tabulate the values in the table.

Smilarly take four more values and enter these values in the table.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Here is the completed table.

Observe that if length increases the output voltage also increases.

Hence the graph is linear.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Assignment '''

Change the values of Resistance of the appliance to 500 ohms,
700 ohms, 800 ohms.

Find the output voltage.
|| As an assignment

Change the values of Resistance of the appliance to 500 ohms, 700 ohms, 800 ohms.

Find the output voltage.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial we have,
* Simulated the working of wheatstone bridge.
* Solved a numerical based on wheatstone bridge.
* Simulated the working of potentiometer.
* Solved numerical based on potentiometer.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Wheatstone's-Bridge-and-Potentiometer/English

2020-07-30T19:45:34Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with "{|border=1 |- || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Slide Number 1''' '''Title Slide''' || Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Wheatstone Bridge '''and '''Potenti..."

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Wheatstone Bridge '''and '''Potentiometer.'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to
* Simulate the working of wheatstone bridge.
* Solve a numerical based on wheatstone bridge.
* Simulate the working of potentiometer.
* Solve a numerical based on potentiometer.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://spoken-tutorial.org/ https://spoken-tutorial.org/] '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.
For the Pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,

'''Wheatstone's Bridge''' and''' Potentiometer Apps'''.

|-
|| Downloads folder>> html5phen>>phen>>

'''wheatstonebridge_en.htm''' file>> Right click >> open with Firefox web browser.
|| To open the App, right-click on '''wheatstonebridge_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox Web Browser '''option.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The '''App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to the rectangle with Question mark'''(?)'''
|| Wheatstone’s bridge is a simple circuit for measuring the unknown resistance.

|-
|| Point to the circuit.
|| Meter bridge uses the same principle for practical purposes.

First we will learn about the circuit connections.

|-
|| Point to the four resistances.
|| The circuit shows a simple series-parallel arrangement of resistances.

|-
|| Point to voltage supply connections.
|| The resistances are connected between the voltage supply and ground.

|-
|| Point to the galvanometer.
|| A galvanometer is connected between the two parallel branches of resistances.

Galvanometer is a device to detect small changes in current in the circuit.

|-
|| Point to show the connection.

Point to the scale.

Drag the sliding contact show the changes.
|| The negative terminal of the galvanometer is connected to the wire of 1 cm.

The measurement of the wire is shown by the scale.

We can drag the sliding contact along the wire.

|-
|| Point to show the sliding resistor.
|| In the green panel the Sliding resistor is that of the wire.

|-
|| Change the value in the text field and show.
|| We can vary the Sliding resistor from 1 ohms to 1000 ohms.

|-
|| Point to '''Comparable resistance.'''
|| In the green panel we can also edit the values of '''Comparable resistor .'''

It is the standard resistance of the circuit.

|-
|| In the green control panel point to '''Voltage of the power supply.'''
|| '''Voltage of the power supply''' can take values from 1-10 '''Volts'''.

We can also change the '''Resistance of the meter.'''

'''Resistance of the meter '''depends on the comparable resistor.

|-
|| Point to the check-box
'''Indicate voltage '''

'''Indicate amperage'''
|| At the bottom of control panel there are two check boxes.

'''Indicate voltage '''

'''Indicate amperage'''

|-
|| Select both check-box.

Point to the values of voltage and current.
|| Select both the check-boxs.

Observe that the values of voltage and current are shown in the circuit.

|-
|| Point to show the unkown resistance.
|| We can calculate the unknown resistance when the bridge is balanced.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now let us see how to balance the bridge.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Select''' Indicate voltage '''and''' Indicate amperage''' check-boxes.
|| Click on '''Indicate voltage '''and''' Indicate amperage''' check-boxes.

|-
|| Drag the sliding contact to get 0 amperage.
|| To balance the bridge, drag the sliding contact to get a zero amperage.

|-
|| Point to the slider '''Position of the sliding contact.'''

Also show by dragging the slider.
|| We can also drag the slider in the green panel to change the amperage.

|-
|| Point the values of voltage.
|| Observe the value of voltage and current at each resistances.

The values are balanced in series- parallel arrangement of resistances.

|-
|| Point to the 0.00 mA.

At the bottom point to the white box at the bottom of the yellow panel.
|| At the point when amperage is zero we can calculate the unknown resistance.

At the bottom of the yellow panel, a message appears.

It reads “'''Now the resistance can be calculated”.'''

|-
|| Point to '''Calculate resistance''' button.
|| '''Calculate resistance''' button is now active.

|-
|| Click on '''Calculate resistance '''button.
|| Click on the '''Calculate resistance '''button.

|-
|| Point to the value of '''Rx.'''
|| In the white coloured box the value of unkown resistance is displayed.

|-
|| Point to the Rx '''value '''
|| The measured value for '''Rx '''is 908 ohms.

Here the value may change for you.

|-
|| Click on the '''New measurement '''button.
|| Click on the '''New measurement '''button''' '''for measuring the next set of values.

|-
|| Drag the slider contact to zero.
|| Again drag the sliding contact to zero.
|-
|| Click on '''Calculate resistance '''button.
|| Click on '''Calculate resistance''' button.

|-
|| Point to the value.
|| Observe the change in the value of unkown resistance.

This is because, galvanometer is a sensitive device.

It will change the value every time when we click on the '''New measurement''' button.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Edit the value of Comparable resistance to 1000 ohms and show the change in the Resistance of the meter.
|| Let us change the C'''omparable resistor '''to 1000 ohms.

Observe that '''Resistance of the meter''' changes to 10 ohms.

|-
||
|| Now let us calculate the unknown resistance.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Unknown Resistance'''

'''Rx={R2/R1}*R3'''

'''R1 and R2 is the sliding resistor. '''

'''R3 is the comparable resistance.'''
|| The formula to calculate the unknown resistance is,

Rx={R2/R1}*R3

R1 and R2 is the sliding resistor.
R3 is the comparable resistance.

|-
|| Click on '''New measurement button.'''
|| Click on the '''New measurement button.'''

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Comparable''' '''resistance '''to 800 ohms. And press Enter.
|| Change the '''Comparable resistance''' to 800 '''ohms '''and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Drag the '''Sliding contact''' to get zero ampere
|| Again get the zero amperage by dragging the slider.

|-
|| Show this in a text-box on the interface.

Point to the calculated value.
|| Now in the formula substitute the values of R1, R2, and R3.

Substitute the value of R1 as 93

R2 as 107 and R3 as 800 ohms.

Here the calculated value of unkown resistance in 816.16 '''ohms'''.

Here you can get a different value as the galvanometer is sensitive.

|-
||
|| Now let us compare with the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| and then click on '''Calculate resistance.'''
|| Click on the '''Calculate resistance '''button.

Observe that the calculated value is comparable with the measured value.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment '''

In the circuit change the value of comparable resistance to 100 ohms and

sliding resistance to 65 ohms.

Calculate the unknown resistance of the circuit.

|| As an assignment solve this numerical.

|-
||
|| Let us explore the '''Potentiometer''' '''App'''.

|-
|| Directly open from the '''phen '''folder.
|| Follow the same steps to open the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the circuit
|| The interface opens with the potentiometer circuit.

The potentiometer is a voltage divider used for measuring voltage.

It is also used to control the flow of current.

|-
|| Point to the three resistors.

Point to the '''Sliding resistor.'''
|| The circuit has three resistors.

Here two resistors are connected in series and used as a sliding resistor.

|-
|| Point to the 3rd resistor in the circuit.
|| The third resistor is the '''Resistance of the''' '''appliance.'''

|-
|| Point to the voltmeter.
|| The voltmeter is connected in parallel to the resistance.

The volmeter shows the output voltage of the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the scale.
|| A scale is provided to take the measurement of voltage at that particular point.

The reading on scale is from 0.0 cm to 1.0 cm.

|-
|| Drag the '''Position of the sliding contact''' to 0.4 cm
|| Drag the '''Position of the sliding contact''' to 0.4 cm.

|-
|| Point to the '''Voltmeter'''.
|| The value of voltage at this point is 1.90 V(Volts).

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Resistance of the appliance''' to '''1000 Ohms.'''
|| Now increase the '''Resistance of the appliance '''to 1000 ohms.

|-
|| Point to the voltage in the voltmeter.
|| Observe that the value of output voltage increased to 1.98 volts.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| If we increase the value of potentiometer resistance, output voltage increases.

|-
||
|| We can also calculate the Voltage using the '''Ohm’s Law.'''

|-
|| Click on the check-box of '''Indicate amperage'''.
|| Check the check-box '''Indicate amperage'''.

|-
|| Point to the value in the circuit.
|| Note that resistance till the point 0.4 cm is 40 ohms.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Ohm’s Law'''

'''V=IR'''

'''<nowiki>=0.048 * </nowiki>40'''

'''<nowiki>=1.</nowiki>942V'''
|| So we can calculate voltage using formula

V=IR

Substitute the value of current and resistance from the App.

The value for voltage is almost same as that for measured value.

|-
|| Point to the the graph.
|| The graph is plotted for Voltage v/s length of the scale.

|-
|| Point to the blue point in the graph.
|| The blue point shows the value of voltage at point 0.4 cm.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Sliding resistor''' to 1000 Ohms in the control panel.

Press '''Enter.'''
|| Change the value of '''Sliding resistor''' to 1000 ohms and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to the value of current.
|| Observe that the value of current has decreased to 0.003 A.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| So here we can say that potentiometer controls the flow of current.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Let us make a tabular column to study a graph of voltage v/s length.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart '''App'''.

|-
|| Edit the '''Voltage of the power supply''' to 10 V. And Press Enter.
|| Change the value of '''Voltage of the power supply''' to 10 V and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Drag the Sliding contact to 0.0 cm.
|| Drag the sliding contact to 0.0 cm.

|-
|| Point to the value of resistance and voltage.
|| The resistance and voltage at this point are zero.

|-
|| Drag the Sliding contact to 0.1 cm.
|| Drag the sliding contact to 0.1 cm.

|-
|| Point to value of length, current, and voltage.
|| Tabulate the values of length, current and voltage in the tabular column.

|-
|| Drag it to 0.2 cm
|| Drag sliding contact to 0.2 cm and tabulate the values in the table.

Smilarly take four more values and enter these values in the table.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Here is the completed table.

Observe that if length increases the output voltage also increases.

Hence the graph is linear.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Assignment '''

Change the values of Resistance of the appliance to 500 ohms,
700 ohms, 800 ohms.

Find the output voltage.
|| As an assignment

Change the values of Resistance of the appliance to 500 ohms, 700 ohms, 800 ohms.

Find the output voltage.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial we have,
* Simulated the working of wheatstone bridge.
* Solved a numerical based on wheatstone bridge.
* Simulated the working of potentiometer.
* Solved numerical based on potentiometer.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Ohm's-Law-and-its-Applications/English

2020-07-30T19:30:45Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with "{|border=1 |- || '''Visual cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Slide Number 1''' '''Title Slide''' ||Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Ohm's law and its applications.'''..."

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
||Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Ohm's law and its applications.'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
||At the end of this tutorial you will be able to:
* Verify Ohm’s Law.
* Solve a numerical based on Ohm’s law.
* Draw a graph to find the relation between voltage and current.
* Solve a numerical based on series and parallel combination.
* Calculate the value of current in the circuit.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
||Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
||To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisite tutorial please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Link for the Apps on Physics'''

'''http://www.walter-fendt.de'''
||Use the given link to download the Apps.

'''http://www.walter-fendt.de'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
||In this tutorial we will use

'''Ohm’s Law''' and

'''Combinations of Resistors''' '''Apps'''.

|-
|| From the '''phen''' folder Search '''ohmslaw.'''

Right click on the '''ohmslaw_en.htm''' file.

Select option '''Open With Firefox Web Browser.'''
||I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

Right click on the '''ohmslaw_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open With Firefox Web Browser '''option.

'''Ohm’s Law App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to the circuit and 200 ohm resistor.
||The '''App '''shows a simple circuit containing one resistor.

|-
|| Point to the following buttons

'''Increase resistance '''

'''Reduce resistance '''

'''Increase voltage '''

'''Reduce voltage'''
||Green panel has two yellow buttons for resistance and two blue buttons for voltage.

We can increase or decrease, the resistance and voltage using these buttons.

|-
|| Click on the '''Increase resistance''' button.
||Click on '''Increase resistance '''button.

|-
|| Point to the ammeter in the circuit.

Cursor on the resistance and then on the current.
||Notice that as we increase the resistance, ammeter shows decrease in the current.

This increase in resistance, decreases the current in the circuit.

|-
|| Point to show the value at the bottom of the green panel.
||The value of current decreased from 0.03 A to 0.02 A.

|-
|| Click on the '''Increase voltage''' button.
||Click on the '''Increase voltage''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the voltmeter.
||Change in voltage is shown by the voltmeter connected in the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the '''Maximal voltage''' drop down.
||The maximum voltage of a circuit is 10 '''V'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Maximal voltage''' drop down.
||Click on the '''Maximal voltage''' drop down.

|-
|| Move the cursor on the '''Maximal voltage '''drop down.
||Here we can see various ranges for the maximum voltage.

We can vary the voltage between these measuring ranges.

|-
|| Click on '''Maximal voltage''' drop down and select 100 v.
||From the '''Maximal voltage''' drop down select 100 '''V'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Maximal voltage'''.
||Note that we can vary voltage between 1 to 100 '''V'''.

|-
|| Continuously click on the '''Increase voltage''' button.

Point to show the value of voltage '''u'''.
||Click on the '''Increase voltage''' button continuously.

Notice that the voltage increases in the steps of 10 '''V'''.

|-
|| Point to the voltmeter in the circuit.
|| When voltage crosses the maximum voltage range, circuit prompts '''Maximum exceeded'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Maximal amperage '''drop down.

Point to the ammeter in the circuit.
||Note that the''' Maximal amperage''' range is 100 mA.

So when the current in the circuit exceeds 100 mA circuit shows '''Maximum exceeded''' below the ammeter.

|-
|| Cursor on the '''Maximal amperage'''.
||Let us change the '''Maximal amperage''' to 300 mA.

|-
|| Click on '''Maximal amperage''' and select 300 mA.
||Click on the '''Maximal amperage''' drop down.
Select 300 '''milliampere''' from the drop down.

|-
||
||Now let us calculate current in the circuit using '''Ohm'''’s law.

|-
|| Scroll down the screen.
||Scroll down the screen.

|-
|| Point to the Law.
||Here the '''App''' has stated the '''Ohm'''’s law.

It states that, '''Voltage and amperage are directly proportional in a metallic conductor of constant temperature. '''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
||Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Numerical '''

The value of current is 0.0300''' A '''and resistance in the circuit is'''

'''200 '''ohms. '''Using '''Ohm''''s law find the voltage through the circuit'''.'''
||Let us solve this numerical.

First let us change the values of the parameters according to the numerical.

|-
|| On the interface show this text box.

'''1 A = 1000 mA'''

'''0.03 A = 30 mA'''

From the''' Maximal amperage '''drop down select''' 30 mA.'''

Point to the resistance in the circuit.

Show the increase or reduce resistance buttons.
||For that we have to convert the value of current to milliampere.

1 A = 1000 mA

So, 0.03 A = 30 mA

Next from the '''Maximal amperage''' drop down select 30 '''mA'''.

Default value of resistance is 200 '''ohms'''.

To change the resistance click on increase or reduce resistance buttons.

|-
|| Show it on the interface.

Ohm’s Law

'''V= IR'''

'''<nowiki>= 0.0300 </nowiki>x 200'''

'''<nowiki>= </nowiki>6 V'''
||Let us calculate the value of voltage using the formula.

Substitute the values of current and resistance into the formula.

The calculated value of voltage is 6 '''V'''.

It is same as the value shown in the '''App.'''

|-
||
||Let us find the relation between voltage, current and resistance using a graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key.
||Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Select 100 volts from '''Maximal voltage''' drop down.
||From the '''Maximal voltage''' drop down select 100 '''volts.'''

From the '''Maximal amperage''' drop down select 1 '''Ampere'''.

|-
|| Click on''' Increase voltage''' button once.
||Next click on''' Increase voltage''' button.

We can click on '''Increase voltage''' button in the steps of 10 '''V'''.

Observe the change in the current as we change the voltage.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Tabular column'''

'''show the table with values of voltages.'''
||Now make a tabular column to note the values of voltage and current.

Next note the values of current for a given voltage.

|-
||Point to the value of current at 10 volts.
||Go to the interface and check the value of current for 10 '''V'''.

The value is 0.05 Ampere.

|-
|| Click on''' Increase voltage''' button.
||Again click on''' Increase voltage''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Tabular Column'''
||Note the value of current at 20 '''V''' in the tabular column.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Tabular column'''
||Similarly I have noted the values of current in the table.

|-
|| Drawn on the excel.
||Now I will draw a graph using the values of voltage and current.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Current v/s Voltage Graph'''
||Here I have drawn the graph of current v/s voltage.

The graph is linear.

Voltage is directly proportional to current in a metallic conductor.

Here straight line shows the constant of proportionality, that is resistance.

This verifies the''' Ohm'''’s law.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the '''Maximal voltage''' to 1000 V and''' Maximal amperage''' to 10 A.

Make a tabular column to note the values of voltage and current.

Change the voltage in the steps of 100 V.

Draw the graph and explain your observation.
||As an assignment,

Change the '''Maximal voltage''' to 1000 '''V''' and''' Maximal amperage''' to 10 ampere.

Make a tabular column to note the values of voltage and current.

Change the voltage in the steps of 100 V.

Draw the graph and explain your observation.

|-
|| Show the steps here to open Combinations of Resistor.

'''Downloads'''>>''' html5phen'''>> '''phen'''>>'''combinationresistors_en.htm'''
||Let us open the next '''App'''.

Open '''Combinations of Resistor App''' in a similar way as we opened '''Ohm’s Law App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the title.
||'''Combinations of Resistor App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to show the circuit.
||Here the '''App''' shows a simple circuit. It consists of a resistance and battery.

|-
|| Point to '''Voltage of the battery '''and '''Resistance''' text boxes.
||Here we can see '''Voltage of the battery '''and '''Resistance''' text boxes.

We can change the values of voltage and resistance using these text boxes.

|-
|| Enter the value 1000 volts in '''Voltage of the battery''' text-box and show.
||The maximum limit of '''Voltage of the battery '''is 1000 '''V'''.

|-
|| Similarly enter 1000 ohms in''' Resistance '''text-box.
||The maximum limit of '''Resistance '''is 1000''' ohms.'''

|-
|| Click on''' Reset '''button.
||Click on '''Reset''' button to get the default values.

|-
||
||In this '''App''' we will learn about series and parallel combinations of resistances.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in series.'''
Point to the resistance value.
||To add resistors in series click on '''Add resistor in series '''button.

Notice that the added resistor is in series with the original resistor.

It also has the same resistance value, 100 ohms.

|-
|| Point to the selected resistor then point to the '''Resistance''' text-box.

Enter 50 ohms in text-box.
||We can change the value of the selected resistor in the '''Resistance''' text-box.

Change the value of '''Resistance''' to 50 ohms.

|-
|| Cursor at the bottom of the yellow panel.
||Here we can see the values of''' Voltage''', '''Amperage''' and '''Resistance '''of the circuit.

|-
|| Cursor on these 2 meters.
||At the bottom of the green panel there are two check-boxes for meters.

'''Voltage''' and '''Amperage'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Voltage''' check box.
||Click on the '''Voltage''' check box.

|-
|| Cursor on the resistance that is bold.
||Observe that voltmeter is connected to the resistor which is selected by default.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Voltage '''check-box.
||Uncheck the''' Voltage''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on the first resistance.
||Click on other resistance in the circuit.
|-
|| Click on the '''Voltage''' check box.
||Again click on '''Voltage''' check-box.

|-
|| Cursor on the resistance and voltmeter.
||Now the voltmeter is connected to the selected resistance.

|-
|| Click on''' Amperage''' check-box.
||Next click on '''Amperage '''check-box to see the value of current.

|-
|| Point to ammeter and then voltmeter.
||Note that ammeter is connected in series and voltmeter is connected in parallel.

|-
|| Cursor on the ammeter.
||Ammeter is a device of a lower resistance value.

So it allows current to pass through it.

Hence it is connected in series.

|-
|| Cursor on the voltmeter.
||On the other hand voltmeter is a device with high resistance.

If we connect it in series it will resist the flow of current in the circuit.

|-
|| Cursor on the voltmeter.
||That is why it is connected in parallel to allow the current to pass through.

|-
|| Click on''' Reset''' button.
||Click on the '''Reset '''button.

|-
|| Enter 250 in '''Resistance''' text-box.
||Change the value of '''Resistance''' to 250 ohms.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in series '''for 2 times.
||Next click on '''Add resistor in series '''to''' '''add 2 more resistances.

Remember that we can only use three resistors in series.

|-
|| Click and move the cursor on the resistors.
||Click and move the cursor on the resistors in the circuit.

It shows 750 ohms.

This is the value of equivalent resistances in series.

|-
||
||Now let us know how to calculate the series and parallel resistances.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in parallel'''
||Next click on '''Add resistor in parallel '''button.

|-
|| Point to the resistor added parallelly.
||Note that a resistor of 250 ohms is added parallelly to the series resistances.

|-
|| Click and move the cursor over the resistances.
||Again click and move the cursor over the resistances.

|-
|| Point to the value.
||Here the value of equivalent resistance is 188 ohm.

|-
||
||Let us see how the '''App '''has calculated the value of equivalent resistance.

|-
|| Shown on the interface.

Series and Parallel Resistance

R = R1 + R2 + R3

<nowiki>= 250 + 250 + 250</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 750 ohm</nowiki>

1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2

<nowiki>= 1/ 750 + 1/250</nowiki>

<nowiki>= (250 x 750 )/ (250 + 750)</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 187500/ 1000</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 187.5 ohm</nowiki>
||The three resistance are in series combination, so we will add these resistances.
That is

R = R1 + R2 + R3

<nowiki>= 250 + 250 + 250</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 750 ohm</nowiki>s

This 750 ohms resistance is connected in parallel with a 250 ohms resistance.

To calculate parallel combination we use this formula:

1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2

I will substitute the value of R1 as 750 ohms and R2 as 250 ohms.

I have solved the equation and got the value as 187.5 ohm.

|-
|| Cursor on the equivalent resistance value.
||Back to the interface, calculated value is comparable to the observed value.

|-
||
||Let us solve a numerical based on series combination.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Numerical'''

'''Consider a series circuit with three resistors of resistances 110 ohms,

50 ohms and 180 ohms with a 20 volts battery.'''

'''Calculate the equivalent resistance and current in the circuit.'''
||Please pause the video and read the numerical.

Now according to the numerical let us form a circuit on the interface.

|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button
||Click on the '''Reset''' button.

|-
|| Enter 20 V in '''Voltage of the battery '''text-box.
||Change the '''Voltage of the battery '''to 20 '''V'''.

|-
|| Enter 110 ohms in '''Resistance''' text-box. And press '''Enter'''.
||Enter 110 ohms in '''Resistance''' text-box and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in series '''button.
||Click on '''Add resistor in series '''button.

|-
|| Enter 50 ohms in '''Resistance''' text-box. and press '''Enter'''.
||Change the value of selected resistor to 50 ohms.

|-
|| Click on '''Add resistor in series '''button.

Enter 180 ohms in '''Resistance''' text-box and press '''Enter'''.
||Similarly add the third resistor and change the value to 180 ohms.

|-
|| Show the text-box for calculation on the interface.

R = R1 + R2 + R3

<nowiki>= 110 + 50+180</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 340 ohms</nowiki>
||As the resistors are connected in series we will add the resistances.

So, the calculated value of resistance is 340 ohms.

|-
|| Show the formula first on the interface.
V=IR
||Next to calculate the current in the circuit we will use the ohm’s law.

That is V=IR.

|-
|| Show the formula on the interface.
I = V/R
||Rearrange the equation so as to calculate the value of current.
That is I = V/R

|-
|| I= 20/ 340

<nowiki>= 1/17</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 0.0588 A</nowiki>
||Substitute the value of voltage and equivalent resistance.

Click on the '''Amperage '''check-box to see the value of current.

Observe that the values are same.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Assignment'''

In a circuit three resistors of resistances 10 ohm, 30 ohm,
and 60 ohm are connected in parallel.

The voltage of the battery is 15 V.

Calculate the equivalent resistance and current in the circuit.

||As an assignment solve this numerical.

|-
||
||Let us summarize

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Summary'''
||Using these '''Apps '''we,
* Verified Ohm’s Law.
* Solved a numerical based on Ohm’s Law.
* Drawn a graph to find the relation between voltage and current.
* Solved a numerical based on series and parallel combination.
* Calculated the value of current in the circuit.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
||These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
||The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

||The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
||This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Magnetism-and-Electromagnetism/English

2020-07-14T08:12:06Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| Visual cue
|| Narration
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Draw magnetic field lines for a bar magnet.
* Verify right hand thumb rule.
* Verify Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.
* Simulate the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,
'''Magnetic Field of a Bar Magnet'''

'''Magnetic Field of a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''

'''Lorentz Force''' and

'''Generator Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on

'''magneticfieldbar_en.htm''' file.

Select option open with Firefox web Browser option.
|| Right click on''' magneticfieldbar_en.htm '''file.

Select '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option.

'''Magnetic field bar App''' opens.

|-
|| Point to the bar magnet.

Point to the needle.
|| The '''App''' opens showing a magnet and a magnetic needle.

|-
|| Point to '''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet.'''
|| On the green panel there are two buttons.

'''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Move the cursor on Red color of Bar magnet and green color.
|| Poles of a bar magnet and compass needle are represented by the following colors.
Red for north pole and green for south pole.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' buttons.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet '''button.

Observe that both bar magent and magnetic needle change their direction.

|-
|| Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Move the magnetic needle with the pressed mouse.
|| Let us draw the magnetic field lines.

Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Click on the magnetic needle and move the needle up to draw the magnetic lines.

Continue to draw the lines as shown here.

|-
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines''' button.
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines '''button.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Use the pressed mouse to draw the lines.
|| Again draw the magnetic lines around the magnet.

|-
|| Point to the changed direction on the lines.
|| When we turn the magnet, the lines of force change the direction.

|-
|| Point to the direction of arrows
|| The direction of magnetic field outside the bar magnet is from north to south.

It is shown by the arrows.

|-
|| Point to the maximum lines of fields.

Ask question on the interface.

Inside it from south to north.
|| Magnetic field is strongest inside the bar magnet.

Outside the bar magnet it is strongest near the poles.

What is the direction of magnetic field inside the bar magnet?

|-
|| Point to '''Magnetic Fieldof a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''
|| Next we will move on to '''Magnetic Field Line in a Current Carrying Wire App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the Setup.
|| The '''App '''opens showing magnetic field lines around a current carrying wire.

|-
|| Point to '''Reverse current''' buttons.
|| On the right side of the screen we have a '''Reverse current''' button.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow
|| The red arrow indicates the direction of the current.

Note that the direction of current is opposite to that of electrons.

|-
|| Point to minus and plus signs
|| The signs at the ends of the wire symbolize the terminals of the connected battery.
|-
|| Point to concentric circles.
|| The concentric circles are the magnetic field around the current carrying wire.

|-
||
|| Let us find the direction of magnetic field using right hand thumb rule.

|-
||Cursor on the interface.
||Observe the picture and put your right hand as follows.

|-
|| Use your right hand thumb to point the position of direction of the current.
|| Put your right hand thumb in the direction of the current.

|-
|| Curl the fingers inside to palm.
|| Now curl your fingers inside.

Fingers gives you the direction of magnetic field.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Assignment '''
|| As an assignment,

Reverse the current flow and determine the magnetic field.

|-
|| Right click on '''lorentzforce_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Let us move on to the next '''App''', '''Lorentz Force'''.

Follow the same steps as we used for previous '''App '''to open '''htm''' file.

|-
|| Point to the Setup.
|| Interface shows a horseshoe magnet through which a conducting wire is passed.

|-
|| Point to the Blue coloured arrows.
|| The blue arrows shows the direction of the magnetic field.
|-
|| Point to each button.

'''On/Off'''

'''Reverse current'''

'''Turn magnet'''
|| On the green panel we have the following buttons.

'''On/Off '''

'''Reverse current '''

'''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Point to the wire.
|| When the circuit is open, the wire is shown in black colour.

|-
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button to complete the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the red wire and show the switch is on.
|| Notice that the wire is in conduction mode.

This is indicated by the red coloured wire.

|-
|| Point to the each check-box

'''Current direction'''

'''Magnetic field '''

'''Lorentz force.'''
|| At the bottom, there are three check-boxes.

These are''' Current direction, Magnetic field and Lorentz force.'''

|-
|| Point to the black arrow.
|| The black arrow pointing towards right is the '''Lorentz force'''.

|-
|| Show with the cursor the perpendicular state of Lorentz force.
|| '''Lorentz force''' is always perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Click on''' Turn magnet''' button.
|| To change the direction of magnetic field,

click on the '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the direction of '''Lorentz force '''using '''Fleming’s left-hand rule.'''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press''' F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Lorentz force''' check-box'''.'''
|| First uncheck the '''Lorentz force''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.

|-
|| Use left hand fingers to find the force.
|| Now keep your fingers of the left hand as suggested here.

|-
|| Now try to keep your fingers of left hand as

index finger in the direction of magnetic field and

middle finger in the direction of current and

thumb points in the direction of Force.
|| Index finger pointing in the direction of magnetic field.
Middle finger pointing in the direction of current.

Thumb shows the direction of Lorentz force.

|-
||
|| Here the direction of Force is towards the right-side.

This rule is Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Check the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.
|| Let us verify our answer by checking the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.

Observe that the direction is same as shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Reverse the current flow.'''

'''Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.'''
|| As an assignment

Reverse the current flow.

Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.

|-
||
|| Now let us open the '''Generator App'''.

|-
|| Open the App ,following the same procedure.(show the procedure)
|| I will open the '''App '''as before.

|-
|| Cursor in the interface.
|| The '''App '''shows a generator.

|-
|| Point to the generator.
|| An electrical generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

|-
|| Point to the magnet and rectangular loop inside the magnet.
|| The '''App '''opens showing a horseshoe magnet.

A rectangular current carrying coil is inserted between the poles of the magnet.

|-
|| Drag the slider and show the changes.

Point to the rotating coil.

Point to the value of''' 6 rot/min.'''

|| On the green panel, we can change the rotations per minute using the slider.

By default the rectangular coil rotates 6 rotations per minute.

We can change the rotation of the coil to a maximum of 12 rotations per minute.

|-
|| '''Drag to 12 rotations per minute.'''

Cursor on the graph.

Point to show the peaks.
|| Increase the rotation to 12 rotation per minute.

In the graph we can see two complete cycles in one minute.

Here the frequency of the maximum output voltage is doubled.

|-
|| Point to the path of red coloured wire from rectangular coil to voltage source.
|| The rectangular coil is connected to the voltage source through the slip rings.

|-
|| Point to rectangular coil and the blue magnetic field lines.
|| Observe that the rectangular coil is rotating about an axis.

This coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Point to the wooden circular ring.
|| Here rotation of the rectangular coil is a source of mechanical energy.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow.
|| Due to the rotation of the coil, curent is induced into the wire.

The red arrow represents the direction of the induced current.

|-
|| Point to the commutators.
|| In the green panel we can choose an '''AC''' generator or '''DC '''generator.

|-
|| Point to '''Without commutator '''radio button.

Click on '''With commutator '''radio button.

|| By default '''Without commutator''' an '''AC '''generator is selected.

Select '''With commutator '''radio button.

Commutator is a device for reversing the direction of flow of current.

This device ensures that the current flows only in direct current mode.

Hence With Commutator means, the generator is a DC generator.

|-
|| Point to the graph of voltage v/s time.
|| On the top of the circuit, voltage v/s time graph is plotted.

This is the graph of a '''DC''' generator.

|-
|| In the graph point to show the moving blue point.
|| In the graph, moving blue point indicates the change in voltage.

|-
|| Click the '''Change direction''' button and show the change in direction of rectangular coil.
|| '''Change direction''' button changes the direction of the rectangular coil.

Click on the '''Change direction '''button.

Observe the change in the direction of rectangular coil.

Also notice the change in the graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| We can find the direction of induced currect using Fleming’s right-hand rule.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s left-hand rule here.
|| This rule is same as Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Click on '''Pause '''button when the .
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s right hand rule.
|| Now arrange fingers of your right hand as shown in the figure.

|-
||Cursor on the interface.
||We can determine the direction of magnetic field using Fleming's right hand rule.

|-
|| Point to the check-box

'''Direction of movement, '''

'''Magnetic field, '''

'''Induced current'''.
|| There are three check-boxes at the bottom of the green panel.

'''Direction of movement,'''

'''Magnetic field, '''and

'''Induced current'''.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Magnetic field''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the''' Magnetic field''' check-box.

Notice that the magnetic field lines disappear.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Direction of movement '''check-box.
|| In the similar way we can uncheck the remaining check-boxes if not required.

|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keybord to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| AC generator is an alternating current generator.

So, here the graph shows positive as well as negative voltages.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the rotation per minute to 10.

|| As an assignment,

Change the rotations per minute to 0, 3.0, 6.0 and 9.0

Note the changes in the movement of the coil and graph.
Explain the reason for the changes.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps '''we have,

Drawn magnetic field lines of a bar magnet.

Verified right hand thumb rule.

Verified Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.

Simulated the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Magnetism-and-Electromagnetism/English

2020-07-14T08:08:59Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| Visual cue
|| Narration
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Draw magnetic field lines for a bar magnet.
* Verify right hand thumb rule.
* Verify Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.
* Simulate the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,
'''Magnetic Field of a Bar Magnet'''

'''Magnetic Field of a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''

'''Lorentz Force''' and

'''Generator Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on

'''magneticfieldbar_en.htm''' file.

Select option open with Firefox web Browser option.
|| Right click on''' magneticfieldbar_en.htm '''file.

Select '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option.

'''Magnetic field bar App''' opens.

|-
|| Point to the bar magnet.

Point to the needle.
|| The '''App''' opens showing a magnet and a magnetic needle.

|-
|| Point to '''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet.'''
|| On the green panel there are two buttons.

'''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Move the cursor on Red color of Bar magnet and green color.
|| Poles of a bar magnet and compass needle are represented by the following colors.
Red for north pole and green for south pole.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' buttons.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet '''button.

Observe that both bar magent and magnetic needle change their direction.

|-
|| Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Move the magnetic needle with the pressed mouse.
|| Let us draw the magnetic field lines.

Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Click on the magnetic needle and move the needle up to draw the magnetic lines.

Continue to draw the lines as shown here.

|-
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines''' button.
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines '''button.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Use the pressed mouse to draw the lines.
|| Again draw the magnetic lines around the magnet.

|-
|| Point to the changed direction on the lines.
|| When we turn the magnet, the lines of force change the direction.

|-
|| Point to the direction of arrows
|| The direction of magnetic field outside the bar magnet is from north to south.

It is shown by the arrows.

|-
|| Point to the maximum lines of fields.

Ask question on the interface.

Inside it from south to north.
|| Magnetic field is strongest inside the bar magnet.

Outside the bar magnet it is strongest near the poles.

What is the direction of magnetic field inside the bar magnet?

|-
|| Point to '''Magnetic Fieldof a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''
|| Next we will move on to '''Magnetic Field Line in a Current Carrying Wire App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the Setup.
|| The '''App '''opens showing magnetic field lines around a current carrying wire.

|-
|| Point to '''Reverse current''' buttons.
|| On the right side of the screen we have a '''Reverse current''' button.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow
|| The red arrow indicates the direction of the current.

Note that the direction of current is opposite to that of electrons.

|-
|| Point to minus and plus signs
|| The signs at the ends of the wire symbolize the terminals of the connected battery.
|-
|| Point to concentric circles.
|| The concentric circles are the magnetic field around the current carrying wire.

|-
||
|| Let us find the direction of magnetic field using right hand thumb rule.

|-
||Cursor on the interface.
||Observe the picture and put your right hand as follows.

|-
|| Use your right hand thumb to point the position of direction of the current.
|| Put your right hand thumb in the direction of the current.

|-
|| Curl the fingers inside to palm.
|| Now curl your fingers inside.

Fingers gives you the direction of magnetic field.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Assignment '''
|| As an assignment,

Reverse the current flow and determine the magnetic field.

|-
|| Right click on '''lorentzforce_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Let us move on to the next '''App''', '''Lorentz Force'''.

Follow the same steps as we used for previous '''App '''to open '''htm''' file.

|-
|| Point to the Setup.
|| Interface shows a horseshoe magnet through which a conducting wire is passed.

|-
|| Point to the Blue coloured arrows.
|| The blue arrows shows the direction of the magnetic field.
|-
|| Point to each button.

'''On/Off'''

'''Reverse current'''

'''Turn magnet'''
|| On the green panel we have the following buttons.

'''On/Off '''

'''Reverse current '''

'''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Point to the wire.
|| When the circuit is open, the wire is shown in black colour.

|-
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button to complete the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the red wire and show the switch is on.
|| Notice that the wire is in conduction mode.

This is indicated by the red coloured wire.

|-
|| Point to the each check-box

'''Current direction'''

'''Magnetic field '''

'''Lorentz force.'''
|| At the bottom, there are three check-boxes.

These are''' Current direction, Magnetic field and Lorentz force.'''

|-
|| Point to the black arrow.
|| The black arrow pointing towards right is the '''Lorentz force'''.

|-
|| Show with the cursor the perpendicular state of Lorentz force.
|| '''Lorentz force''' is always perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Click on''' Turn magnet''' button.
|| To change the direction of magnetic field,

click on the '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the direction of '''Lorentz force '''using '''Fleming’s left-hand rule.'''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press''' F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Lorentz force''' check-box'''.'''
|| First uncheck the '''Lorentz force''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.

|-
|| Use left hand fingers to find the force.
|| Now keep your fingers of the left hand as suggested here.

|-
|| Now try to keep your fingers of left hand as

index finger in the direction of magnetic field and

middle finger in the direction of current and

thumb points in the direction of Force.
|| Index finger pointing in the direction of magnetic field.
Middle finger pointing in the direction of current.

Thumb shows the direction of Lorentz force.

|-
||
|| Here the direction of Force is towards the right-side.

This rule is Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Check the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.
|| Let us verify our answer by checking the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.

Observe that the direction is same as shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Reverse the current flow.'''

'''Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.'''
|| As an assignment

Reverse the current flow.

Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.

|-
||
|| Now let us open the '''Generator App'''.

|-
|| Open the App ,following the same procedure.(show the procedure)
|| I will open the '''App '''as before.

|-
|| Cursor in the interface.
|| The '''App '''shows a generator.

|-
|| Point to the generator.
|| An electrical generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

|-
|| Point to the magnet and rectangular loop inside the magnet.
|| The '''App '''opens showing a horseshoe magnet.

A rectangular current carrying coil is inserted between the poles of the magnet.

|-
|| Drag the slider and show the changes.

Point to the rotating coil.

Point to the value of''' 6 rot/min.'''

|| On the green panel, we can change the rotations per minute using the slider.

By default the rectangular coil rotates 6 rotations per minute.

We can change the rotation of the coil to a maximum of 12 rotations per minute.

|-
|| '''Drag to 12 rotations per minute.'''

Cursor on the graph.

Point to show the peaks.
|| Increase the rotation to 12 rotation per minute.

In the graph we can see two complete cycles in one minute.

Here the frequency of the maximum output voltage is doubled.

|-
|| Point to the path of red coloured wire from rectangular coil to voltage source.
|| The rectangular coil is connected to the voltage source through the slip rings.

|-
|| Point to rectangular coil and the blue magnetic field lines.
|| Observe that the rectangular coil is rotating about an axis.

This coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Point to the wooden circular ring.
|| Here rotation of the rectangular coil is a source of mechanical energy.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow.
|| Due to the rotation of the coil, curent is induced into the wire.

The red arrow represents the direction of the induced current.

|-
|| Point to the commutators.
|| In the green panel we can choose an '''AC''' generator or '''DC '''generator.

|-
|| Point to '''Without commutator '''radio button.

Click on '''With commutator '''radio button.

|| By default '''Without commutator''' an '''AC '''generator is selected.

Select '''With commutator '''radio button.

Commutator is a device for reversing the direction of flow of current.

This device ensures that the current flows only in direct current mode.

Hence With Commutator means, the generator is a DC generator.

|-
|| Point to the graph of voltage v/s time.
|| On the top of the circuit, voltage v/s time graph is plotted.

This is the graph of a '''DC''' generator.

|-
|| In the graph point to show the moving blue point.
|| In the graph, moving blue point indicates the change in voltage.

|-
|| Click the '''Change direction''' button and show the change in direction of rectangular coil.
|| '''Change direction''' button changes the direction of the rectangular coil.

Click on the '''Change direction '''button.

Observe the change in the direction of rectangular coil.

Also notice the change in the graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| We can find the direction of induced currect using Fleming’s right-hand rule.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s left-hand rule here.
|| This rule is same as Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Click on '''Pause '''button when the .
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s right hand rule.
|| Now arrange fingers of your right hand as shown in the figure.

|-
|| Point to the check-box

'''Direction of movement, '''

'''Magnetic field, '''

'''Induced current'''.
|| There are three check-boxes at the bottom of the green panel.

'''Direction of movement,'''

'''Magnetic field, '''and

'''Induced current'''.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Magnetic field''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the''' Magnetic field''' check-box.

Notice that the magnetic field lines disappear.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Direction of movement '''check-box.
|| In the similar way we can uncheck the remaining check-boxes if not required.

|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keybord to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| AC generator is an alternating current generator.

So, here the graph shows positive as well as negative voltages.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the rotation per minute to 10.

|| As an assignment,

Change the rotations per minute to 0, 3.0, 6.0 and 9.0

Note the changes in the movement of the coil and graph.
Explain the reason for the changes.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps '''we have,

Drawn magnetic field lines of a bar magnet.

Verified right hand thumb rule.

Verified Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.

Simulated the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Magnetism-and-Electromagnetism/English

2020-07-14T08:07:45Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| Visual cue
|| Narration
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Draw magnetic field lines for a bar magnet.
* Verify right hand thumb rule.
* Verify Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.
* Simulate the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,
'''Magnetic Field of a Bar Magnet'''

'''Magnetic Field of a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''

'''Lorentz Force''' and

'''Generator Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on

'''magneticfieldbar_en.htm''' file.

Select option open with Firefox web Browser option.
|| Right click on''' magneticfieldbar_en.htm '''file.

Select '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option.

'''Magnetic field bar App''' opens.

|-
|| Point to the bar magnet.

Point to the needle.
|| The '''App''' opens showing a magnet and a magnetic needle.

|-
|| Point to '''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet.'''
|| On the green panel there are two buttons.

'''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Move the cursor on Red color of Bar magnet and green color.
|| Poles of a bar magnet and compass needle are represented by the following colors.
Red for north pole and green for south pole.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' buttons.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet '''button.

Observe that both bar magent and magnetic needle change their direction.

|-
|| Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Move the magnetic needle with the pressed mouse.
|| Let us draw the magnetic field lines.

Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Click on the magnetic needle and move the needle up to draw the magnetic lines.

Continue to draw the lines as shown here.

|-
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines''' button.
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines '''button.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Use the pressed mouse to draw the lines.
|| Again draw the magnetic lines around the magnet.

|-
|| Point to the changed direction on the lines.
|| When we turn the magnet, the lines of force change the direction.

|-
|| Point to the direction of arrows
|| The direction of magnetic field outside the bar magnet is from north to south.

It is shown by the arrows.

|-
|| Point to the maximum lines of fields.

Ask question on the interface.

Inside it from south to north.
|| Magnetic field is strongest inside the bar magnet.

Outside the bar magnet it is strongest near the poles.

What is the direction of magnetic field inside the bar magnet?

|-
|| Point to '''Magnetic Fieldof a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''
|| Next we will move on to '''Magnetic Field Line in a Current Carrying Wire App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the Setup.
|| The '''App '''opens showing magnetic field lines around a current carrying wire.

|-
|| Point to '''Reverse current''' buttons.
|| On the right side of the screen we have a '''Reverse current''' button.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow
|| The red arrow indicates the direction of the current.

Note that the direction of current is opposite to that of electrons.

|-
|| Point to minus and plus signs
|| The signs at the ends of the wire symbolize the terminals of the connected battery.
|-
|| Point to concentric circles.
|| The concentric circles are the magnetic field around the current carrying wire.

|-
||
|| Let us find the direction of magnetic field using right hand thumb rule.

|-
||Cursor on the interface.
||Observe the picture and put your right hand as follows.

|-
|| Use your right hand thumb to point the position of direction of the current.
|| Put your right hand thumb in the direction of the current.

|-
|| Curl the fingers inside to palm.
|| Now curl your fingers inside.

Fingers gives you the direction of magnetic field.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Assignment '''
|| As an assignment,

Reverse the current flow and determine the magnetic field.

|-
|| Right click on '''lorentzforce_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Let us move on to the next '''App''', '''Lorentz Force'''.

Follow the same steps as we used for previous '''App '''to open '''htm''' file.

|-
|| Point to the Setup.
|| Interface shows a horseshoe magnet through which a conducting wire is passed.

|-
|| Point to the Blue coloured arrows.
|| The blue arrows shows the direction of the magnetic field.
|-
|| Point to each button.

'''On/Off'''

'''Reverse current'''

'''Turn magnet'''
|| On the green panel we have the following buttons.

'''On/Off '''

'''Reverse current '''

'''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Point to the wire.
|| When the circuit is open, the wire is shown in black colour.

|-
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button to complete the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the red wire and show the switch is on.
|| Notice that the wire is in conduction mode.

This is indicated by the red coloured wire.

|-
|| Point to the each check-box

'''Current direction'''

'''Magnetic field '''

'''Lorentz force.'''
|| At the bottom, there are three check-boxes.

These are''' Current direction, Magnetic field and Lorentz force.'''

|-
|| Point to the black arrow.
|| The black arrow pointing towards right is the '''Lorentz force'''.

|-
|| Show with the cursor the perpendicular state of Lorentz force.
|| '''Lorentz force''' is always perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Click on''' Turn magnet''' button.
|| To change the direction of magnetic field,

click on the '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the direction of '''Lorentz force '''using '''Fleming’s left-hand rule.'''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press''' F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Lorentz force''' check-box'''.'''
|| First uncheck the '''Lorentz force''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.

|-
|| Use left hand fingers to find the force.
|| Now keep your fingers of the left hand as suggested here.

|-
|| Now try to keep your fingers of left hand as

index finger in the direction of magnetic field and

middle finger in the direction of current and

thumb points in the direction of Force.
|| Index finger pointing in the direction of magnetic field.
Middle finger pointing in the direction of current.

Thumb shows the direction of Lorentz force.

|-
||
|| Here the direction of Force is towards the right-side.

This rule is Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Check the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.
|| Let us verify our answer by checking the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.

Observe that the direction is same as shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Reverse the current flow.'''

'''Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.'''
|| As an assignment

Reverse the current flow.

Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.

|-
||
|| Now let us open the '''Generator App'''.

|-
|| Open the App ,following the same procedure.(show the procedure)
|| I will open the '''App '''as before.

|-
|| Cursor in the interface.
|| The '''App '''shows a generator.

|-
|| Point to the generator.
|| An electrical generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

|-
|| Point to the magnet and rectangular loop inside the magnet.
|| The '''App '''opens showing a horseshoe magnet.

A rectangular current carrying coil is inserted between the poles of the magnet.

|-
|| Drag the slider and show the changes.

Point to the rotating coil.

Point to the value of''' 6 rot/min.'''

|| On the green panel, we can change the rotations per minute using the slider.

By default the rectangular coil rotates 6 rotations per minute.

We can change the rotation of the coil to a maximum of 12 rotations per minute.

|-
|| '''Drag to 12 rotations per minute.'''

Cursor on the graph.

Point to show the peaks.
|| Increase the rotation to 12 rotation per minute.

In the graph we can see two complete cycles in one minute.

Here the frequency of the maximum output voltage is doubled.

|-
|| Point to the path of red coloured wire from rectangular coil to voltage source.
|| The rectangular coil is connected to the voltage source through the slip rings.

|-
|| Point to rectangular coil and the blue magnetic field lines.
|| Observe that the rectangular coil is rotating about an axis.

This coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Point to the wooden circular ring.
|| Here rotation of the rectangular coil is a source of mechanical energy.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow.
|| Due to the rotation of the coil, curent is induced into the wire.

The red arrow represents the direction of the induced current.

|-
|| Point to the commutators.
|| In the green panel we can choose an '''AC''' generator or '''DC '''generator.

|-
|| Point to '''Without commutator '''radio button.

Click on '''With commutator '''radio button.

|| By default '''Without commutator''' an '''AC '''generator is selected.

Select '''With commutator '''radio button.

Commutator is a device for reversing the direction of flow of current.

This device ensures that the current flows only in direct current mode.

Hence With Commutator means, the generator is a DC generator.

|-
|| Point to the graph of voltage v/s time.
|| On the top of the circuit, voltage v/s time graph is plotted.

This is the graph of a '''DC''' generator.

|-
|| In the graph point to show the moving blue point.(show one more pointer on the voltage source during editing)
|| In the graph, moving blue point indicates the change in voltage.

|-
|| Click the '''Change direction''' button and show the change in direction of rectangular coil.
|| '''Change direction''' button changes the direction of the rectangular coil.

Click on the '''Change direction '''button.

Observe the change in the direction of rectangular coil.

Also notice the change in the graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| We can find the direction of induced currect using Fleming’s right-hand rule.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s left-hand rule here.
|| This rule is same as Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Click on '''Pause '''button when the .
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s right hand rule.(''The fingers of right hand means the same as flemings left hand'')
|| Now arrange fingers of your right hand as shown in the figure.

|-
|| Point to the check-box

'''Direction of movement, '''

'''Magnetic field, '''

'''Induced current'''.
|| There are three check-boxes at the bottom of the green panel.

'''Direction of movement,'''

'''Magnetic field, '''and

'''Induced current'''.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Magnetic field''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the''' Magnetic field''' check-box.

Notice that the magnetic field lines disappear.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Direction of movement '''check-box.
|| In the similar way we can uncheck the remaining check-boxes if not required.

|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keybord to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| AC generator is an alternating current generator.

So, here the graph shows positive as well as negative voltages.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the rotation per minute to 10.

|| As an assignment,

Change the rotations per minute to 0, 3.0, 6.0 and 9.0

Note the changes in the movement of the coil and graph.
Explain the reason for the changes.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps '''we have,

Drawn magnetic field lines of a bar magnet.

Verified right hand thumb rule.

Verified Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.

Simulated the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Magnetism-and-Electromagnetism/English

2020-07-14T08:02:25Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| Visual cue
|| Narration
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Draw magnetic field lines for a bar magnet.
* Verify right hand thumb rule.
* Verify Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.
* Simulate the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,
'''Magnetic Field of a Bar Magnet'''

'''Magnetic Field of a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''

'''Lorentz Force''' and

'''Generator Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on

'''magneticfieldbar_en.htm''' file.

Select option open with Firefox web Browser option.
|| Right click on''' magneticfieldbar_en.htm '''file.

Select '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option.

'''Magnetic field bar App''' opens.

|-
|| Point to the bar magnet.

Point to the needle.
|| The '''App''' opens showing a magnet and a magnetic needle.

|-
|| Point to '''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet.'''
|| On the green panel there are two buttons.

'''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Move the cursor on Red color of Bar magnet and green color.
|| Poles of a bar magnet and compass needle are represented by the following colors.
Red for north pole and green for south pole.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' buttons.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet '''button.

Observe that both bar magent and magnetic needle change their direction.

|-
|| Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Move the magnetic needle with the pressed mouse.
|| Let us draw the magnetic field lines.

Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Click on the magnetic needle and move the needle up to draw the magnetic lines.

Continue to draw the lines as shown here.

|-
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines''' button.
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines '''button.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Use the pressed mouse to draw the lines.
|| Again draw the magnetic lines around the magnet.

|-
|| Point to the changed direction on the lines.
|| When we turn the magnet, the lines of force change the direction.

|-
|| Point to the direction of arrows
|| The direction of magnetic field outside the bar magnet is from north to south.

It is shown by the arrows.

|-
|| Point to the maximum lines of fields.

Ask question on the interface.

Inside it from south to north.
|| Magnetic field is strongest inside the bar magnet.

Outside the bar magnet it is strongest near the poles.

What is the direction of magnetic field inside the bar magnet?

|-
|| Point to '''Magnetic Fieldof a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''
|| Next we will move on to '''Magnetic Field Line in a Current Carrying Wire App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the Setup.
|| The '''App '''opens showing magnetic field lines around a current carrying wire.

|-
|| Point to '''Reverse current''' buttons.
|| On the right side of the screen we have a '''Reverse current''' button.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow
|| The red arrow indicates the direction of the current.

Note that the direction of current is opposite to that of electrons.

|-
|| Point to minus and plus signs
|| The signs at the ends of the wire symbolize the terminals of the connected battery.
|-
|| Point to concentric circles.
|| The concentric circles are the magnetic field around the current carrying wire.

|-
||
|| Let us find the direction of magnetic field using right hand thumb rule.

|-
||Cursor on the interface.
||Observe the picture and put your right hand as follows.

|-
|| Use your right hand thumb to point the position of direction of the current.
|| Put your right hand thumb in the direction of the current.

|-
|| Curl the fingers inside to palm.
|| Now curl your fingers inside.

Fingers gives you the direction of magnetic field.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Assignment '''
|| As an assignment,

Reverse the current flow and determine the magnetic field.

|-
|| Right click on '''lorentzforce_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Let us move on to the next '''App''', '''Lorentz Force'''.

Follow the same steps as we used for previous '''App '''to open '''htm''' file.

|-
|| Point to the Setup.
|| Interface shows a horseshoe magnet through which a conducting wire is passed.

|-
|| Point to the Blue coloured arrows.
|| The blue arrows shows the direction of the magnetic field.
|-
|| Point to each button.

'''On/Off'''

'''Reverse current'''

'''Turn magnet'''
|| On the green panel we have the following buttons.

'''On/Off '''

'''Reverse current '''

'''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Point to the wire.
|| When the circuit is open, the wire is shown in black colour.

|-
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button to complete the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the red wire and show the switch is on.
|| Notice that the wire is in conduction mode.

This is indicated by the red coloured wire.

|-
|| Point to the each check-box

'''Current direction'''

'''Magnetic field '''

'''Lorentz force.'''
|| At the bottom, there are three check-boxes.

These are''' Current direction, Magnetic field and Lorentz force.'''

|-
|| Point to the black arrow.
|| The black arrow pointing towards right is the '''Lorentz force'''.

|-
|| Show with the cursor the perpendicular state of Lorentz force.
|| '''Lorentz force''' is always perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Click on''' Turn magnet''' button.
|| To change the direction of magnetic field,

click on the '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the direction of '''Lorentz force '''using '''Fleming’s left-hand rule.'''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press''' F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Lorentz force''' check-box'''.'''
|| First uncheck the '''Lorentz force''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.

|-
|| Use left hand fingers to find the force.
|| Now keep your fingers of the left hand as suggested here.

|-
|| Now try to keep your fingers of left hand as

index finger in the direction of magnetic field and

middle finger in the direction of current and

thumb points in the direction of Force.
|| Index finger pointing in the direction of magnetic field.
Middle finger pointing in the direction of current.

Thumb shows the direction of Lorentz force.

|-
||
|| Here the direction of Force is towards the right-side.

This rule is Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Check the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.
|| Let us verify our answer by checking the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.

Observe that the direction is same as shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Reverse the current flow.'''

'''Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.'''
|| As an assignment

Reverse the current flow.

Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.

|-
||
|| Now let us open the '''Generator App'''.

|-
|| Open the App ,following the same procedure.(show the procedure)
|| I will open the '''App '''as before.

|-
|| Cursor in the interface.
|| The '''App '''shows a generator.

|-
|| Point to the generator.
|| An electrical generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

|-
|| Point to the magnet and rectangular loop inside the magnet.
|| The '''App '''opens showing a horseshoe magnet.

A rectangular current carrying coil is inserted between the poles of the magnet.

|-
|| Drag the slider and show the changes.

Point to the rotating coil.

Point to the value of''' 6 rot/min.'''

|| On the green panel, we can change the rotations per minute using the slider.

By default the rectangular coil rotates 6 rotations per minute.

We can change the rotation of the coil to a maximum of 12 rotations per minute.

|-
|| '''Drag to 12 rotations per minute.'''

Cursor on the graph.

Point to show the peaks.
|| Increase the rotation to 12 rotation per minute.

In the graph we can see two complete cycles in one minute.

Here the frequency of the maximum output voltage is doubled.

|-
|| Point to the path of red coloured wire from rectangular coil to voltage source.
|| The rectangular coil is connected to the voltage source through the slip rings.

|-
|| Point to rectangular coil and the blue magnetic field lines.
|| Observe that the rectangular coil is rotating about an axis.

This coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Point to the wooden circular ring.
|| Here rotation of the rectangular coil is a source of mechanical energy.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow.
|| Due to the rotation of the coil, curent is induced into the wire.

The red arrow represents the direction of the induced current.

|-
|| Point to the commutators.
|| In the green panel we can choose an '''AC''' generator or '''DC '''generator.

|-
|| Point to '''Without commutator '''radio button.

Click on '''With commutator '''radio button.

|| By default '''Without commutator''' an '''AC '''generator is selected.

Select '''With commutator '''radio button.

Commutator is a device for reversing the direction of flow of current.

This device ensures that the current flows only in direct current mode.

Hence With Commutator means, the generator is a DC generator.

|-
|| Point to the graph of voltage v/s time.
|| On the top of the circuit, voltage v/s time graph is plotted.

This is the graph of a '''DC''' generator.

|-
|| In the graph point to show the moving blue point.(show one more pointer on the voltage source during editing)
|| In the graph, moving blue point indicates the change in voltage.

|-
|| Click the '''Change direction''' button and show the change in direction of rectangular coil.
|| '''Change direction''' button changes the direction of the rectangular coil.

Click on the '''Change direction '''button.

Observe the change in the direction of rectangular coil.

Also notice the change in the graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| We can find the direction of induced currect using Fleming’s right-hand rule.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s left-hand rule here.
|| This rule is same as Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Click on '''Pause '''button when the .
|| Click on '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s right hand rule.(''The fingers of right hand means the same as flemings left hand'')
|| Now arrange fingers of your right hand as shown in the figure.

|-
|| Point to the check-box

'''Direction of movement, '''

'''Magnetic field, '''

'''Induced current'''.
|| There are three check-boxes at the bottom of the green panel.

'''Direction of movement,'''

'''Magnetic field, '''and

'''Induced current'''.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Magnetic field''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the''' Magnetic field''' check-box.

Notice that the magnetic field lines disappear.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Direction of movement '''check-box.
|| In the similar way we can uncheck the remaining check-boxes if not required.

|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keybord to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| AC generator is an alternating current generator.

So, here the graph shows positive as well as negative voltages.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the rotation per minute to 10.

|| As an assignment,

Change the rotations per minute to 0, 3.0, 6.0 and 9.0

Note the changes in the movement of the coil and graph.
Explain the reason for the changes.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps '''we have,

Drawn magnetic field lines of a bar magnet.

Verified right hand thumb rule.

Verified Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.

Simulated the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Magnetism-and-Electromagnetism/English

2020-07-14T07:59:53Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| Visual cue
|| Narration
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Draw magnetic field lines for a bar magnet.
* Verify right hand thumb rule.
* Verify Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.
* Simulate the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,
'''Magnetic Field of a Bar Magnet'''

'''Magnetic Field of a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''

'''Lorentz Force''' and

'''Generator Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on

'''magneticfieldbar_en.htm''' file.

Select option open with Firefox web Browser option.
|| Right click on''' magneticfieldbar_en.htm '''file.

Select '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option.

'''Magnetic field bar App''' opens.

|-
|| Point to the bar magnet.

Point to the needle.
|| The '''App''' opens showing a magnet and a magnetic needle.

|-
|| Point to '''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet.'''
|| On the green panel there are two buttons.

'''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Move the cursor on Red color of Bar magnet and green color.
|| Poles of a bar magnet and compass needle are represented by the following colors.
Red for north pole and green for south pole.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' buttons.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet '''button.

Observe that both bar magent and magnetic needle change their direction.

|-
|| Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Move the magnetic needle with the pressed mouse.
|| Let us draw the magnetic field lines.

Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Click on the magnetic needle and move the needle up to draw the magnetic lines.

Continue to draw the lines as shown here.

|-
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines''' button.
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines '''button.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Use the pressed mouse to draw the lines.
|| Again draw the magnetic lines around the magnet.

|-
|| Point to the changed direction on the lines.
|| When we turn the magnet, the lines of force change the direction.

|-
|| Point to the direction of arrows
|| The direction of magnetic field outside the bar magnet is from north to south.

It is shown by the arrows.

|-
|| Point to the maximum lines of fields.

Ask question on the interface.

Inside it from south to north.
|| Magnetic field is strongest inside the bar magnet.

Outside the bar magnet it is strongest near the poles.

What is the direction of magnetic field inside the bar magnet?

|-
|| Point to '''Magnetic Fieldof a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''
|| Next we will move on to '''Magnetic Field Line in a Current Carrying Wire App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the Setup.
|| The '''App '''opens showing magnetic field lines around a current carrying wire.

|-
|| Point to '''Reverse current''' buttons.
|| On the right side of the screen we have a '''Reverse current''' button.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow
|| The red arrow indicates the direction of the current.

Note that the direction of current is opposite to that of electrons.

|-
|| Point to minus and plus signs
|| The signs at the ends of the wire symbolize the terminals of the connected battery.
|-
|| Point to concentric circles.
|| The concentric circles are the magnetic field around the current carrying wire.

|-
||
|| Let us find the direction of magnetic field using right hand thumb rule.

|-
||Cursor on the interface.
||Observe the picture and put your right hand as follows.

|-
|| Use your right hand thumb to point the position of direction of the current.
|| Put your right hand thumb in the direction of the current.

|-
|| Curl the fingers inside to palm.
|| Now curl your fingers inside.

Fingers gives you the direction of magnetic field.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Assignment '''
|| As an assignment,

Reverse the current flow and determine the magnetic field.

|-
|| Right click on '''lorentzforce_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Let us move on to the next '''App''', '''Lorentz Force'''.

Follow the same steps as we used for previous '''App '''to open '''htm''' file.

|-
|| Point to the Setup.
|| Interface shows a horseshoe magnet through which a conducting wire is passed.

|-
|| Point to the Blue coloured arrows.
|| The blue arrows shows the direction of the magnetic field.
|-
|| Point to each button.

'''On/Off'''

'''Reverse current'''

'''Turn magnet'''
|| On the green panel we have the following buttons.

'''On/Off '''

'''Reverse current '''

'''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Point to the wire.
|| When the circuit is open, the wire is shown in black colour.

|-
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button to complete the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the red wire and show the switch is on.
|| Notice that the wire is in conduction mode.

This is indicated by the red coloured wire.

|-
|| Point to the each check-box

'''Current direction'''

'''Magnetic field '''

'''Lorentz force.'''
|| At the bottom, there are three check-boxes.

These are''' Current direction, Magnetic field, Lorentz force.'''

|-
|| Point to the black arrow.
|| The black arrow pointing towards right is the '''Lorentz force'''.

|-
|| Show with the cursor the perpendicular state of Lorentz force.
|| '''Lorentz force''' is always perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Click on''' Turn magnet''' button.
|| To change the direction of magnetic field,

click on the '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the direction of '''Lorentz force '''using '''Fleming’s left-hand rule.'''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press''' F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Lorentz force''' check-box'''.'''
|| First uncheck the '''Lorentz force''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.

|-
|| Use left hand fingers to find the force.
|| Now keep your fingers of the left hand as suggested here.

|-
|| Now try to keep your fingers of left hand as

index finger in the direction of magnetic field and

middle finger in the direction of current and

thumb points in the direction of Force.
|| Index finger pointing in the direction of magnetic field.
Middle finger pointing in the direction of current.

Thumb shows the direction of Lorentz force.

|-
||
|| Here the direction of Force is towards the right-side.

This rule is Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Check the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.
|| Let us verify our answer by checking the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.

Observe that the direction is same as shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Reverse the current flow.'''

'''Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.'''
|| As an assignment

Reverse the current flow.

Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.

|-
||
|| Now let us open the '''Generator App'''.

|-
|| Open the App ,following the same procedure.(show the procedure)
|| I will open the '''App '''as before.

|-
|| Cursor in the interface.
|| The '''App '''shows a generator.

|-
|| Point to the generator.
|| An electrical generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

|-
|| Point to the magnet and rectangular loop inside the magnet.
|| The '''App '''opens showing a horseshoe magnet.

A rectangular current carrying coil is inserted between the poles of the magnet.

|-
|| Drag the slider and show the changes.

Point to the rotating coil.

Point to the value of''' 6 rot/min.'''

|| On the green panel, we can change the rotations per minute using the slider.

By default the rectangular coil rotates 6 rotations per minute.

We can change the rotation of the coil to a maximum of 12 rotations per minute.

|-
|| '''Drag to 12 rotations per minute.'''

Cursor on the graph.

Point to show the peaks.
|| Increase the rotation to 12 rotation per minute.

In the graph we can see two complete cycles in one minute.

Here the frequency of the maximum output voltage is doubled.

|-
|| Point to the path of red coloured wire from rectangular coil to voltage source.
|| The rectangular coil is connected to the voltage source through the slip rings.

|-
|| Point to rectangular coil and the blue magnetic field lines.
|| Observe that the rectangular coil is rotating about an axis.

This coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Point to the wooden circular ring.
|| Here rotation of the rectangular coil is a source of mechanical energy.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow.
|| Due to the rotation of the coil, curent is induced into the wire.

The red arrow represents the direction of the induced current.

|-
|| Point to the commutators.
|| In the green panel we can choose an '''AC''' generator or '''DC '''generator.

|-
|| Point to '''Without commutator '''radio button.

Click on '''With commutator '''radio button.

|| By default '''Without commutator''' an '''AC '''generator is selected.

Select '''With commutator '''radio button.

Commutator is a device for reversing the direction of flow of current.

This device ensures that the current flows only in direct current mode.

Hence With Commutator means, the generator is a DC generator.

|-
|| Point to the graph of voltage v/s time.
|| On the top of the circuit, voltage v/s time graph is plotted.

This is the graph of a '''DC''' generator.

|-
|| In the graph point to show the moving blue point.(show one more pointer on the voltage source during editing)
|| In the graph, moving blue point indicates the change in voltage.

|-
|| Click the '''Change direction''' button and show the change in direction of rectangular coil.
|| '''Change direction''' button changes the direction of the rectangular coil.

Click on the '''Change direction '''button.

Observe the change in the direction of rectangular coil.

Also notice the change in the graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| We can find the direction of induced currect using Fleming’s right-hand rule.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s left-hand rule here.
|| This rule is same as Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Click on '''Pause '''button when the .
|| Click on '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s right hand rule.(''The fingers of right hand means the same as flemings left hand'')
|| Now arrange fingers of your right hand as shown in the figure.

|-
|| Point to the check-box

'''Direction of movement, '''

'''Magnetic field, '''

'''Induced current'''.
|| There are three check-boxes at the bottom of the green panel.

'''Direction of movement,'''

'''Magnetic field, '''and

'''Induced current'''.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Magnetic field''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the''' Magnetic field''' check-box.

Notice that the magnetic field lines disappear.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Direction of movement '''check-box.
|| In the similar way we can uncheck the remaining check-boxes if not required.

|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keybord to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| AC generator is an alternating current generator.

So, here the graph shows positive as well as negative voltages.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the rotation per minute to 10.

|| As an assignment,

Change the rotations per minute to 0, 3.0, 6.0 and 9.0

Note the changes in the movement of the coil and graph.
Explain the reason for the changes.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps '''we have,

Drawn magnetic field lines of a bar magnet.

Verified right hand thumb rule.

Verified Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.

Simulated the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Magnetism-and-Electromagnetism/English

2020-07-14T07:56:45Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| Visual cue
|| Narration
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Draw magnetic field lines for a bar magnet.
* Verify right hand thumb rule.
* Verify Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.
* Simulate the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,
'''Magnetic Field of a Bar Magnet'''

'''Magnetic Field of a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''

'''Lorentz Force''' and

'''Generator Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on

'''magneticfieldbar_en.htm''' file.

Select option open with Firefox web Browser option.
|| Right click on''' magneticfieldbar_en.htm '''file.

Select '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option.

'''Magnetic field bar App''' opens.

|-
|| Point to the bar magnet.

Point to the needle.
|| The '''App''' opens showing a magnet and a magnetic needle.

|-
|| Point to '''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet.'''
|| On the green panel there are two buttons.

'''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Move the cursor on Red color of Bar magnet and green color.
|| Poles of a bar magnet and compass needle are represented by the following colors.
Red for north pole and green for south pole.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' buttons.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet '''button.

Observe that both bar magent and magnetic needle change their direction.

|-
|| Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Move the magnetic needle with the pressed mouse.
|| Let us draw the magnetic field lines.

Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Click on the magnetic needle and move the needle up to draw the magnetic lines.

Continue to draw the lines as shown here.

|-
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines''' button.
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines '''button.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Use the pressed mouse to draw the lines.
|| Again draw the magnetic lines around the magnet.

|-
|| Point to the changed direction on the lines.
|| When we turn the magnet, the lines of force change the direction.

|-
|| Point to the direction of arrows
|| The direction of magnetic field outside the bar magnet is from north to south.

It is shown by the arrows.

|-
|| Point to the maximum lines of fields.

Ask question on the interface.

Inside it from south to north.
|| Magnetic field is strongest inside the bar magnet.

Outside the bar magnet it is strongest near the poles.

What is the direction of magnetic field inside the bar magnet?

|-
|| Point to '''Magnetic Fieldof a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''
|| Next we will move on to '''Magnetic Field Line in a Current Carrying Wire App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the Setup.
|| The '''App '''opens showing magnetic field lines around a current carrying wire.

|-
|| Point to '''Reverse current''' buttons.
|| On the right side of the screen we have a '''Reverse current''' button.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow
|| The red arrow indicates the direction of the current.

Note that the direction of current is opposite to that of electrons.

|-
|| Point to minus and plus signs
|| The signs at the ends of the wire symbolize the terminals of the connected battery.
|-
|| Point to concentric circles.
|| The concentric circles are the magnetic field around the current carrying wire.

|-
||
|| Let us find the direction of magnetic field using right hand thumb rule.

|-
|| Use your right hand thumb to point the position of direction of the current.
|| Put your right hand thumb in the direction of the current.

|-
|| Curl the fingers inside to palm.
|| Now curl your fingers inside.

Fingers gives you the direction of magnetic field.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Assignment '''
|| As an assignment,

Reverse the current flow and determine the magnetic field.

|-
|| Right click on '''lorentzforce_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Let us move on to the next '''App''', '''Lorentz Force'''.

Follow the same steps as we used for previous '''App '''to open '''htm''' file.

|-
|| Point to the Setup.
|| Interface shows a horseshoe magnet through which a conducting wire is passed.

|-
|| Point to the Blue coloured arrows.
|| The blue arrows shows the direction of the magnetic field.
|-
|| Point to each button.

'''On/Off'''

'''Reverse current'''

'''Turn magnet'''
|| On the green panel we have the following buttons.

'''On/Off '''

'''Reverse current '''

'''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Point to the wire.
|| When the circuit is open, the wire is shown in black colour.

|-
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button to complete the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the red wire and show the switch is on.
|| Notice that the wire is in conduction mode.

This is indicated by the red coloured wire.

|-
|| Point to the each check-box

'''Current direction'''

'''Magnetic field '''

'''Lorentz force.'''
|| At the bottom, there are three check-boxes.

These are''' Current direction, Magnetic field, Lorentz force.'''

|-
|| Point to the black arrow.
|| The black arrow pointing towards right is the '''Lorentz force'''.

|-
|| Show with the cursor the perpendicular state of Lorentz force.
|| '''Lorentz force''' is always perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Click on''' Turn magnet''' button.
|| To change the direction of magnetic field,

click on the '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the direction of '''Lorentz force '''using '''Fleming’s left-hand rule.'''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press''' F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Lorentz force''' check-box'''.'''
|| First uncheck the '''Lorentz force''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.

|-
|| Use left hand fingers to find the force.
|| Now keep your fingers of the left hand as suggested here.

|-
|| Now try to keep your fingers of left hand as

index finger in the direction of magnetic field and

middle finger in the direction of current and

thumb points in the direction of Force.
|| Index finger pointing in the direction of magnetic field.
Middle finger pointing in the direction of current.

Thumb shows the direction of Lorentz force.

|-
||
|| Here the direction of Force is towards the right-side.

This rule is Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Check the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.
|| Let us verify our answer by checking the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.

Observe that the direction is same as shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Reverse the current flow.'''

'''Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.'''
|| As an assignment

Reverse the current flow.

Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.

|-
||
|| Now let us open the '''Generator App'''.

|-
|| Open the App ,following the same procedure.(show the procedure)
|| I will open the '''App '''as before.

|-
|| Cursor in the interface.
|| The '''App '''shows a generator.

|-
|| Point to the generator.
|| An electrical generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

|-
|| Point to the magnet and rectangular loop inside the magnet.
|| The '''App '''opens showing a horseshoe magnet.

A rectangular current carrying coil is inserted between the poles of the magnet.

|-
|| Drag the slider and show the changes.

Point to the rotating coil.

Point to the value of''' 6 rot/min.'''

|| On the green panel, we can change the rotations per minute using the slider.

By default the rectangular coil rotates 6 rotations per minute.

We can change the rotation of the coil to a maximum of 12 rotations per minute.

|-
|| '''Drag to 12 rotations per minute.'''

Cursor on the graph.

Point to show the peaks.
|| Increase the rotation to 12 rotation per minute.

In the graph we can see two complete cycles in one minute.

Here the frequency of the maximum output voltage is doubled.

|-
|| Point to the path of red coloured wire from rectangular coil to voltage source.
|| The rectangular coil is connected to the voltage source through the slip rings.

|-
|| Point to rectangular coil and the blue magnetic field lines.
|| Observe that the rectangular coil is rotating about an axis.

This coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Point to the wooden circular ring.
|| Here rotation of the rectangular coil is a source of mechanical energy.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow.
|| Due to the rotation of the coil, curent is induced into the wire.

The red arrow represents the direction of the induced current.

|-
|| Point to the commutators.
|| In the green panel we can choose an '''AC''' generator or '''DC '''generator.

|-
|| Point to '''Without commutator '''radio button.

Click on '''With commutator '''radio button.

|| By default '''Without commutator''' an '''AC '''generator is selected.

Select '''With commutator '''radio button.

Commutator is a device for reversing the direction of flow of current.

This device ensures that the current flows only in direct current mode.

Hence With Commutator means, the generator is a DC generator.

|-
|| Point to the graph of voltage v/s time.
|| On the top of the circuit, voltage v/s time graph is plotted.

This is the graph of a '''DC''' generator.

|-
|| In the graph point to show the moving blue point.(show one more pointer on the voltage source during editing)
|| In the graph, moving blue point indicates the change in voltage.

|-
|| Click the '''Change direction''' button and show the change in direction of rectangular coil.
|| '''Change direction''' button changes the direction of the rectangular coil.

Click on the '''Change direction '''button.

Observe the change in the direction of rectangular coil.

Also notice the change in the graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| We can find the direction of induced currect using Fleming’s right-hand rule.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s left-hand rule here.
|| This rule is same as Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Click on '''Pause '''button when the .
|| Click on '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s right hand rule.(''The fingers of right hand means the same as flemings left hand'')
|| Now arrange fingers of your right hand as shown in the figure.

|-
|| Point to the check-box

'''Direction of movement, '''

'''Magnetic field, '''

'''Induced current'''.
|| There are three check-boxes at the bottom of the green panel.

'''Direction of movement,'''

'''Magnetic field, '''and

'''Induced current'''.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Magnetic field''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the''' Magnetic field''' check-box.

Notice that the magnetic field lines disappear.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Direction of movement '''check-box.
|| In the similar way we can uncheck the remaining check-boxes if not required.

|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keybord to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| AC generator is an alternating current generator.

So, here the graph shows positive as well as negative voltages.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the rotation per minute to 10.

|| As an assignment,

Change the rotations per minute to 0, 3.0, 6.0 and 9.0

Note the changes in the movement of the coil and graph.
Explain the reason for the changes.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps '''we have,

Drawn magnetic field lines of a bar magnet.

Verified right hand thumb rule.

Verified Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.

Simulated the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Magnetism-and-Electromagnetism/English

2020-07-14T07:53:36Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| Visual cue
|| Narration
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Draw magnetic field lines for a bar magnet.
* Verify right hand thumb rule.
* Verify Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.
* Simulate the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,
'''Magnetic Field of a Bar Magnet'''

'''Magnetic Field of a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''

'''Lorentz Force''' and

'''Generator Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on

'''magneticfieldbar_en.htm''' file.

Select option open with Firefox web Browser option.
|| Right click on''' magneticfieldbar_en.htm '''file.

Select '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option.

'''Magnetic field bar App''' opens.

|-
|| Point to the bar magnet.

Point to the needle.
|| The '''App''' opens showing a magnet and a magnetic needle.

|-
|| Point to '''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet.'''
|| On the green panel there are two buttons.

'''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Move the cursor on Red color of Bar magnet and green color.
|| Poles of a bar magnet and compass needle are represented by the following colors.
Red for north pole and green for south pole.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' buttons.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet '''button.

Observe that both bar magent and magnetic needle change their direction.

|-
|| Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Move the magnetic needle with the pressed mouse.
|| Let us draw the magnetic field lines.

Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Click on the magnetic needle and move the needle up to draw the magnetic lines.

Continue to draw the lines as shown here.

|-
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines''' button.
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines '''button.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Use the pressed mouse to draw the lines.
|| Again draw the magnetic lines around the magnet.

|-
|| Point to the changed direction on the lines.
|| When we turn the magnet, the lines of force change the direction.

|-
|| Point to the direction of arrows
|| The direction of magnetic field outside the bar magnet is from north to south.

It is shown by the arrows.

|-
|| Point to the maximum lines of fields.

Ask question on the interface.

Inside it from south to north.
|| Magnetic field is strongest inside the bar magnet.

Outside the bar magnet it is strongest near the poles.

What is the direction of magnetic field inside the bar magnet?

|-
|| Point to '''Magnetic Fieldof a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''
|| Next we will move on to '''Magnetic Field Line in a Current Carrying Wire App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the Setup.
|| The '''App '''opens showing magnetic field lines around a current carrying wire.

|-
|| Point to '''Reverse current''' buttons.
|| On the right side of the screen we have a '''Reverse current''' button.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow
|| The red arrow indicate the direction of the current.

Note that the direction of current is opposite to that of electrons.

|-
|| Point to minus and plus signs
|| The signs at the ends of the wire symbolize the terminals of the connected battery.
|-
|| Point to concentric circles.
|| The concentric circles are the magnetic field around the current carrying wire.

|-
||
|| Let us find the direction of magnetic field using right hand thumb rule.

|-
|| Use your right hand thumb to point the position of direction of the current.
|| Put your right hand thumb in the direction of the current.

|-
|| Curl the fingers inside to palm.
|| Now curl your fingers inside.

Fingers gives you the direction of magnetic field.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Assignment '''
|| As an assignment,

Reverse the current flow and determine the magnetic field.

|-
|| Right click on '''lorentzforce_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Let us move on to the next '''App''', '''Lorentz Force'''.

Follow the same steps as we used for previous '''App '''to open '''htm''' file.

|-
|| Point to the Setup.
|| Interface shows a horseshoe magnet through which a conducting wire is passed.

|-
|| Point to the Blue coloured arrows.
|| The blue arrows shows the direction of the magnetic field.
|-
|| Point to each button.

'''On/Off'''

'''Reverse current'''

'''Turn magnet'''
|| On the green panel we have the following buttons.

'''On/Off '''

'''Reverse current '''

'''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Point to the wire.
|| When the circuit is open, the wire is shown in black colour.

|-
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button to complete the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the red wire and show the switch is on.
|| Notice that the wire is in conduction mode.

This is indicated by the red coloured wire.

|-
|| Point to the each check-box

'''Current direction'''

'''Magnetic field '''

'''Lorentz force.'''
|| At the bottom, there are three check-boxes.

These are''' Current direction, Magnetic field, Lorentz force.'''

|-
|| Point to the black arrow.
|| The black arrow pointing towards right is the '''Lorentz force'''.

|-
|| Show with the cursor the perpendicular state of Lorentz force.
|| '''Lorentz force''' is always perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Click on''' Turn magnet''' button.
|| To change the direction of magnetic field,

click on the '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the direction of '''Lorentz force '''using '''Fleming’s left-hand rule.'''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press''' F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Lorentz force''' check-box'''.'''
|| First uncheck the '''Lorentz force''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.

|-
|| Use left hand fingers to find the force.
|| Now keep your fingers of the left hand as suggested here.

|-
|| Now try to keep your fingers of left hand as

index finger in the direction of magnetic field and

middle finger in the direction of current and

thumb points in the direction of Force.
|| Index finger pointing in the direction of magnetic field.
Middle finger pointing in the direction of current.

Thumb shows the direction of Lorentz force.

|-
||
|| Here the direction of Force is towards the right-side.

This rule is Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Check the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.
|| Let us verify our answer by checking the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.

Observe that the direction is same as shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Reverse the current flow.'''

'''Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.'''
|| As an assignment

Reverse the current flow.

Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.

|-
||
|| Now let us open the '''Generator App'''.

|-
|| Open the App ,following the same procedure.(show the procedure)
|| I will open the '''App '''as before.

|-
|| Cursor in the interface.
|| The '''App '''shows a generator.

|-
|| Point to the generator.
|| An electrical generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

|-
|| Point to the magnet and rectangular loop inside the magnet.
|| The '''App '''opens showing a horseshoe magnet.

A rectangular current carrying coil is inserted between the poles of the magnet.

|-
|| Drag the slider and show the changes.

Point to the rotating coil.

Point to the value of''' 6 rot/min.'''

|| On the green panel, we can change the rotations per minute using the slider.

By default the rectangular coil rotates 6 rotations per minute.

We can change the rotation of the coil to a maximum of 12 rotations per minute.

|-
|| '''Drag to 12 rotations per minute.'''

Cursor on the graph.

Point to show the peaks.
|| Increase the rotation to 12 rotation per minute.

In the graph we can see two complete cycles in one minute.

Here the frequency of the maximum output voltage is doubled.

|-
|| Point to the path of red coloured wire from rectangular coil to voltage source.
|| The rectangular coil is connected to the voltage source through the slip rings.

|-
|| Point to rectangular coil and the blue magnetic field lines.
|| Observe that the rectangular coil is rotating about an axis.

This coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Point to the wooden circular ring.
|| Here rotation of the rectangular coil is a source of mechanical energy.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow.
|| Due to the rotation of the coil, curent is induced into the wire.

The red arrow represents the direction of the induced current.

|-
|| Point to the commutators.
|| In the green panel we can choose an '''AC''' generator or '''DC '''generator.

|-
|| Point to '''Without commutator '''radio button.

Click on '''With commutator '''radio button.

|| By default '''Without commutator''' an '''AC '''generator is selected.

Select '''With commutator '''radio button.

Commutator is a device for reversing the direction of flow of current.

This device ensures that the current flows only in direct current mode.

Hence With Commutator means, the generator is a DC generator.

|-
|| Point to the graph of voltage v/s time.
|| On the top of the circuit, voltage v/s time graph is plotted.

This is the graph of a '''DC''' generator.

|-
|| In the graph point to show the moving blue point.(show one more pointer on the voltage source during editing)
|| In the graph, moving blue point indicates the change in voltage.

|-
|| Click the '''Change direction''' button and show the change in direction of rectangular coil.
|| '''Change direction''' button changes the direction of the rectangular coil.

Click on the '''Change direction '''button.

Observe the change in the direction of rectangular coil.

Also notice the change in the graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| We can find the direction of induced currect using Fleming’s right-hand rule.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s left-hand rule here.
|| This rule is same as Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Click on '''Pause '''button when the .
|| Click on '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s right hand rule.(''The fingers of right hand means the same as flemings left hand'')
|| Now arrange fingers of your right hand as shown in the figure.

|-
|| Point to the check-box

'''Direction of movement, '''

'''Magnetic field, '''

'''Induced current'''.
|| There are three check-boxes at the bottom of the green panel.

'''Direction of movement,'''

'''Magnetic field, '''and

'''Induced current'''.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Magnetic field''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the''' Magnetic field''' check-box.

Notice that the magnetic field lines disappear.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Direction of movement '''check-box.
|| In the similar way we can uncheck the remaining check-boxes if not required.

|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keybord to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| AC generator is an alternating current generator.

So, here the graph shows positive as well as negative voltages.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the rotation per minute to 10.

|| As an assignment,

Change the rotations per minute to 0, 3.0, 6.0 and 9.0

Note the changes in the movement of the coil and graph.
Explain the reason for the changes.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps '''we have,

Drawn magnetic field lines of a bar magnet.

Verified right hand thumb rule.

Verified Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.

Simulated the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Magnetism-and-Electromagnetism/English

2020-07-14T07:50:03Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| Visual cue
|| Narration
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Draw magnetic field lines for a bar magnet.
* Verify right hand thumb rule.
* Verify Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.
* Simulate the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,
'''Magnetic Field of a Bar Magnet'''

'''Magnetic Field of a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''

'''Lorentz Force''' and

'''Generator Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on

'''magneticfieldbar_en.htm''' file.

Select option open with Firefox web Browser option.
|| Right click on''' magneticfieldbar_en.htm '''file.

Select '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option.

'''Magnetic field bar App''' opens.

|-
|| Point to the bar magnet.

Point to the needle.
|| The '''App''' opens showing a magnet and a magnetic needle.

|-
|| Point to '''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet.'''
|| On the green panel there are two buttons.

'''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Move the cursor on Red color of Bar magnet and green color.
|| Poles of a bar magnet and compass needle are represented by the following colors.
Red for north pole and green for south pole.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' buttons.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet '''button.

Observe that both bar magent and magnetic needle change their direction.

|-
|| Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Move the magnetic needle with the pressed mouse.
|| Let us draw the magnetic field lines.

Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Click on the magnetic needle and move the needle up to draw the magnetic lines.

Continue to draw the lines as shown here.

|-
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines''' button.
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines '''button.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Point to the changed direction on the lines.
|| When we turn the magnet, the lines of force change the direction.

|-
|| Use the pressed mouse to draw the lines.
|| Again draw the magnetic lines around the magnet.

|-
|| Point to the direction of arrows
|| The direction of magnetic field outside the bar magnet is from north to south.

It is shown by the arrows.

|-
|| Point to the maximum lines of fields.

Ask question on the interface.

Inside it from south to north.
|| Magnetic field is strongest inside the bar magnet.

Outside the bar magnet it is strongest near the poles.

What is the direction of magnetic field inside the bar magnet?

|-
|| Point to '''Magnetic Fieldof a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''
|| Next we will move on to '''Magnetic Field Line in a Current Carrying Wire App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the Setup.
|| The '''App '''opens showing magnetic field lines around a current carrying wire.

|-
|| Point to '''Reverse current''' buttons.
|| On the right side of the screen we have a '''Reverse current''' button.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow
|| The red arrow indicate the direction of the current.

Note that the direction of current is opposite to that of electrons.

|-
|| Point to minus and plus signs
|| The signs at the ends of the wire symbolize the terminals of the connected battery.
|-
|| Point to concentric circles.
|| The concentric circles are the magnetic field around the current carrying wire.

|-
||
|| Let us find the direction of magnetic field using right hand thumb rule.

|-
|| Use your right hand thumb to point the position of direction of the current.
|| Put your right hand thumb in the direction of the current.

|-
|| Curl the fingers inside to palm.
|| Now curl your fingers inside.

Fingers gives you the direction of magnetic field.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Assignment '''
|| As an assignment,

Reverse the current flow and determine the magnetic field.

|-
|| Right click on '''lorentzforce_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Let us move on to the next '''App''', '''Lorentz Force'''.

Follow the same steps as we used for previous '''App '''to open '''htm''' file.

|-
|| Point to the Setup.
|| Interface shows a horseshoe magnet through which a conducting wire is passed.

|-
|| Point to the Blue coloured arrows.
|| The blue arrows shows the direction of the magnetic field.
|-
|| Point to each button.

'''On/Off'''

'''Reverse current'''

'''Turn magnet'''
|| On the green panel we have the following buttons.

'''On/Off '''

'''Reverse current '''

'''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Point to the wire.
|| When the circuit is open, the wire is shown in black colour.

|-
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button to complete the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the red wire and show the switch is on.
|| Notice that the wire is in conduction mode.

This is indicated by the red coloured wire.

|-
|| Point to the each check-box

'''Current direction'''

'''Magnetic field '''

'''Lorentz force.'''
|| At the bottom, there are three check-boxes.

These are''' Current direction, Magnetic field, Lorentz force.'''

|-
|| Point to the black arrow.
|| The black arrow pointing towards right is the '''Lorentz force'''.

|-
|| Show with the cursor the perpendicular state of Lorentz force.
|| '''Lorentz force''' is always perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Click on''' Turn magnet''' button.
|| To change the direction of magnetic field,

click on the '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the direction of '''Lorentz force '''using '''Fleming’s left-hand rule.'''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press''' F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Lorentz force''' check-box'''.'''
|| First uncheck the '''Lorentz force''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.

|-
|| Use left hand fingers to find the force.
|| Now keep your fingers of the left hand as suggested here.

|-
|| Now try to keep your fingers of left hand as

index finger in the direction of magnetic field and

middle finger in the direction of current and

thumb points in the direction of Force.
|| Index finger pointing in the direction of magnetic field.
Middle finger pointing in the direction of current.

Thumb shows the direction of Lorentz force.

|-
||
|| Here the direction of Force is towards the right-side.

This rule is Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Check the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.
|| Let us verify our answer by checking the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.

Observe that the direction is same as shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Reverse the current flow.'''

'''Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.'''
|| As an assignment

Reverse the current flow.

Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.

|-
||
|| Now let us open the '''Generator App'''.

|-
|| Open the App ,following the same procedure.(show the procedure)
|| I will open the '''App '''as before.

|-
|| Cursor in the interface.
|| The '''App '''shows a generator.

|-
|| Point to the generator.
|| An electrical generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

|-
|| Point to the magnet and rectangular loop inside the magnet.
|| The '''App '''opens showing a horseshoe magnet.

A rectangular current carrying coil is inserted between the poles of the magnet.

|-
|| Drag the slider and show the changes.

Point to the rotating coil.

Point to the value of''' 6 rot/min.'''

|| On the green panel, we can change the rotations per minute using the slider.

By default the rectangular coil rotates 6 rotations per minute.

We can change the rotation of the coil to a maximum of 12 rotations per minute.

|-
|| '''Drag to 12 rotations per minute.'''

Cursor on the graph.

Point to show the peaks.
|| Increase the rotation to 12 rotation per minute.

In the graph we can see two complete cycles in one minute.

Here the frequency of the maximum output voltage is doubled.

|-
|| Point to the path of red coloured wire from rectangular coil to voltage source.
|| The rectangular coil is connected to the voltage source through the slip rings.

|-
|| Point to rectangular coil and the blue magnetic field lines.
|| Observe that the rectangular coil is rotating about an axis.

This coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Point to the wooden circular ring.
|| Here rotation of the rectangular coil is a source of mechanical energy.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow.
|| Due to the rotation of the coil, curent is induced into the wire.

The red arrow represents the direction of the induced current.

|-
|| Point to the commutators.
|| In the green panel we can choose an '''AC''' generator or '''DC '''generator.

|-
|| Point to '''Without commutator '''radio button.

Click on '''With commutator '''radio button.

|| By default '''Without commutator''' an '''AC '''generator is selected.

Select '''With commutator '''radio button.

Commutator is a device for reversing the direction of flow of current.

This device ensures that the current flows only in direct current mode.

Hence With Commutator means, the generator is a DC generator.

|-
|| Point to the graph of voltage v/s time.
|| On the top of the circuit, voltage v/s time graph is plotted.

This is the graph of a '''DC''' generator.

|-
|| In the graph point to show the moving blue point.(show one more pointer on the voltage source during editing)
|| In the graph, moving blue point indicates the change in voltage.

|-
|| Click the '''Change direction''' button and show the change in direction of rectangular coil.
|| '''Change direction''' button changes the direction of the rectangular coil.

Click on the '''Change direction '''button.

Observe the change in the direction of rectangular coil.

Also notice the change in the graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| We can find the direction of induced currect using Fleming’s right-hand rule.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s left-hand rule here.
|| This rule is same as Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Click on '''Pause '''button when the .
|| Click on '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s right hand rule.(''The fingers of right hand means the same as flemings left hand'')
|| Now arrange fingers of your right hand as shown in the figure.

|-
|| Point to the check-box

'''Direction of movement, '''

'''Magnetic field, '''

'''Induced current'''.
|| There are three check-boxes at the bottom of the green panel.

'''Direction of movement,'''

'''Magnetic field, '''and

'''Induced current'''.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Magnetic field''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the''' Magnetic field''' check-box.

Notice that the magnetic field lines disappear.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Direction of movement '''check-box.
|| In the similar way we can uncheck the remaining check-boxes if not required.

|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keybord to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| AC generator is an alternating current generator.

So, here the graph shows positive as well as negative voltages.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the rotation per minute to 10.

|| As an assignment,

Change the rotations per minute to 0, 3.0, 6.0 and 9.0

Note the changes in the movement of the coil and graph.
Explain the reason for the changes.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps '''we have,

Drawn magnetic field lines of a bar magnet.

Verified right hand thumb rule.

Verified Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.

Simulated the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Magnetism-and-Electromagnetism/English

2020-07-14T06:32:56Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with " {|border=1 |- || Visual cue || Narration |- || '''Slide Number 1''' '''Title slide''' || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''. |- ||..."

{|border=1
|-
|| Visual cue
|| Narration
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Magnetism''' and '''Electromagnetism'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,* Draw magnetic field lines for a bar magnet.
* Verify right hand thumb rule.
* Verify Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.
* Simulate the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,
'''Magnetic Field of a Bar Magnet'''

'''Magnetic Field of a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''

'''Lorentz Force''' and

'''Generator Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on

'''magneticfieldbar_en.htm''' file.

Select option open with Firefox web Browser option.
|| Right click on''' magneticfieldbar_en.htm '''file.

Select '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option.

'''Magnetic field bar App''' opens.

|-
|| Point to the bar magnet.

Point to the needle.
|| The '''App''' opens showing a magnet and a magnetic needle.

|-
|| Point to '''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet.'''
|| On the green panel there are two buttons.

'''Clear field lines''' and '''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Move the cursor on Red color of Bar magnet and green color.
|| Poles of a bar magnet and compass needle are represented by the following colors.
Red for north pole and green for south pole.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' buttons.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet '''button.

Observe that both bar magent and magnetic needle change their direction.

|-
|| Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Move the magnetic needle with the pressed mouse.
|| Let us draw the magnetic field lines.

Place the cursor on the magnetic needle.

Click on the magnetic needle and move the needle up to draw the magnetic lines.

Continue to draw the lines as shown here.

|-
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines''' button.
|| Click on the '''Clear field lines '''button.

|-
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.
|| Click on '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Point to the changed direction on the lines.
|| When we turn the magnet, the lines of force change the direction.

|-
|| Use the pressed mouse to draw the lines.
|| Again draw the magnetic lines around the magnet.

|-
|| Point to the direction of arrows
|| The direction of magnetic field outside the bar magnet is from north to south.

It is shown by the arrows.

|-
|| Point to the maximum lines of fields.

Ask question on the interface.

Inside it from south to north.
|| Magnetic field is strongest inside the bar magnet.

Outside the bar magnet it is strongest near the poles.

What is the direction of magnetic field inside the bar magnet?

|-
|| Point to '''Magnetic Fieldof a Straight Current-Carrying Wire'''
|| Next we will move on to '''Magnetic Field Line in a Current Carrying Wire App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.
|| Right click on '''magneticfieldwire_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web browser''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the Setup.
|| The '''App '''opens showing magnetic field lines around a current carrying wire.

|-
|| Point to '''Reverse current''' buttons.
|| On the right side of the screen we have a '''Reverse current''' button.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow
|| The red arrow indicate the direction of the current.

Note that the direction of current is opposite to that of electrons.

|-
|| Point to minus and plus signs
|| The signs at the ends of the wire symbolize the terminals of the connected battery.
|-
|| Point to concentric circles.
|| The concentric circles are the magnetic field around the current carrying wire.

|-
||
|| Let us find the direction of magnetic field using right hand thumb rule.

|-
|| Use your right hand thumb to point the position of direction of the current.
|| Put your right hand thumb in the direction of the current.

|-
|| Curl the fingers inside to palm.
|| Now curl your fingers inside.

Fingers gives you the direction of magnetic field.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Assignment '''
|| As an assignment,

Reverse the current flow and determine the magnetic field.

|-
|| Right click on '''lorentzforce_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Let us move on to the next '''App''', '''Lorentz Force'''.

Follow the same steps as we used for previous '''App '''to open '''htm''' file.

|-
|| Point to the Setup.
|| Interface shows a horseshoe magnet through which a conducting wire is passed.

|-
|| Point to the Blue coloured arrows.
|| The blue arrows shows the direction of the magnetic field.
|-
|| Point to each button.

'''On/Off'''

'''Reverse current'''

'''Turn magnet'''
|| On the green panel we have the following buttons.

'''On/Off '''

'''Reverse current '''

'''Turn magnet'''.

|-
|| Point to the wire.
|| When the circuit is open, the wire is shown in black colour.

|-
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on the '''On/Off''' button to complete the circuit.

|-
|| Point to the red wire and show the switch is on.
|| Notice that the wire is in conduction mode.

This is indicated by the red coloured wire.

|-
|| Point to the each check-box

'''Current direction'''

'''Magnetic field '''

'''Lorentz force.'''
|| At the bottom, there are three check-boxes.

These are''' Current direction, Magnetic field, Lorentz force.'''

|-
|| Point to the black arrow.
|| The black arrow pointing towards right is the '''Lorentz force'''.

|-
|| Show with the cursor the perpendicular state of Lorentz force.
|| '''Lorentz force''' is always perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Click on''' Turn magnet''' button.
|| To change the direction of magnetic field,

click on the '''Turn magnet''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the direction of '''Lorentz force '''using '''Fleming’s left-hand rule.'''

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press''' F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Uncheck''' Lorentz force''' check-box'''.'''
|| First uncheck the '''Lorentz force''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.
|| Click on '''On/Off''' button.

|-
|| Use left hand fingers to find the force.
|| Now keep your fingers of the left hand as suggested here.

|-
|| Now try to keep your fingers of left hand as

index finger in the direction of magnetic field and

middle finger in the direction of current and

thumb points in the direction of Force.
|| Index finger pointing in the direction of magnetic field.
Middle finger pointing in the direction of current.

Thumb shows the direction of Lorentz force.

|-
||
|| Here the direction of Force is towards the right-side.

This rule is Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Check the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.
|| Let us verify our answer by checking the '''Lorentz force '''check-box.

Observe that the direction is same as shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Reverse the current flow.'''

'''Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.'''
|| As an assignment

Reverse the current flow.

Determine the direction of lorentz force using Fleming’s left hand rule.

|-
||
|| Now let us open the '''Generator App'''.

|-
|| Open the App ,following the same procedure.(show the procedure)
|| I will open the '''App '''as before.

|-
|| Cursor in the interface.
|| The '''App '''shows a generator.

|-
|| Point to the generator.
|| An electrical generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy.

|-
|| Point to the magnet and rectangular loop inside the magnet.
|| The '''App '''opens showing a horseshoe magnet.

A rectangular current carrying coil is inserted between the poles of the magnet.

|-
|| Drag the slider and show the changes.

Point to the rotating coil.

Point to the value of''' 6 rot/min.'''

|| On the green panel, we can change the rotations per minute using the slider.

By default the rectangular coil rotates 6 rotations per minute.

We can change the rotation of the coil to a maximum of 12 rotations per minute.

|-
|| '''Drag to 12 rotations per minute.'''

Cursor on the graph.

Point to show the peaks.
|| Increase the rotation to 12 rotation per minute.

In the graph we can see two complete cycles in one minute.

Here the frequency of the maximum output voltage is doubled.

|-
|| Point to the path of red coloured wire from rectangular coil to voltage source.
|| The rectangular coil is connected to the voltage source through the slip rings.

|-
|| Point to rectangular coil and the blue magnetic field lines.
|| Observe that the rectangular coil is rotating about an axis.

This coil is perpendicular to the magnetic field.

|-
|| Point to the wooden circular ring.
|| Here rotation of the rectangular coil is a source of mechanical energy.

|-
|| Point to the red arrow.
|| Due to the rotation of the coil, curent is induced into the wire.

The red arrow represents the direction of the induced current.

|-
|| Point to the commutators.
|| In the green panel we can choose an '''AC''' generator or '''DC '''generator.

|-
|| Point to '''Without commutator '''radio button.

Click on '''With commutator '''radio button.

|| By default '''Without commutator''' an '''AC '''generator is selected.

Select '''With commutator '''radio button.

Commutator is a device for reversing the direction of flow of current.

This device ensures that the current flows only in direct current mode.

Hence With Commutator means, the generator is a DC generator.

|-
|| Point to the graph of voltage v/s time.
|| On the top of the circuit, voltage v/s time graph is plotted.

This is the graph of a '''DC''' generator.

|-
|| In the graph point to show the moving blue point.(show one more pointer on the voltage source during editing)
|| In the graph, moving blue point indicates the change in voltage.

|-
|| Click the '''Change direction''' button and show the change in direction of rectangular coil.
|| '''Change direction''' button changes the direction of the rectangular coil.

Click on the '''Change direction '''button.

Observe the change in the direction of rectangular coil.

Also notice the change in the graph.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| We can find the direction of induced currect using Fleming’s right-hand rule.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s left-hand rule here.
|| This rule is same as Fleming’s left-hand rule.

|-
|| Click on '''Pause '''button when the .
|| Click on '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Show the picture of Fleming’s right hand rule.(''The fingers of right hand means the same as flemings left hand'')
|| Now arrange fingers of your right hand as shown in the figure.

|-
|| Point to the check-box

'''Direction of movement, '''

'''Magnetic field, '''

'''Induced current'''.
|| There are three check-boxes at the bottom of the green panel.

'''Direction of movement,'''

'''Magnetic field, '''and

'''Induced current'''.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Magnetic field''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the''' Magnetic field''' check-box.

Notice that the magnetic field lines disappear.

|-
|| Uncheck '''Direction of movement '''check-box.
|| In the similar way we can uncheck the remaining check-boxes if not required.

|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keybord to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| AC generator is an alternating current generator.

So, here the graph shows positive as well as negative voltages.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the rotation per minute to 10.

|| As an assignment,

Change the rotations per minute to 0, 3.0, 6.0 and 9.0

Note the changes in the movement of the coil and graph.
Explain the reason for the changes.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps '''we have,

Drawn magnetic field lines of a bar magnet.

Verified right hand thumb rule.

Verified Fleming's left hand and right hand rules.

Simulated the working of a generator.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Interference-and-Diffraction/English

2020-06-22T11:03:09Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Interference and Diffraction'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''

|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Verify the relation between wavelength and relative intensity.
* Find the relation between slit width, maxima and minima.
* Calculate the angle for the given maxima.
* Interpret diffraction intensity profile.
* Verify the relation between wavelength and angle.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://spoken-tutorial.org/ https://spoken-tutorial.org/] '''
|| To follow this tutorial,

learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the Pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,

'''Interference of Light at a Double Slit'''

and '''Diffraction of Light by a Single Slit Apps'''.

|-
|| Right click on''' doubleslit_en.htm''' file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right click on''' doubleslit_en.htm '''file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option'''.'''

'''App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to the set-up.
|| The '''App''' shows '''Young’s double slit '''experiment for the interference pattern.

|-
|| Point to the slit and semicircular black colour screen.
|| The setup includes a slit and a semicircular screen.

|-
|| Point to the '''Wavelength'''.
|| On the green panel we can change the wavelength of the source light.

|-
|| Cursor on the Wavelength slider.

Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider.
|| Here the range of the wavelength is from 380 nanometer to 780 nanometer.

This is the range of visible spectrum.

|-
|| Enter value 650 nm and show.
|| We can also enter the value of wavelength in the text-box.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us see how change in wavelength changes the interference pattern.

|-
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider to 380 nm.
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider to 380 nm.

|-
|| Click on '''Intensity profile''' radio button.
|| Click on '''Intensity profile''' radio button at the bottom of the green panel.

|-
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider.

Point the cursor on the graph.
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider slowly towards higher wavelength.

Observe the graph showing dark and bright fringes in the intensity profile.

|-
|| Cursor on the graph.
|| As the wavelength increases, distance between dark and bright fringes increases.

|-
|| Drag the '''Angle''' slider to show the changes.
||Next Drag the '''Angle''' slider here we can change the angle from 0 degrees to 90 degrees.

|-
|| Point the cursor to show the movement of white arrows
|| Note that as we change the angle, white arrows shifts their position.

|-
|| Drag the '''Angle''' slider and point to show the shift in the graph.
|| This shift is also shown in the graph.

|-
|| Scroll down.
|| Scroll down the screen.

|-
|| Point to show the condition for maxima and minima
|| Here the conditions for maxima and minima are given.

For more details please read the additional material provided in this tutorial.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to reset the '''App'''.

|-
|| Drag the slider of '''Spacing between the slit''' to 2000.
|| Scroll up and increase the spacing between the slit to 2000 nm.

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Move the cursor to show all the values.
|| Now click on the '''Maxima '''drop down.

Here we will see more options for the '''k '''value.

|-
|| Click on the '''Minima '''drop down.
|| Click on the '''Minima''' drop down.

|-
|| Point to first minima(k=1).
|| Note that the first minima is formed at 8.6 degrees.

|-
|| Click on the second minima(k=2).
|| Click on the second minima that is''' k=2'''.

|-
|| Point to show both screen and graph.
|| The white arrows shift to the second minima in both screen and graph.

|-
|| Point to show the '''Relative intensity'''.
|| Here the '''Relative intensity''' changes to zero(0).

Zero indicates dark fringe.

The waves superimpose and are out of phase to give zero intensity.

This is destructive interference.

|-
|| Click on '''Intensity profile''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Intensity profile''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the red point on the intensity profile graph.
|| Here note that the red points indicate zero intensity.

|-
|| Click on''' Maxima''' drop down. Select '''k=3'''.
|| Now click on '''Maxima '''drop down and select '''k=3'''.

|-
|| Point to the red point.

Point the cursor to '''Relative intensity'''.
|| The red point has shifted to the third peak.

The '''Relative intensity''' has changed to 1.

Here the waves superimpose to form a wave with maximum intensity.

This is constructive interference.

This constructive interference results in a bright fringe.

|-
|| Click on '''Interference pattern''' radio button.
|| Click on '''Interference pattern''' radio button at the bottom of the green panel.

|-
|| Cursor on the graph.
|| Note that the interference graph shows equally spaced dark and bright fringes.

Therefore the value of relative intensity only shows 0 and 1.

|-
|| Press''' F5 '''key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to reset the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us calculate the value of angle for first maxima.

|-
|| Point to '''Condition for maxima''' formula.

Show the rearranged equation in the text-box.('''α <nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(kλ/d)''').
|| To do so we can rearrange the equation given in the interface

'''α <nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(kλ/d)'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Angle'''

'''α <nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(kλ/d)'''

'''k<nowiki>=1</nowiki>'''

'''λ<nowiki>= 600 nm</nowiki>'''

'''d = 1000 nm'''

'''α <nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(kλ/d)'''

'''<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(1*600/1000)'''

'''<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(600/1000)'''

'''<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(3/5)'''

'''<nowiki>= 36.86</nowiki>°'''
|| Take the value of k as 1 since we have to calculate the angle for the first maxima.

Take the value of wavelength and spacing between slit as shown on interface.

Next substitute the values in the formula.

The calculated value of angle of first maxima is

36.86 degree.

Let us compare with the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Maxima''' drop down.

Select '''k=1'''.
|| Click on the''' Maxima''' drop down and select '''k=1'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the angle next to k=1.
|| Observe that the value of the angle next to K=1 is 36.9 degrees.

The value is comparable with the calculated value.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the Spacing between slits to 3500 nm.

Calculate the angle of fourth and fifth maxima.
|| As an Assignment

Change the Spacing between slits to 3500 nm.

Calculate the angle of fourth and fifth maxima.

|-
||
|| Let us move on to the next '''App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''singleslit_en.htm '''file and select the option '''Open with Firefox Web browser'''.

Cursor on the title.
|| Follow the same steps as shown earlier while opening the''' App.'''

The '''Diffraction of Light by a Single Slit '''opens on the screen.

|-
|| Cursor on the simulation interface.
|| This '''App''' shows the setup of diffraction through a single slit experiment.

This set up is also known as '''Fraunhofer's Diffraction at a single slit'''.

|-
|| Scroll down and point the cursor on the formulas.
|| scroll down to see the conditions for maxima and minima.

|-
|| Scroll up.

Select '''Intensity profile''' radio button.
|| Scroll up and select '''Intensity profile''' radio button.

|-
|| Point the cursor on the Intensity profile graph.
|| Observe that, only one central bright region is seen.

This intensity decreases as we move away from the center.

|-
|| Click on '''Width of slit '''and enter 3000 nm.
|| In the green panel, click on the '''Width of slit '''text-box and enter 3000 nm.

|-
|| Cursor on the screen.

Point to bright and dark fringes.
|| Observe that a number of alternate dark and bright fringes are formed

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Cursor on the 0 degrees in the drop down.

Point to the relative intensity.
|| Now click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Observe that the central maxima is at 0 degrees.

It shows '''Relative intensity''' as 1. This is the maximum intensity.

|-
|| Select K=1 from the '''Maxima''' drop down.
|| From the '''Maxima''' drop down select k=1.

|-
|| Point to '''Relative intensity''' value.
|| Here the''' Relative intensity''' decreases from 1 to 0.0472.

|-
|| Click on '''Maxima''' drop down.

Select K=2.
|| Again click on '''Maxima''' drop down and select k=2.

|-
|| Point to '''Relative intensity''' value.
|| The '''Relative intensity '''decreases to 0.0165.

|-
|| Click on '''Minima''' drop down and select K=2.
|| Know Click on the''' Minima''' drop down and select k<nowiki>=2.</nowiki>

|-
|| Point to '''Relative intensity''' value.
|| The value of '''Relative intensity''' is shown as 0.

|-
|| Click on '''Minima '''drop down and select K<nowiki>=4</nowiki>
|| Click on '''Minima '''drop down and select k=4.

|-
|| Point to '''Relative intensity''' value.
|| Note that for every dark fringe the value of relative intensity will remain zero.

|-
||
|| Here I have made the table to show the relative intensity for maxima and minima.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8 '''

'''Tabular Column'''

Table is given at the end.
|| Observe the relative intensity for maxima.

The Relative intensity decreases as we move away from central region.

For the each minima, we have seen that the value remains zero for the relative '''intensity'''.

|-
|| Drag the slider of '''Wavelength''' to its lowest.

Cursor on the voilet light.
|| Drag the '''Wavelength slider '''to its highest value that is to 780 nm.

This is the region of red light.

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Move the cursor through the drop down.
|| Next click on '''Maxima '''drop down.

Here we see four bright fringes.

|-
|| Drag the slider of '''Wavelength''' to its highest.

Cursor on the red light.
|| Next drag the slider of '''Wavelength''' to its lowest value that is to 380 nm.

This is the region of violet light.

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Move the cursor through the drop down.
|| Now click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Here we can see eight positions for bright fringes.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This happens because violet light refracts more than red light.

Hence we see more number of bright fringes for violet light.

|-
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider to 520 nm.
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider to 520 nm.

|-
|| Click on '''Maxima''' drop down.
|| Click on '''Maxima''' drop down and select first bright fringe.

|-
|| Point to the angle next to k=1.
|| Here the first bright fringe is formed at an angle of 14.4 degrees.

|-
|| Drag '''Wavelength''' slider to 720 nm.
|| Again drag the slider of '''Wavelength''' to 720 nm

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima '''drop down.

Select k=1.
|| Click on the '''Maxima '''drop down and select K=1.

|-
|| Point to the angle next to k=1.
|| Here the first bright fringe is formed at an angle of 20.1 degrees.

Hence we conclude that if we increase the wavelength, angle also increases.

|-
|| Scroll down the screen.

|| Scroll down the screen.

This is shown in the formula.

|-
|| Cursor on the formula.

Point to the formula and also both angle and wavelength.
|| Here, the angle is directly proportional to the wavelength.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the wavelength to 380 nm and width of slit to 5000 nm.

Use the table as shown earlier in this tutorial for your referernce.

Tabulate the total number of maxima and minima.
|| As an assignment,

Change the wavelength to 380 nm and width of slit to 5000 nm.

Use the table as shown earlier in this tutorial for your referernce.

Tabulate the total number of maxima and minima.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Assignment'''

For each maxima tabulate the value of relative intensity from the App.

Explain the diffraction pattern
|| For each maxima tabulate the value of relative intensity from the App.

Explain the diffraction pattern

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Diffrentiate between interference and diffraction patterns.'''
|| Differentiate between interference and diffraction patterns.

|-
||
|| Let us summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial we have,
* Verified the relation between wavelength and relative intensity.
* Found the relation between slit width, maxima and minima.
* Calculated the angle for the given maxima.
* Interpreted diffraction intensity profile.
* Verified the relation between wavelength and angle.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Forum for specific questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Interference-and-Diffraction/English

2020-06-22T10:21:30Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with "{|border=1 |- || '''Visual Cue ''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Slide Number 1 ''' '''Title Slide''' || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Interference and Diffraction'''...."

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Interference and Diffraction'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''

|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,
* Verify the relation between wavelength and relative intensity.
* Find the relation between slit width, maxima and minima.
* Calculate the angle for the given maxima.
* Interpret diffraction intensity profile.
* Verify the relation between wavelength and angle.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://spoken-tutorial.org/ https://spoken-tutorial.org/] '''
|| To follow this tutorial,

learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the Pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,

Interference of Light at a Double Slit

and '''Diffraction of Light by a Single Slit Apps'''.

|-
|| Right click on''' doubleslit_en.htm''' file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right click on''' doubleslit_en.htm '''file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option'''.'''

'''App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to the set-up.
|| The '''App''' shows '''Young’s double slit '''experiment for the interference pattern.

|-
|| Point to the slit and semicircular black colour screen.
|| The setup includes a slit and a semicircular screen.

|-
|| Point to the '''Wavelength'''.
|| On the green panel we can change the wavelength of the source light.

|-
|| Cursor on the Wavelength slider.

Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider.
|| Here the range of the wavelength is from 380 nanometer to 780 nanometer.

This is the range of visible spectrum.

|-
|| Enter value 650 nm and show.
|| We can also enter the value of wavelength in the text-box.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us see how change in wavelength changes the interference pattern.

|-
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider to 380 nm.
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider to 380 nm.

|-
|| Click on '''Intensity profile''' radio button.
|| Click on '''Intensity profile''' radio button at the bottom of the green panel.

|-
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider.

Point the cursor on the graph.
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider slowly towards higher wavelength.

Observe the graph showing dark and bright fringes in the intensity profile.

|-
|| Cursor on the graph.
|| As the wavelength increases, distance between dark and bright fringes increases.

|-
|| Point to the '''Spacing between slit '''and '''Angle '''slider.
|| Below the wavelength slider there are two more sliders.

These slider are '''Spacing between slit '''and '''Angle'''.

|-
|| Drag the '''Spacing between slit '''slider.

Point to the slit in the yellow panel.
|| Let us now drag the '''Spacing between slit '''slider.

Observe the increase in the spacing between the slit.

|-
|| Drag the '''Angle''' slider to show the changes.
|| Drag the '''Angle''' slider here we can change the angle 0 degrees to 90 degrees.

|-
|| Point the cursor to show the movement of white arrows
|| Note that as we change the angle, white arrows shifts their position.

|-
|| Drag the '''Angle''' slider and point to show the shift in the graph.
|| This shift is also shown in the graph.

|-
|| Scroll down.
|| Scroll down the screen.

|-
|| Point to show the condition for maxima and minima
|| Here the conditions for maxima and minima are given.

For more details please read the additional material provided in this tutorial.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to reset the '''App'''.

|-
|| Drag the slider of '''Spacing between the slit''' to 2000.
|| Scroll up and increase the spacing between the slit to 2000 nm.

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Move the cursor to show all the values.
|| Now click on the '''Maxima '''drop down.

Here we will see more options for the '''k '''value.

|-
|| Click on the '''Minima '''drop down.
|| Click on the '''Minima''' drop down.

|-
|| Point to first minima(k=1).
|| Note that the first minima is formed at 8.6 degrees.

|-
|| Click on the second minima(k=2).
|| Click on the second minima that is''' k=2'''.

|-
|| Point to show both screen and graph.
|| The white arrows shift to the second minima in both screen and graph.

|-
|| Point to show the '''Relative intensity'''.
|| Here the '''Relative intensity''' changes to zero(0).

Zero indicates dark fringe.

The waves superimpose and are out of phase to give zero intensity.

This is destructive interference.

|-
|| Click on '''Intensity profile''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Intensity profile''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the red point on the intensity profile graph.
|| Here note that the red points indicate zero intensity.

|-
|| Click on''' Maxima''' drop down. Select '''k=3'''.
|| Now click on '''Maxima '''drop down and select '''k=3'''.

|-
|| Point to the red point.

Point the cursor to '''Relative intensity'''.
|| The red point has shifted to the third peak.

The '''Relative intensity''' has changed to 1.

Here the waves superimpose to form a wave with maximum intensity.

This is constructive interference.

This constructive interference results in a bright fringe.

|-
|| Click on '''Interference pattern''' radio button.
|| Click on '''Interference pattern''' radio button at the bottom of the green panel.

|-
|| Cursor on the graph.
|| Note that the interference graph shows equally spaced dark and bright fringes.

Therefore the value of relative intensity only shows 0 and 1.

|-
|| Press''' F5 '''key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to reset the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us calculate the value of angle for first maxima.

|-
|| Point to '''Condition for maxima''' formula.

Show the rearranged equation in the text-box.('''α <nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(kλ/d)''').
|| To do so we can rearrange the equation given in the interface as

'''α <nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(kλ/d)'''

|-
||
|| Let us substitute the values into the formula.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Angle'''

'''α <nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(kλ/d)'''

'''k<nowiki>=1</nowiki>'''

'''λ<nowiki>= 600 nm</nowiki>'''

'''d = 1000 nm'''

'''α <nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(kλ/d)'''

'''<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(1*600/1000)'''

'''<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(600/1000)'''

'''<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(3/5)'''

'''<nowiki>= 36.86</nowiki>°'''
|| Take the value of k as 1 since we have to calculate the angle for the first maxima.

Take the value of wavelength and spacing between slit as shown on interface.

Substitute the values into the formula.

The calculated value of angle of first maxima is

36.86 degree.

Let us compare with the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Maxima''' drop down.

Select '''k=1'''.
|| Click on the''' Maxima''' drop down and select '''k=1'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the angle next to k=1.
|| Observe that the value of the angle next to K=1 is 36.9 degrees.

The value is comparable with the calculated value.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the Spacing between slits to 3500 nm.

Calculate the angle of fourth and fifth maxima.
|| As an Assignment

Change the Spacing between slits to 3500 nm.

Calculate the angle of fourth and fifth maxima.

|-
||
|| Let us move on to the next '''App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''singleslit_en.htm '''file and select the option '''Open with Firefox Web browser'''.

Cursor on the title.
|| Follow the same steps as shown earlier while opening the''' App.'''

The '''Diffraction of Light by a Single Slit '''opens on the screen.

|-
|| Cursor on the simulation interface.
|| This '''App''' shows the setup of diffraction through a single slit experiment.

This set up is also known as '''Fraunhofer Diffraction at a single slit'''.

|-
|| Scroll down and point the cursor on the formulas.
|| scroll down to see the conditions for maxima and minima.

|-
|| Scroll up.

Select '''Intensity profile''' radio button.
|| Scroll up and select '''Intensity profile''' radio button.

|-
|| Point the cursor on the Intensity profile graph.
|| Observe that, only one central bright region is seen.

This intensity decreases as we move away from the center.

|-
|| Click on '''Width of slit '''and enter 3000 nm.
|| In the green panel, click on the '''Width of slit '''text-box and enter 3000 nm.

|-
|| Cursor on the screen.

Point to bright and dark fringes.
|| Observe that a number of alternate dark and bright fringes are formed

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Cursor on the 0 degrees in the drop down.

Point to the relative intensity.
|| Now click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Observe that the central maxima is at 0 degrees.

It shows '''Relative intensity''' as 1. This is the maximum intensity.

|-
|| Select K=1 from the '''Maxima''' drop down.
|| From the '''Maxima''' drop down select k=1.

|-
|| Point to '''Relative intensity''' value.
|| Here the''' Relative intensity''' decreases from 1 to 0.0472.

|-
|| Click on '''Maxima''' drop down.

Select K=2.
|| Again click on '''Maxima''' drop down and select k=2.

|-
|| Point to '''Relative intensity''' value.
|| The '''Relative intensity '''decreases to 0.0165.

|-
|| Click on '''Minima''' drop down and select K=2.
|| Know Click on the''' Minima''' drop down and select k<nowiki>=2.</nowiki>

|-
|| Point to '''Relative intensity''' value.
|| The value of '''Relative intensity''' is shown as 0.

|-
|| Click on '''Minima '''drop down and select K<nowiki>=4</nowiki>
|| Click on '''Minima '''drop down and select k=4.

|-
|| Point to '''Relative intensity''' value.
|| Note that for every dark fringe the value of relative intensity will remain zero.

|-
||
|| Here I have made the table to show the relative intensity for maxima and minima.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8 '''

'''Tabular Column'''

Table is given at the end.
|| Observe the relative intensity for maxima.

The Relative intensity decreases as we move away from central region.

For the each minima, we have seen that the value remains zero for the relative '''intensity'''.

|-
|| Drag the slider of '''Wavelength''' to its lowest.

Cursor on the voilet light.
|| Drag the '''Wavelength slider '''to its highest value that is to 780 nm.

This is the region of red light.

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Move the cursor through the drop down.
|| Next click on '''Maxima '''drop down.

Here we see four bright fringes.

|-
|| Drag the slider of '''Wavelength''' to its highest.

Cursor on the red light.
|| Next drag the slider of '''Wavelength''' to its lowest value that is to 380 nm.

This is the region of violet light.

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Move the cursor through the drop down.
|| Now click on the '''Maxima''' drop down.

Here we can see eight positions for bright fringes.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This happens because violet light refracts more than red light.

Hence we see more number of bright fringes for violet light.

|-
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider to 520 nm.
|| Drag the '''Wavelength''' slider to 520 nm.

|-
|| Click on '''Maxima''' drop down.
|| Click on '''Maxima''' drop down and select first bright fringe.

|-
|| Point to the angle next to k=1.
|| Here the first bright fringe is formed at an angle of 14.4 degrees.

|-
|| Drag '''Wavelength''' slider to 720 nm.
|| Again drag the slider of '''Wavelength''' to 720 nm

|-
|| Click on the '''Maxima '''drop down.

Select k=1.
|| Click on the '''Maxima '''drop down and select K=1.

|-
|| Point to the angle next to k=1.
|| Here the first bright fringe is formed at an angle of 20.1 degrees.

Hence we conclude that if we increase the wavelength, angle also increases.

|-
|| Scroll down the screen.

|| Scroll down the screen.

This is shown in the formula.

|-
|| Cursor on the formula.

Point to the formula and also both angle and wavelength.
|| Here, angle is directly proportional to the wavelength.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the wavelength to 380 nm and width of slit to 5000 nm.

Use the table as shown earlier in this tutorial for your referernce.

Tabulate the total number of maxima and minima.
|| As an assignment,

Change the wavelength to 380 nm and width of slit to 5000 nm.

Use the table as shown earlier in this tutorial for your referernce.

Tabulate the total number of maxima and minima.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Assignment'''

For each maxima tabular the value of relative intensity from the App.

Explain the diffraction pattern
|| For each maxima tabular the value of relative intensity from the App.

Explain the diffraction pattern

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Assignment'''

'''Diffrentiate between interference and diffraction patterns.'''
|| Differentiate between interference and diffraction patterns.

|-
||
|| Let us summarized.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial we have,
* Verified the relation between wavelength and relative intensity.
* Found the relation between slit width, maxima and minima.
* Calculated the angle for the given maxima.
* Interpreted diffraction intensity profile.
* Verified the relation between wavelength and angle.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Forum for specific questions'''
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Reflection-and-Refraction/English

2020-06-20T16:47:50Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Reflection and Refraction'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,

'''Simulate''' reflection and refraction of a light ray.

Calculate the angles of reflection and refraction.

Change the medium and '''angle of incidence''' to verify '''Snell's Law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| Calculate the value of '''critical angle'''.

Verify '''Huygens' principle'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Link for Apps on physics. '''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps'''.

|-
|| Open the '''Downloads '''folder.
|| I have downloaded the '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial, we will use,

'''Refraction of Light ''' and

'''Reflection and Refraction of Light Waves Apps'''.

|-
|| Right-click on '''refraction_en.htm '''file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right-click on '''refraction_en.htm file'''.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser.'''

'''Reflection and Refraction of Light App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The '''App''' shows reflection and refraction of light through a given medium.

|-
|| Point to air and water on the interface
|| The default media are air and water.

|-
|| Point to air.

Point to water.
|| Note that the medium with lesser refractive index is shown in white background.

The medium with greater refractive index is shown in blue background.

|-
|| Point to the light that has been incident.
|| Light from the top left corner, strikes the boundary surface of the two media.

|-
|| Point to both reflection and refraction angles.
|| It shows reflection and refraction.

|-
|| Point to blue angels
|| Reflection is shown by the blue coloured angle.

|-
|| Point to black and blue angles.
|| Observe that the angle of '''incidence''' and reflection are the same.

|-
|| Point to the refraction.
|| Here we see the refraction of light.

|-
|| Show the phenomena with the motion of the cursor.
|| When light travels from rarer medium to denser medium, it bends towards '''normal'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the green '''panel'''.
|| On the green '''panel''' we have a choice to change a few parameters.

|-
|| Point to the drop downs.
|| Let us reverse the two media using the drop downs.

|-
|| Click on the first drop down and change the medium to water.
|| Select '''water''' as the upper medium.

|-
|| Click on second drop down.

Select air from the drop down.
|| Select '''air''' as the lower medium.

|-
|| Move the cursor to show the movements
|| Here the ray of light travels from denser to rarer medium.

The ray bends away from the '''normal'''.

|-
|| Click on both drop down to show the material medium.
|| Note that both the drop downs show the same material media.

|-
|| Point to each drop down.
|| Below the drop down, we see two text fields.

These are provided to enter the values of refractive indices.

|-
|| Enter the value 4 in the '''1st index of refraction '''and show the change.
|| Here we can also change the values manually between the range of 1 to 5.

|-
|| Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to '''refresh''' the '''App'''.

|-
|| Change the values from 0.1 degrees to 90 degrees and show the changes.

Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard to '''refresh''' and show the default value.
|| Next '''Angle of incidence''' can be changed from 0.1 degrees to 90 degrees.

Press '''F5''' key to see the default value.

It shows 30 degrees.

|-
|| Point below the text fields.
|| Below the text fields '''App''' shows the '''Angle of reflection''' and '''refraction'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| Graph shows the angle of refraction with '''angle of incidence'''.

|-
|| Click and drag the '''angle of incidence'''.

Drag it slowly.
|| We can also change the '''angle of incidence''' by dragging this red coloured ray.

|-
|| Point and show the changes when the angle of incidence is changed.
|| Notice the change in angle of reflection and refraction.

Simultaneously observe the graph.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now from the graph we will learn the two cases of '''Snell’s law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Snell’s Law of Refraction'''

sin i / sin r = n21

“n21” is the refractive index of the second medium w.r.t first.
|| Before that let us state '''Snell’s law''' of refraction.

Ratio of '''sine''' of angle of '''incidence''' to '''sine''' of angle of '''refraction''' is a constant.

n21 is the refractive index of second medium with respect to first medium.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Snell’s Law of Refraction'''

'''Case1: '''If''' '''n21 > 1, angle of refraction is less than angle of '''incidence'''.

'''Case2: '''If''' '''n21 < 1, angle of refraction is greater than angle of '''incidence'''.
|| Here are the 2 cases of '''Snell’s law'''.

1. If n21 is greater than 1, angle of refraction is less than angle of '''incidence'''.

2. If n21 is less than 1, angle of refraction is greater than angle of '''incidence'''.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Angle of incidence''' to 20 degrees.
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 20 degrees.

Observe that the '''angle of refraction''' has changed to 14.9.

|-
|| Point to the graph and values of the angles.
|| This graph shows the first case of '''Snell’s law'''.

Here angle of '''incidence''' is greater than the

angle of refraction.

|-
|| Point to the value of refractive index of the second medium.
|| Observe that the light ray bends towards the '''normal'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us see what happens, when incident ray passes from denser to rarer medium.

|-
|| Click on the first drop down and change the medium to diamond.
|| From the first drop down change the material medium to '''diamond'''.

|-
|| Point to show the refraction.
|| Notice that the light ray has bent away from the '''normal'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| This graph shows the second case of '''Snell’s law'''.

|-
|| Point to show Angle of refraction.
|| Here the angle of refraction is greater than the angle of '''incidence'''.

|-
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 30 degrees.
|| Increase the '''Angle of incidence''' to 30 degrees.

|-
|| Point to the refracted ray.
|| The refracted ray has bent still more further away from the '''normal'''.

|-
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 35 degrees.
|| Again increase the '''angle of incidence''' to 35 degrees.

In this case observe that the refraction is not possible.

|-
|| Point to the reflected ray.
|| Here the incident ray is totally reflected.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This phenomenon is known as '''total internal reflection'''.

Here the '''critical angle''' is formed.

|-
|| Point to the '''Critical angle'''.
|| The '''critical angle''' for diamond and water is 33.3 degrees.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Critical angle'''

ic<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(n2/n1)

ic<nowiki>= Critical angle</nowiki>

n1<nowiki>= Refractive index of first medium</nowiki>

n2<nowiki>= Refractive index of the second medium</nowiki>
|| Now we will calculate the '''critical angle''' using the formula.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Let us make a tabular column to calculate '''critical angle''' for two different media.

|-
||point to the calculated values.
|| Here I have calculated the '''critical angle''' for diamond and water.

|-
|| Point to the on the interface '''Critical angle'''.
|| The calculated value is comparable to the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Tabular column'''

|| Now enter these values in the table.

|-
|| Change the upper medium to '''water''' and lower medium to '''air'''.
|| Next change the upper medium to '''water''' and lower medium to '''air'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Tabular Column'''

Show one glimpse of the table
|| Note the refractive indices for both the media.

|-
|| Show the calculation of '''critical''' angle as image.
|| Then calculate the '''critical angle''' using the above formula.

|-
|| Point to show the values.
|| Observe that the values are comparable.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Note these values in the table.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Assignment '''

Show the incomplete table.
|| As an assignment
* Note the values of refractive indices for the following media from the '''App'''.

* Calculate the '''critical angle''' for the two media.

* Compare the values with the ones shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will move on to the next '''App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''refractionhuygens_en.htm'''.

'''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| Right click on '''refractionhuygens_en.htm '''file.

'''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.

The '''App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Highlight the main topic from the screen.
|| '''App''' shows '''Reflection''' and '''Refraction''' of light waves using '''Huygen's''' principle.

|-
|| Click on the '''Restart''' button.
|| Click on the '''Restart''' button.

|-
|| Point to the wavefront.
|| Here the '''plane wavefront''' is incident diagonally on the boundary of the media.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Point to the box and scroll the slider.(Highlight the box)
|| Explanation of each step is provided in this text box.

|-
|| Point to the '''wavefronts'''.
|| Note the change in media, when the '''wavefront''' is incident on the boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to the pink point on the boundary.
|| Observe the pink points on the boundary between the media.

Each pink point is the source of '''spherical wavefront'''.

|-
|| Point to the waves in '''Medium1 '''and '''Medium 2'''.
|| These generating waves in the '''Medium 1 '''and''' Medium 2''' are the wavelets.

|-
|| Click on the''' Resume''' button.
|| Click on the''' Resume''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Note that the waves in '''Medium 2''' move with less velocity as compared to '''Medium 1'''.

This is because, the '''medium 2''' has higher refractive index.

So here the waves move with less velocity.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to the line drawn.
|| Observe the tangent drawn to all these '''spherical waves'''.

This line, here is the source for the secondary '''wavefront'''.

|-
|| Points on the wavelets.
|| So, the points on every wavelet result in the formation of secondary '''wavefront'''.

|-
|| Point to the values.
|| Here the values of '''Angle of incidence''', '''reflection '''and '''refraction '''are given.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| Point and show the direction of propagation of the red and blue waves.
|| Direction of propagation changes when waves move from '''medium 1''' to '''medium 2'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Again click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Point to direction of the propagation of waves.
|| Here the direction of the propagation of waves is shown.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point and show the perpendicular lines.
|| Observe that these lines of propagation are perpendicular to the '''wavefronts'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| Change '''Angle of incidence '''<nowiki>= 60 degrees.</nowiki>
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 60 degrees.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step'''.
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Point the series of waves.
|| Here we can see a series of '''wavefronts''' that are incident on the boundary surface.

|-
|| Cursor on both mediums.
|| Observe the speed and wavelength of '''wavefronts''' in both the media.

|-
|| Point to the denser medium.
|| The wavelength and speed of the '''wavefront''' decreases in the denser medium.

But the frequency of the plane '''wavefronts''' remains the same.

|-
|| make the refractive index of 1 to 2 and refractive index of 2 to 1.
|| Let us reverse the refractive indices and observe the formation of '''wavefronts'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''wavefronts'''.
|| Here the speed of the '''wavefront''' decreases, as it moves from denser medium.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.

Point to show the critical angle.
|| This shows the total internal reflection.

Here the incident '''wavefront''' is completely reflected and not refracted.

This results in the formation of '''critical angle'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the refractive index values of both media as given in Refraction of Light '''App'''.

Observe the formation of '''wavefront''' and give an explanation.

|| As an assignment

Change the refractive index values of both media as given in Refraction of Light '''App'''.

Observe the formation of '''wavefront''' and give an explanation.

|-
||
|| Let us summarize

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''', we have

'''Simulated''' reflection and refraction of a light ray.

Calculated the angles of reflection and refraction.

Changed the medium and '''angle of incidence''' to verify '''Snell's Law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Summary'''
|| Calculated the value of '''critical angle'''.

Verified '''Huygens' principle'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These '''Apps''' are created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These '''Apps''' were created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial project.'''

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 21'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 22'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly.

Someone from our team will answer them.
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 23'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay

Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

QGIS/C2/Creating-Dataset-Using-Google-Earth-Pro/English

2020-06-07T19:57:37Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Creating Dataset using Google Earth Pro'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to

*Download and Install '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Use '''Google Earth Pro''' to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create '''point''' and '''polygon''' files in '''Kml''' format using '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Open '''Kml''' files in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using

*'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04
*'''QGIS '''version 2.18
* '''Google-Earth Pro '''version 7.3
*'''Mozilla Firefox '''browser version 54.0 and
*A working '''Internet '''connection

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with QGIS interface.

For pre-requisite QGIS tutorials, please use this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''

|| Google Earth is a computer program that renders a 3D representation of Earth.

The program, maps the Earth by: superimposing, satellite images, aerial photography, and GIS data.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''
|| The program allows users to see cities and landscapes from various angles.

|-
|| Open a web browser.

(Downloading Google Earth Pro)

Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us download and install '''Google Earth Pro'''.

You can skip this step if the program is already installed on your system.

|-
|| Go to '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “'''Download Google Earth Pro'''” .

Press '''Enter'''
|| Open '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “ '''Download Google Earth Pro'''” and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Page opens with various topics.

Click on '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.
|| A page opens with results.

Click on the first result, '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.

|-
|| Scroll down to see three options.
|| The page opens with 3 options to download Google Earth.

|-
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button.
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button at the bottom right of the screen.

|-
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''' page opens.

Read all the information given in the Google box.

Cursor below the slider box where it is mentioned version7.3 .

Click on '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu) '''radio button.
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''', Privacy policy and terms page opens.

Read all the information given here.

The version of Google earth Pro you are about to download is displayed here.

Select your download package by clicking on appropriate radio button.

I will choose '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu).'''

|-
|| Click on the''' Accept & Download''' button.
|| Click on '''Accept & Download''' button.

|-
|| Select '''Save file''' option and click on '''Ok''' button.
|| A dialog-box opens, select '''Save file''' option and click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the page.
|| The file downloads to the '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Open the terminal

(Press Ctrl+Alt+t '''keys '''simultaneously)

'''sudo dpkg -i google-earth-pro-stable_current_amd64.deb '''

Press '''Enter'''.
|| For installation, open the terminal.

Change the directory to '''Downloads'''.

Type the command as shown on the screen.

Press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Type the system password.
|| Type your system password, when prompted.

|-
|| Cursor on the screen.
|| After a few seconds the program installation is completed.

|-
|| Close the terminal.
|| Close the terminal.

|-
|| Go to the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro '''in the search bar.
|| Open the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro''' in the search box.

|-
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro''' icon.

Cursor on the interface.

Scroll the window to show the information.
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro '''icon.

This will open the '''Google Earth Pro''' interface.

The steps to install '''Google Earth Pro''' in windows and Mac is given in the additional material.

Read the '''Start-up Tips''' page.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close '''button to close the window.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a dataset using '''Google earth'''.

|-
|| Under '''Places '''tab on the left panel, right click on '''Temporary Places'''.
|| In the left panel, under '''Places''' tab, right-click on the '''Temporary Places '''folder.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.
Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.
|| Select '''Add''' and then select '''Folder''' from the sub-menu.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth - New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| To navigate to any location
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

Check the two check boxes.

'''Allow this folder to be expanded'''

'''Show contents as options.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| Click on '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a point dataset in this folder.

We will use '''Google earth''' to navigate to the location.

|-
|| To navigate to a place

Under the heading '''Search''' in the left panel, type the place name (eg.Mumbai)

Click on '''Search'''.
|| In the '''Search '''box in the left panel, type Mumbai

Click on '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The '''Google earth''' will zoom the map to locate Mumbai area.

|-
|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar. (Yellow pin)
|| The location of Mumbai is shown.

Click on '''Add placemark tool '''shown as yellow coloured pin''' '''on the toolbar.

|-
|| '''Google-earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google-Earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Mumbai.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Mumbai'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| Click on the Pin '''icon''' next to the '''Name''' field.

Icon box opens with options to choose.

I will select red pin icon.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''Icon''' dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right-corner in the Icon dialog-box.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''new placemark '''dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK '''button on the''' new placemark''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Notice that a new placemark is added on the map.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| Mumbai location is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| To add another location (eg. Pune)

Type Pune in the search box.

Click on '''Search'''.
|| Clear the search result in the search panel.

Type '''Pune''' in the search box.

Select '''Pune Maharashtra''' from the search options.

Click on the '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Google earth will zoom the map to locate Pune city.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The location of Pune is seen on the map.

We will add a '''Placemark''' for '''Pune'''.

|-
|| To continue adding places

Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

Follow the same steps we did earlier to placemark Mumbai.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| After completing all the steps, notice that a '''placemark''' is added for''' Pune'''.

|-
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule.
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: '''Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule'''.

|-
|| Cursor on interface.
|| We have created a location map for a few locations in Maharashtra.

Now we will create a boundary layer for these locations.

|-
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder icon below''' Temporary Places'''.
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra '''folder icon.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.

Select '''Folder '''from the sub-menus.
|| Click on the''' Add '''option.

Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| At the bottom right corner of the screen click on '''Ok''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Boundary''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.[Drag the slider down(-)].
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.

Drag the slider till we see the Maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.[second option in the toolbar]
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Boundary.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra and roughly draw Maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on '''O'''K button.
|| Once finished click on '''OK '''button in the box

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places '''panel.
|| Boundary polygon layer is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Right click on the '''folder''' Places in Maharashtra to see the added places.
|| Right click on the folder '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Type '''Places''' in Maharashtra''' '''in the file name field.
|| Let us name the file as

'''Places in Maharashtra'''.

|-
|| Select '''Desktop'''.

Click on the '''Save '''button.
|| Select a suitable location to save the file.

I will choose '''Desktop.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Files of type''' drop down.

Select '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.
|| You can save this file in two different file formats.

In the “'''Files of type'''” dropdown you will see '''Kml''' and '''Kmz''' options.

'''Kmz''' is the compressed version of the Kml file.

'''Kmz '''file format is often used to save a large file.
You can choose either of the options mentioned here.

I will use '''Kml''' format to save the file.

Click on '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.

|-
|| Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Click on the '''Save '''button at the bottom-right corner of the dialog-box.

|-
|| Follow the same steps as we did for “'''Places in Maharashtra'''”
|| Similarly save the Boundary file also in '''Kml''' format.

|-
|| Show the '''.kml '''formats on desktop.
|| The two files '''Places in Maharashtra.kml''' and '''Boundary.kml''' are saved on '''Desktop'''.

|-
||
|| Next we will open these two files created in '''Google Earth Pro''' in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''desktop'''.
|| Open '''QGIS''' interface.

|-
|| Add Vector Layer dialog-box opens.
|| Click on '''Add Vector Layer''' tool from the left menu.

'''Add Vector Layer''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Browse'''.

Browse to the folder containing the kml files.Locate the Places in '''Maharashtra.kml.'''
|| Under '''Source''' field, click on '''Browse '''button.

Navigate to the Desktop folder.

Select both

'''Places in Maharashtra.kml''' and '''Boundary.kml''' files.

|-
|| Click '''Open '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button.

|-
|| Click Open in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.
Click on '''OK '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.

Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Both the files imported are now added as layers on the QGIS canvas.

|-
|| Cursor on the qgis interface.
|| These layers can be used for further analysis using tools in QGIS.

|-
||
|| Let's summarize.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

Summary
|| In this tutorial we have learnt to

*Download and Install '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Use '''Google Earth Pro''' to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create '''point''' and '''polygon''' files in '''Kml''' format using '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Open '''Kml''' files in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

Assignment
|| Assignment

Create a dataset of state capitals in India.

Save the points and boundary files in Kml format.

(Hint: Locate all state capitals and draw the boundary of India.)

|-
||
|| Your completed assignment should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial'''
||
* The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.
* Please download watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial Forum'''

||
* The Spoken tutorial project team conducts workshop and gives certificate.
* For more details please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Forum for Specific Questions'''

|| Please post your timed queries on this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide number 12'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

|-
||
|| This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune, Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.
|-
|}

QGIS/C2/Creating-Dataset-Using-Google-Earth-Pro/English

2020-06-07T19:56:37Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Creating Dataset using Google Earth Pro'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to

*Download and Install '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Use '''Google Earth Pro''' to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create '''point''' and '''polygon''' files in '''Kml''' format using '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Open '''Kml''' files in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using

*'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04
*'''QGIS '''version 2.18
* '''Google-Earth Pro '''version 7.3
*'''Mozilla Firefox '''browser version 54.0 and
*A working '''Internet '''connection

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with QGIS interface.

For pre-requisite QGIS tutorials, please use this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''

|| Google Earth is a computer program that renders a 3D representation of Earth.

The program, maps the Earth by: superimposing, satellite images, aerial photography, and GIS data.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''
|| The program allows users to see cities and landscapes from various angles.

|-
|| Open a web browser.

(Downloading Google Earth Pro)

Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us download and install '''Google Earth Pro'''.

You can skip this step if the program is already installed on your system.

|-
|| Go to '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “'''Download Google Earth Pro'''” .

Press '''Enter'''
|| Open '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “ '''Download Google Earth Pro'''” and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Page opens with various topics.

Click on '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.
|| A page opens with results.

Click on the first result, '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.

|-
|| Scroll down to see three options.
|| The page opens with 3 options to download Google Earth.

|-
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button.
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button at the bottom right of the screen.

|-
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''' page opens.

Read all the information given in the Google box.

Cursor below the slider box where it is mentioned version7.3 .

Click on '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu) '''radio button.
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''', Privacy policy and terms page opens.

Read all the information given here.

The version of Google earth Pro you are about to download is displayed here.

Select your download package by clicking on appropriate radio button.

I will choose '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu).'''

|-
|| Click on the''' Accept & Download''' button.
|| Click on '''Accept & Download''' button.

|-
|| Select '''Save file''' option and click on '''Ok''' button.
|| A dialog-box opens, select '''Save file''' option and click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the page.
|| The file downloads to the '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Open the terminal

(Press Ctrl+Alt+t '''keys '''simultaneously)

'''sudo dpkg -i google-earth-pro-stable_current_amd64.deb '''

Press '''Enter'''.
|| For installation, open the terminal.

Change the directory to '''Downloads'''.

Type the command as shown on the screen.

Press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Type the system password.
|| Type your system password, when prompted.

|-
|| Cursor on the screen.
|| After a few seconds the program installation is completed.

|-
|| Close the terminal.
|| Close the terminal.

|-
|| Go to the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro '''in the search bar.
|| Open the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro''' in the search box.

|-
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro''' icon.

Cursor on the interface.

Scroll the window to show the information.
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro '''icon.

This will open the '''Google Earth Pro''' interface.

The steps to install '''Google Earth Pro''' in windows and Mac is given in the additional material.

Read the '''Start-up Tips''' page.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close '''button to close the window.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a dataset using '''Google earth'''.

|-
|| Under '''Places '''tab on the left panel, right click on '''Temporary Places'''.
|| In the left panel, under '''Places''' tab, right-click on the '''Temporary Places '''folder.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.
Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.
|| Select '''Add''' and then select '''Folder''' from the sub-menu.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth - New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| To navigate to any location
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

Check the two check boxes.

'''Allow this folder to be expanded'''

'''Show contents as options.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| Click on '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a point dataset in this folder.

We will use '''Google earth''' to navigate to the location.

|-
|| To navigate to a place

Under the heading '''Search''' in the left panel, type the place name (eg.Mumbai)

Click on '''Search'''.
|| In the '''Search '''box in the left panel, type Mumbai

Click on '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The '''Google earth''' will zoom the map to locate Mumbai area.

|-
|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar. (Yellow pin)
|| The location of Mumbai is shown.

Click on '''Add placemark tool '''shown as yellow coloured pin''' '''on the toolbar.

|-
|| '''Google-earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google-Earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Mumbai.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Mumbai'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| Click on the Pin '''icon''' next to the '''Name''' field.

Icon box opens with options to choose.

I will select red pin icon.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''Icon''' dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right-corner in the Icon dialog-box.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''new placemark '''dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK '''button on the''' new placemark''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Notice that a new placemark is added on the map.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| Mumbai location is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| To add another location (eg. Pune)

Type Pune in the search box.

Click on '''Search'''.
|| Clear the search result in the search panel.

Type '''Pune''' in the search box.

Select '''Pune Maharashtra''' from the search options.

Click on the '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Google earth will zoom the map to locate Pune city.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The location of Pune is seen on the map.

We will add a '''Placemark''' for '''Pune'''.

|-
|| To continue adding places

Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

Follow the same steps we did earlier to placemark Mumbai.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| After completing all the steps, notice that a '''placemark''' is added for''' Pune'''.

|-
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule.
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: '''Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule'''.

|-
|| Cursor on interface.
|| We have created a location map for a few locations in Maharashtra.

Now we will create a boundary layer for these locations.

|-
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder icon below''' Temporary Places'''.
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra '''folder icon.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.

Select '''Folder '''from the sub-menus.
|| Click on the''' Add '''option.

Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| At the bottom right corner of the screen click on '''Ok''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Boundary''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.[Drag the slider down(-)].
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.

Drag the slider till we see the Maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.[second option in the toolbar]
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Boundary.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra and roughly draw Maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on '''O'''K button.
|| Once finished click on '''OK '''button in the box

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places '''panel.
|| Boundary polygon layer is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Right click on the '''folder''' Places in Maharashtra to see the added places.
|| Right click on the folder '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Type '''Places''' in Maharashtra''' '''in the file name field.
|| Let us name the file as

'''Places in Maharashtra'''.

|-
|| Select '''Desktop'''.

Click on the '''Save '''button.
|| Select a suitable location to save the file.

I will choose '''Desktop.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Files of type''' drop down.

Select '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.
|| You can save this file in two different file formats.

In the “'''Files of type'''” dropdown you will see '''Kml''' and '''Kmz''' options.

'''Kmz''' is the compressed version of the Kml file.

'''Kmz '''file format is often used to save a large file.
You can choose either of the options mentioned here.

I will use '''Kml''' format to save the file.

Click on '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.

|-
|| Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Click on the '''Save '''button at the bottom-right corner of the dialog-box.

|-
|| Follow the same steps as we did for “'''Places in Maharashtra'''”
|| Similarly save the Boundary file also in '''Kml''' format.

|-
|| Show the '''.kml '''formats on desktop.
|| The two files '''Places in Maharashtra.kml''' and '''Boundary.kml''' are saved on '''Desktop'''.

|-
||
|| Next we will open these two files created in '''Google Earth Pro''' in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''desktop'''.
|| Open '''QGIS''' interface.

|-
|| Add Vector Layer dialog-box opens.
|| Click on '''Add Vector Layer''' tool from the left menu.

'''Add Vector Layer''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Browse'''.

Browse to the folder containing the kml files.Locate the Places in '''Maharashtra.kml.'''
|| Under '''Source''' field, click on '''Browse '''button.

Navigate to the Desktop folder.

Select both

'''Places in Maharashtra.kml''' and '''Boundary.kml''' files.

|-
|| Click '''Open '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button.

|-
|| Click Open in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.
Click on '''OK '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.

Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Both the files imported are now added as layers on the QGIS canvas.

|-
|| Cursor on the qgis interface.
|| These layers can be used for further analysis using tools in QGIS.

|-
||
|| Let's summarize.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

Summary
|| In this tutorial we have learnt to

*Download and Install Google Earth Pro.
*Use Google Earth Pro to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create point and polygon files in Kml format using Google Earth Pro.
*Open kml files in QGIS.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

Assignment
|| Assignment

Create a dataset of state capitals in India.

Save the points and boundary files in Kml format.

(Hint: Locate all state capitals and draw the boundary of India.)

|-
||
|| Your completed assignment should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial'''
||
* The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.
* Please download watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial Forum'''

||
* The Spoken tutorial project team conducts workshop and gives certificate.
* For more details please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Forum for Specific Questions'''

|| Please post your timed queries on this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide number 12'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

|-
||
|| This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune, Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.
|-
|}

QGIS/C2/Creating-Dataset-Using-Google-Earth-Pro/English

2020-06-07T15:30:16Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Creating Dataset using Google Earth Pro'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to

*Download and Install '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Use '''Google Earth Pro''' to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create '''point''' and '''polygon''' files in '''Kml''' format using '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Open '''Kml''' files in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using

*'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04
*'''QGIS '''version 2.18
* '''Google-Earth Pro '''version 7.3
*'''Mozilla Firefox '''browser version 54.0 and
*A working '''Internet '''connection

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with QGIS interface.

For pre-requisite QGIS tutorials, please use this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''

|| Google Earth is a computer program that renders a 3D representation of Earth.

The program, maps the Earth by: superimposing, satellite images, aerial photography, and GIS data.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''
|| The program allows users to see cities and landscapes from various angles.

|-
|| Open a web browser.

(Downloading Google Earth Pro)

Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us download and install G'''oogle Earth Pro'''.

You can skip this step if the program is already installed on your system.

|-
|| Go to '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “'''Download Google Earth Pro'''” .

Press '''Enter'''
|| Open '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “ '''Download Google Earth Pro'''” and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Page opens with various topics.

Click on '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.
|| A page opens with results.

Click on the first result, '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.

|-
|| Scroll down to see three options.
|| The page opens with 3 options to download Google Earth.

|-
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button.
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button at the bottom right of the screen.

|-
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''' page opens.

Read all the information given in the Google box.

Cursor below the slider box where it is mentioned version7.3 .

Click on '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu) '''radio button.
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''', Privacy policy and terms page opens.

Read all the information given here.

The version of Google earth Pro you are about to download is displayed here.

Select your download package by clicking on appropriate radio button.

I will choose '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu).'''

|-
|| Click on the''' Accept & Download''' button.
|| Click on '''Accept & Download''' button.

|-
|| Select '''Save file''' option and click on '''Ok''' button.
|| A dialog-box opens, select '''Save file''' option and click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the page.
|| The file downloads to the '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Open the terminal

(Press Ctrl+Alt+t '''keys '''simultaneously)

'''sudo dpkg -i google-earth-pro-stable_current_amd64.deb '''

Press '''Enter'''.
|| For installation, open the terminal.

Change the directory to '''Downloads'''.

Type the command as shown on the screen.

Press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Type the system password.
|| Type your system password, when prompted.

|-
|| Cursor on the screen.
|| After a few seconds the program installation is completed.

|-
|| Close the terminal.
|| Close the terminal.

|-
|| Go to the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro '''in the search bar.
|| Open the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro''' in the search box.

|-
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro''' icon.

Cursor on the interface.

Scroll the window to show the information.
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro '''icon.

This will open the '''Google Earth Pro''' interface.

The steps to install '''Google Earth Pro''' in windows and Mac is given in the additional material.

Read the '''Start-up Tips''' page.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close '''button to close the window.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a dataset using '''Google earth'''.

|-
|| Under '''Places '''tab on the left panel, right click on '''Temporary Places'''.
|| In the left panel, under '''Places''' tab, right-click on the '''Temporary Places '''folder.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.
Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.
|| Select '''Add''' and then select '''Folder''' from the sub-menu.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth - New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| To navigate to any location
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

Check the two check boxes.

'''Allow this folder to be expanded'''

'''Show contents as options.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| Click on '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a point dataset in this folder.

We will use '''Google earth''' to navigate to the location.

|-
|| To navigate to a place

Under the heading '''Search''' in the left panel, type the place name (eg.Mumbai)

Click on '''Search'''.
|| In the '''Search '''box in the left panel, type Mumbai

Click on '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The '''Google earth''' will zoom the map to locate Mumbai area.

|-
|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar. (Yellow pin)
|| The location of Mumbai is shown.

Click on '''Add placemark tool '''shown as yellow coloured pin''' '''on the toolbar.

|-
|| '''Google-earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google-Earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Mumbai.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Mumbai'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| Click on the Pin '''icon''' next to the '''Name''' field.

Icon box opens with options to choose.

I will select red pin icon.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''Icon''' dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right-corner in the Icon dialog-box.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''new placemark '''dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK '''button on the''' new placemark''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Notice that a new placemark is added on the map.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| Mumbai location is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| To add another location (eg. Pune)

Type Pune in the search box.

Click on '''Search'''.
|| Clear the search result in the search panel.

Type '''Pune''' in the search box.

Select '''Pune Maharashtra''' from the search options.

Click on the '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Google earth will zoom the map to locate Pune city.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The location of Pune is seen on the map.

We will '''add a Placemark''' for '''Pune'''.

|-
|| To continue adding places

Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

Follow the same steps we did earlier to placemark Mumbai.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| After completing all the steps, notice that a '''placemark''' is added for''' Pune'''.

|-
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule.
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: '''Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule'''.

|-
|| Cursor on interface.
|| We have created a location map for a few locations in Maharashtra.

Now we will create a boundary layer for these locations.

|-
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder icon below''' Temporary Places'''.
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra '''folder icon.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.

Select '''Folder '''from the sub-menus.
|| Click on the''' Add '''option.

Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| At the bottom right corner of the screen click on '''Ok''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Boundary''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.[Drag the slider down(-)].
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.

Drag the slider till we see the maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.[second option in the toolbar]
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Boundary.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra and roughly draw Maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on '''O'''K button.
|| Once finished click on '''OK '''button in the box

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places '''panel.
|| Boundary polygon layer is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Right click on the '''folder''' Places in Maharashtra to see the added places.
|| Right click on the folder '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Type '''Places''' in Maharashtra''' '''in the file name field.
|| Let us name the file as

'''Places in Maharashtra'''.

|-
|| Select '''Desktop'''.

Click on the '''Save '''button.
|| Select a suitable location to save the file.

I will choose '''Desktop.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Files of type''' drop down.

Select '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.
|| You can save this file in two different file formats.

In the “'''Files of type'''” dropdown you will see '''Kml''' and '''Kmz''' options.

'''Kmz''' is the compressed version of the Kml file.

'''Kmz '''file format is often used to save a large file.
You can choose either of the options mentioned here.

I will use '''Kml''' format to save the file.

Click on '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.

|-
|| Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Click on the '''Save '''button at the bottom-right corner of the dialog-box.

|-
|| Follow the same steps as we did for “'''Places in Maharashtra'''”
|| Similarly save the Boundary file also in Kml format.

|-
|| Show the '''.kml '''formats on desktop.
|| The two files “Places in Maharashtra.kml” and “Boundary.kml” are saved on '''Desktop'''.

|-
||
|| Next we will open these two files created in '''Google Earth Pro''' in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''desktop'''.
|| Open '''QGIS''' interface.

|-
|| Add Vector Layer dialog-box opens.
|| Click on '''Add Vector Layer''' tool from the left menu.

'''Add Vector Layer''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Browse'''.

Browse to the folder containing the kml files.Locate the Places in '''Maharashtra.kml.'''
|| Under '''Source''' field, click on '''Browse '''button.

Navigate to the Desktop folder.

Select both

'''Places in Maharashtra.kml '''and '''Boundary.kml '''files.

|-
|| Click '''Open '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button.

|-
|| Click Open in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.
Click on '''OK '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.

Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Both the files imported are now added as layers on the QGIS canvas.

|-
|| Cursor on the qgis interface.
|| These layers can be used for further analysis using tools in QGIS.

|-
||
|| Let's summarize.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

Summary
|| In this tutorial we have learnt to

*Download and Install Google Earth Pro.
*Use Google Earth Pro to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create point and polygon files in Kml format using Google Earth Pro.
*Open kml files in QGIS.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

Assignment
|| Assignment

Create a dataset of state capitals in India.

Save the points and boundary files in Kml format.

(Hint: Locate all state capitals and draw the boundary of India.)

|-
||
|| Your completed assignment should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial'''
||
* This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project
* Please download watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Forum for Specific Questions'''
||
* The Spoken tutorial project conducts workshop and gives certificate.
* For more details please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide number 11'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

|-
||
|| This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune, Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.
|-
|}

QGIS/C2/Creating-Dataset-Using-Google-Earth-Pro/English

2020-06-07T15:28:04Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Creating Dataset using Google Earth Pro'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to

*Download and Install '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Use '''Google Earth Pro''' to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create '''point''' and '''polygon''' files in '''Kml''' format using '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Open '''Kml''' files in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using

*'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04
*'''QGIS '''version 2.18
* '''Google-Earth Pro '''version 7.3
*'''Mozilla Firefox '''browser version 54.0 and
*A working '''Internet '''connection

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with QGIS interface.

For pre-requisite QGIS tutorials, please use this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''

|| Google Earth is a computer program that renders a 3D representation of Earth.

The program, maps the Earth by: superimposing, satellite images, aerial photography, and GIS data.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''
|| The program allows users to see cities and landscapes from various angles.

|-
|| Open a web browser.

(Downloading Google Earth Pro)

Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us download and install G'''oogle Earth Pro'''.

You can skip this step if the program is already installed on your system.

|-
|| Go to '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “'''Download Google Earth Pro'''” .

Press '''Enter'''
|| Open '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “ '''Download Google Earth Pro'''” and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Page opens with various topics.

Click on '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.
|| A page opens with results.

Click on the first result, '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.

|-
|| Scroll down to see three options.
|| The page opens with 3 options to download Google Earth.

|-
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button.
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button at the bottom right of the screen.

|-
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''' page opens.

Read all the information given in the Google box.

Cursor below the slider box where it is mentioned version7.3 .

Click on '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu) '''radio button.
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''', Privacy policy and terms page opens.

Read all the information given here.

The version of Google earth Pro you are about to download is displayed here.

Select your download package by clicking on appropriate radio button.

I will choose '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu).'''

|-
|| Click on the''' Accept & Download''' button.
|| Click on '''Accept & Download''' button.

|-
|| Select '''Save file''' option and click on '''Ok''' button.
|| A dialog-box opens, select '''Save file''' option and click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the page.
|| The file downloads to the '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Open the terminal

(Press Ctrl+Alt+t '''keys '''simultaneously)

'''sudo dpkg -i google-earth-pro-stable_current_amd64.deb '''

Press '''Enter'''.
|| For installation, open the terminal.

Change the directory to '''Downloads'''.

Type the command as shown on the screen.

Press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Type the system password.
|| Type your system password, when prompted.

|-
|| Cursor on the screen.
|| After a few seconds the program installation is completed.

|-
|| Close the terminal.
|| Close the terminal.

|-
|| Go to the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro '''in the search bar.
|| Open the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro''' in the search box.

|-
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro''' icon.

Cursor on the interface.

Scroll the window to show the information.
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro '''icon.

This will open the '''Google Earth Pro''' interface.

The steps to install '''Google Earth Pro''' in windows and Mac is given in the additional material.

Read the '''Start-up Tips''' page.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close '''button to close the window.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a dataset using '''Google earth'''.

|-
|| Under '''Places '''tab on the left panel, right click on '''Temporary Places'''.
|| In the left panel, under '''Places''' tab, right-click on the '''Temporary Places '''folder.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.
Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.
|| Select '''Add''' and then select '''Folder''' from the sub-menu.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth - New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| To navigate to any location
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

Check the two check boxes.

'''Allow this folder to be expanded'''

'''Show contents as options.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| Click on '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a point dataset in this folder.

We will use '''Google earth''' to navigate to the location.

|-
|| To navigate to a place

Under the heading '''Search''' in the left panel, type the place name (eg.Mumbai)

Click on '''Search'''.
|| In the '''Search '''box in the left panel, type Mumbai

Click on '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The '''Google earth''' will zoom the map to locate Mumbai area.

|-
|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar. (Yellow pin)
|| The location of Mumbai is shown.

Click on '''Add placemark tool '''shown as yellow coloured pin''' '''on the toolbar.

|-
|| '''Google-earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google-Earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Mumbai.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Mumbai'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| Click on the Pin '''icon''' next to the '''Name''' field.

Icon box opens with options to choose.

I will select red pin icon.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''Icon''' dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right-corner in the Icon dialog-box.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''new placemark '''dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK '''button on the''' new placemark''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Notice that a new placemark is added on the map.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| Mumbai location is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| To add another location (eg. Pune)

Type Pune in the search box.

Click on '''Search'''.
|| Clear the search results in the search panel.

Type '''Pune''' in the search box.

Select '''Pune Maharashtra''' from the search options.

Click on the '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Google earth will zoom the map to locate Pune city.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The location of Pune is seen on the map.

We will '''add a Placemark''' for '''Pune'''.

|-
|| To continue adding places

Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

Follow the same steps we did earlier to placemark Mumbai.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| After completing all the steps, notice that a '''placemark''' is added for''' Pune'''.

|-
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule.
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: '''Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule'''.

|-
|| Cursor on interface.
|| We have created a location map for a few locations in Maharashtra.

Now we will create a boundary layer for these locations.

|-
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder icon below''' Temporary Places'''.
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra '''folder icon.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.

Select '''Folder '''from the sub-menus.
|| Click on the''' Add '''option.

Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| At the bottom right corner of the screen click on '''Ok''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Boundary''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.[Drag the slider down(-)].
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.

Drag the slider till we see the maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.[second option in the toolbar]
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Boundary.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra and roughly draw Maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on '''O'''K button.
|| Once finished click on '''OK '''button in the box

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places '''panel.
|| Boundary polygon layer is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Right click on the '''folder''' Places in Maharashtra to see the added places.
|| Right click on the folder '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Type '''Places''' in Maharashtra''' '''in the file name field.
|| Let us name the file as

'''Places in Maharashtra'''.

|-
|| Select '''Desktop'''.

Click on the '''Save '''button.
|| Select a suitable location to save the file.

I will choose '''Desktop.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Files of type''' drop down.

Select '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.
|| You can save this file in two different file formats.

In the “'''Files of type'''” dropdown you will see '''Kml''' and '''Kmz''' options.

'''Kmz''' is the compressed version of the Kml file.

'''Kmz '''file format is often used to save a large file.
You can choose either of the options mentioned here.

I will use '''Kml''' format to save the file.

Click on '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.

|-
|| Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Click on the '''Save '''button at the bottom-right corner of the dialog-box.

|-
|| Follow the same steps as we did for “'''Places in Maharashtra'''”
|| Similarly save the Boundary file also in Kml format.

|-
|| Show the '''.kml '''formats on desktop.
|| The two files “Places in Maharashtra.kml” and “Boundary.kml” are saved on '''Desktop'''.

|-
||
|| Next we will open these two files created in '''Google Earth Pro''' in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''desktop'''.
|| Open '''QGIS''' interface.

|-
|| Add Vector Layer dialog-box opens.
|| Click on '''Add Vector Layer''' tool from the left menu.

'''Add Vector Layer''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Browse'''.

Browse to the folder containing the kml files.Locate the Places in '''Maharashtra.kml.'''
|| Under '''Source''' field, click on '''Browse '''button.

Navigate to the Desktop folder.

Select both

'''Places in Maharashtra.kml '''and '''Boundary.kml '''files.

|-
|| Click '''Open '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button.

|-
|| Click Open in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.
Click on '''OK '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.

Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Both the files imported are now added as layers on the QGIS canvas.

|-
|| Cursor on the qgis interface.
|| These layers can be used for further analysis using tools in QGIS.

|-
||
|| Let's summarize.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

Summary
|| In this tutorial we have learnt to

*Download and Install Google Earth Pro.
*Use Google Earth Pro to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create point and polygon files in Kml format using Google Earth Pro.
*Open kml files in QGIS.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

Assignment
|| Assignment

Create a dataset of state capitals in India.

Save the points and boundary files in Kml format.

(Hint: Locate all state capitals and draw the boundary of India.)

|-
||
|| Your completed assignment should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial'''
||
* This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project
* Please download watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Forum for Specific Questions'''
||
* The Spoken tutorial project conducts workshop and gives certificate.
* For more details please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide number 11'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

|-
||
|| This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune, Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.
|-
|}

QGIS/C2/Creating-Dataset-Using-Google-Earth-Pro/English

2020-06-07T14:47:08Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Creating Dataset using Google Earth Pro'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to

*Download and Install '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Use '''Google Earth Pro''' to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create '''point''' and '''polygon''' files in '''Kml''' format using '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Open '''Kml''' files in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using*'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04
*'''QGIS '''version 2.18
* '''Google-Earth Pro '''version 7.3
*'''Mozilla Firefox '''browser version 54.0 and
*A working '''Internet '''connection

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with QGIS interface.

For pre-requisite QGIS tutorials, please use this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''

|| Google Earth is a computer program that renders a 3D representation of Earth.

This application, maps the Earth by: superimposing, satellite images, aerial photography, and GIS data.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''
|| The program allows users to see cities and landscapes from various angles.

|-
|| Open a web browser.

(Downloading Google Earth Pro)

Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us download and install G'''oogle Earth Pro'''.

You can skip this step if the program is already installed on your system.

|-
|| Go to '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “'''Download Google Earth Pro'''” .

Press '''Enter'''
|| Open '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “ '''Download Google Earth Pro'''” and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Page opens with various topics.

Click on '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.
|| A page opens with results.

Click on the first result, '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.

|-
|| Scroll down to see three options.
|| The page opens with 3 options to download Google Earth.

|-
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button.
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button at the bottom right of the screen.

|-
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''' page opens.

Read all the information given in the Google box.

Cursor below the slider box where it is mentioned version7.3 .

Click on '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu) '''radio button.
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''', Privacy policy and terms page opens.

Read all the information given here.

The version of Google earth Pro you are about to download is displayed here.

Select your download package by clicking on the appropriate radio button.

I will choose '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu).'''

|-
|| Click on the''' Accept & Download''' button.
|| Click on '''Accept & Download''' button.

|-
|| Select '''Save file''' option and click on '''Ok''' button.
|| A dialog-box opens, select '''Save file''' option and click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the page.
|| The file downloads to the '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Open the terminal

(Press Ctrl+Alt+t '''keys '''simultaneously)

'''sudo dpkg -i google-earth-pro-stable_current_amd64.deb '''

Press '''Enter'''.
|| For installation, open the terminal.

Change the directory to '''Downloads'''.

Type the command as shown on the screen.

Press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Type the system password.
|| Type your system password, when prompted.

|-
|| Cursor on the screen.
|| After a few seconds the program installation is completed.

|-
|| Close the terminal.
|| Close the terminal.

|-
|| Go to the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro '''in the search bar.
|| Open the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro''' in the search box.

|-
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro''' icon.

Cursor on the interface.

Scroll the window to show the information.
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro '''icon.

This will open the '''Google Earth Pro''' interface.

Read the '''Start-up Tips''' page.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close '''button to close the window.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a dataset using '''Google earth'''.

|-
|| Under '''Places '''tab on the left panel, right click on '''Temporary Places'''.
|| In the left panel, under '''Places''' tab, right-click on the '''Temporary Places '''folder.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.
Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.
|| Select '''Add''' and then select '''Folder''' from the sub-menu.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth - New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| To navigate to any location
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

Check the two check boxes.

'''Allow this folder to be expanded'''

'''Show contents as options.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| Click on '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a point dataset in this folder.

We will use '''Google earth''' to navigate to the location.

|-
|| To navigate to a place

Under the heading '''Search''' in the left panel, type the place name (eg.Mumbai)

Click on '''Search'''.
|| In the '''Search '''box in the left panel, type Mumbai

Click on '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The '''Google earth''' will zoom the map to locate Mumbai area.

|-
|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar. (Yellow pin)
|| The location of Mumbai is shown.

Click on '''Add placemark tool '''shown as yellow coloured pin''' '''on the toolbar.

|-
|| '''Google-earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google-Earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Notice that a new placemark is added on the map.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Mumbai.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Mumbai'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| Click on the Pin '''icon''' next to the '''Name''' field.

Icon box opens with options to choose.

I will select red pin icon.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''Icon''' dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right-corner in the Icon dialog-box.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''new placemark '''dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK '''button on the''' new placemark''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| Mumbai location is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| To add another location (eg. Pune)

Type Pune in the search box.

Click on '''Search'''.
|| Clear the search results in the search panel.

Type '''Pune''' in the search box.

Select '''Pune Maharashtra''' from the search options.

Click on the '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Google earth will zoom the map to locate Pune city.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The location of Pune is seen on the map.

We will '''add a Placemark''' for '''Pune'''.

|-
|| To continue adding places

Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

Follow the same steps we did earlier to placemark Mumbai.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| After completing all the steps, notice that a '''placemark''' is added for''' Pune'''.

|-
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule.
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: '''Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule'''.

|-
|| Cursor on interface.
|| We have created a location map for a few locations in Maharashtra.

Now we will create a boundary layer for these locations.

|-
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder icon below''' Temporary Places'''.
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra '''folder icon.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.

Select '''Folder '''from the sub-menus.
|| Click on the''' Add '''option.

Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| At the bottom right corner of the screen click on '''Ok''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Boundary''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.[Drag the slider down(-)].
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.

Drag the slider till we see the maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.[second option in the toolbar]
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Boundary.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra and roughly draw Maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on '''O'''K button.
|| Once finished click on '''OK '''button in the box

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places '''panel.
|| Boundary polygon layer is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Right click on the '''folder''' Places in Maharashtra to see the added places.
|| Right click on the folder '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Type '''Places''' in Maharashtra''' '''in the file name field.
|| Let us name the file as

'''Places in Maharashtra'''.

|-
|| Select '''Desktop'''.

Click on the '''Save '''button.
|| Select a suitable location to save the file.

I will choose '''Desktop.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Files of type''' drop down.

Select '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.
|| You can save this file in two different file formats.

In the “'''Files of type'''” dropdown you will see '''Kml''' and '''Kmz''' options.

'''Kmz''' is the compressed version of the Kml file.

'''Kmz '''file format is often used to save a large file.
You can choose either of the options mentioned here.

I will use '''Kml''' format to save the file.

Click on '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.

|-
|| Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Click on the '''Save '''button at the bottom-right corner of the dialog-box.

|-
|| Follow the same steps as we did for “'''Places in Maharashtra'''”
|| Similarly save the Boundary file also in Kml format.

|-
|| Show the '''.kml '''formats on desktop.
|| The two files “Places in Maharashtra.kml” and “Boundary.kml” are saved on '''Desktop'''.

|-
||
|| Next we will open these two files created in '''Google Earth Pro''' in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''desktop'''.
|| Open '''QGIS''' interface.

|-
|| Add Vector Layer dialog-box opens.
|| Click on '''Add Vector Layer''' tool from the left menu.

'''Add Vector Layer''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Browse'''.

Browse to the folder containing the kml files.Locate the Places in '''Maharashtra.kml.'''
|| Under '''Source''' field, click on '''Browse '''button.

Navigate to the Desktop folder.

Select both

'''Places in Maharashtra.kml '''and '''Boundary.kml '''files.

|-
|| Click '''Open '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button.

|-
|| Click Open in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.
Click on '''OK '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.

Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Both the files imported are now added as layers on the QGIS canvas.

|-
|| Cursor on the qgis interface.
|| These layers can be used for further analysis using tools in QGIS.

|-
||
|| Let's summarize.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

Summary
|| In this tutorial we have learnt to

*Download and Install Google Earth Pro.
*Use Google Earth Pro to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create point and polygon files in Kml format using Google Earth Pro.
*Open kml files in QGIS.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

Assignment
|| Assignment

Create a dataset of state capitals in India.

Save the points and boundary files in Kml format.

(Hint: Locate all state capitals and draw the boundary of India.)

|-
||
|| Your completed assignment should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial'''
||
* This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project
* Please download watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Forum for Specific Questions'''
||
* The Spoken tutorial project conducts workshop and gives certificate.
* For more details please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide number 11'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

|-
||
|| This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune, Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.
|-
|}

QGIS/C2/Creating-Dataset-Using-Google-Earth-Pro/English

2020-06-07T14:45:14Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with " {|border=1 |- || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Slide Number 1''' '''Title Slide''' || Welcome to this tutorial on '''Creating Dataset using Google Earth Pr..."

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Creating Dataset using Google Earth Pro'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to

*Download and Install '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Use '''Google Earth Pro''' to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create '''point''' and '''polygon''' files in '''Kml''' format using '''Google Earth Pro'''.
*Open '''Kml''' files in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| To record this tutorial, I am using*'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04
*'''QGIS '''version 2.18
* '''Google-Earth Pro '''version 7.3
*'''Mozilla Firefox '''browser version 54.0 and
*A working '''Internet '''connection

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with QGIS interface.

For pre-requisite QGIS tutorials, please use this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''

|| Google Earth is a computer program that renders a 3D representation of Earth.

This application, maps the Earth by: superimposing, satellite images, aerial photography, and GIS data.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Google Earth Pro'''
|| The program allows users to see cities and landscapes from various angles.

|-
|| Open a web browser.

(Downloading Google Earth Pro)

Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us download and install G'''oogle Earth Pro'''.

You can skip this step if the program is already installed on your system.

|-
|| Go to '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “'''Download Google Earth Pro'''” .

Press '''Enter'''
|| Open '''Google Search''' page.

In the search bar type “ '''Download Google Earth Pro'''” and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Page opens with various topics.

Click on '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.
|| A page opens with results.

Click on the first result, '''Earth Versions-Google Earth'''.

|-
|| Scroll down to see three options.
|| The page opens with 3 options to download Google Earth.

|-
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button.
|| Click on '''Download''' '''Earth Pro on desktop '''button at the bottom right of the screen.

|-
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''' page opens.

Read all the information given in the Google box.

Cursor below the slider box where it is mentioned version7.3 .

Click on '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu) '''radio button.
|| '''Download Google Earth Pro (Linux)''', Privacy policy and terms page opens.

Read all the information given here.

The version of Google earth Pro you are about to download is displayed here.

Select your download package by clicking on the appropriate radio button.

I will choose '''64 bit.deb (For Debian/Ubuntu).'''

|-
|| Click on the''' Accept & Download''' button.
|| Click on '''Accept & Download''' button.

|-
|| Select '''Save file''' option and click on '''Ok''' button.
|| A dialog-box opens, select '''Save file''' option and click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the page.
|| The file downloads to the '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Open the terminal

(Press Ctrl+Alt+t '''keys '''simultaneously)

'''sudo dpkg -i google-earth-pro-stable_current_amd64.deb '''

Press '''Enter'''.
|| For installation, open the terminal.

Change the directory to '''Downloads'''.

Type the command as shown on the screen.

Press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Type the system password.
|| Type your system password, when prompted.

|-
|| Cursor on the screen.
|| After a few seconds the program installation is completed.

|-
|| Close the terminal.
|| Close the terminal.

|-
|| Go to the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro '''in the search bar.
|| Open the dashboard and type '''Google Earth Pro''' in the search box.

|-
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro''' icon.

Cursor on the interface.

Scroll the window to show the information.
|| Click on the '''Google Earth Pro '''icon.

This will open the '''Google Earth Pro''' interface.

Read the '''Start-up Tips''' page.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close '''button to close the window.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a dataset using '''Google earth'''.

|-
|| Under '''Places '''tab on the left panel, right click on '''Temporary Places'''.
|| In the left panel, under '''Places''' tab, right-click on the '''Temporary Places '''folder.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.
Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.
|| Select '''Add''' and then select '''Folder''' from the sub-menu.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth - New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| To navigate to any location
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

Check the two check boxes.

'''Allow this folder to be expanded'''

'''Show contents as options.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| Click on '''OK '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will create a point dataset in this folder.

We will use '''Google earth''' to navigate to the location.

|-
|| To navigate to a place

Under the heading '''Search''' in the left panel, type the place name (eg.Mumbai)

Click on '''Search'''.
|| In the '''Search '''box in the left panel, type Mumbai

Click on '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The '''Google earth''' will zoom the map to locate Mumbai area.

|-
|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar. (Yellow pin)
|| The location of Mumbai is shown.

Click on '''Add placemark tool '''shown as yellow coloured pin''' '''on the toolbar.

|-
|| '''Google-earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google-Earth New Placemark''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Notice that a new placemark is added on the map.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Mumbai.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Mumbai'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| Click on the Pin '''icon''' next to the '''Name''' field.

Icon box opens with options to choose.

I will select red pin icon.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''Icon''' dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right-corner in the Icon dialog-box.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok '''in the '''new placemark '''dialog-box.
|| Click on '''OK '''button on the''' new placemark''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| Mumbai location is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| To add another location (eg. Pune)

Type Pune in the search box.

Click on '''Search'''.
|| Clear the search results in the search panel.

Type '''Pune''' in the search box.

Select '''Pune Maharashtra''' from the search options.

Click on the '''Search''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Google earth will zoom the map to locate Pune city.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The location of Pune is seen on the map.

We will '''add a Placemark''' for '''Pune'''.

|-
|| To continue adding places

Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

|| Click on '''Add placemark''' in the toolbar.

Follow the same steps we did earlier to placemark Mumbai.

|-
|| Click on the '''Icon''' under the heading Name.

Click on the red pin Icon.
|| After completing all the steps, notice that a '''placemark''' is added for''' Pune'''.

|-
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule.
|| Follow the same method and mark a few more cities: '''Satara, Nashik, Amravati, Chandrapur, Jalna, Latur, and Dhule'''.

|-
|| Cursor on interface.
|| We have created a location map for a few locations in Maharashtra.

Now we will create a boundary layer for these locations.

|-
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra''' folder icon below''' Temporary Places'''.
|| Right click on '''Places in Maharashtra '''folder icon.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''option.

Select '''Folder '''from the sub-menus.
|| Click on the''' Add '''option.

Select '''Folder''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Google Earth New Folder''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''.
|| At the bottom right corner of the screen click on '''Ok''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places''' panel.
|| '''Boundary''' folder is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.[Drag the slider down(-)].
|| Drag the slider at the right corner of the screen to Zoom out.

Drag the slider till we see the maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.[second option in the toolbar]
|| Click on the '''Add polygon '''option from the toolbar.

|-
|| In the '''Name''' field type Boundary.
|| In the '''Name''' field type '''Boundary'''.

|-
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra
|| Start clicking on the boundary of Maharashtra and roughly draw Maharashtra boundary.

|-
|| Click on '''O'''K button.
|| Once finished click on '''OK '''button in the box

|-
|| Cursor on '''Places '''panel.
|| Boundary polygon layer is added in the '''Places''' panel.

|-
|| Right click on the '''folder''' Places in Maharashtra to see the added places.
|| Right click on the folder '''Places in Maharashtra.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.
|| Click on '''Save place as...''' from the sub-menus.

|-
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''Save file''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Type '''Places''' in Maharashtra''' '''in the file name field.
|| Let us name the file as

'''Places in Maharashtra'''.

|-
|| Select '''Desktop'''.

Click on the '''Save '''button.
|| Select a suitable location to save the file.

I will choose '''Desktop.'''

|-
|| Click on '''Files of type''' drop down.

Select '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.
|| You can save this file in two different file formats.

In the “'''Files of type'''” dropdown you will see '''Kml''' and '''Kmz''' options.

'''Kmz''' is the compressed version of the Kml file.

'''Kmz '''file format is often used to save a large file.
You can choose either of the options mentioned here.

I will use '''Kml''' format to save the file.

Click on '''Kml format''' in '''Files of type '''field.

|-
|| Click on '''Save '''button.
|| Click on the '''Save '''button at the bottom-right corner of the dialog-box.

|-
|| Follow the same steps as we did for “'''Places in Maharashtra'''”
|| Similarly save the Boundary file also in Kml format.

|-
|| Show the '''.kml '''formats on desktop.
|| The two files “Places in Maharashtra.kml” and “Boundary.kml” are saved on '''Desktop'''.

|-
||
|| Next we will open these two files created in '''Google Earth Pro''' in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''desktop'''.
|| Open '''QGIS''' interface.

|-
|| Add Vector Layer dialog-box opens.
|| Click on '''Add Vector Layer''' tool from the left menu.

'''Add Vector Layer''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Browse'''.

Browse to the folder containing the kml files.Locate the Places in '''Maharashtra.kml.'''
|| Under '''Source''' field, click on '''Browse '''button.

Navigate to the Desktop folder.

Select both

'''Places in Maharashtra.kml '''and '''Boundary.kml '''files.

|-
|| Click '''Open '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button.

|-
|| Click Open in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.
Click on '''OK '''button.
|| Click on '''Open '''button in '''Add vector layer '''dialog-box.

In the '''Select vector Layers to add.. '''dailog-box click on '''Select All''' button.

Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Both the files imported are now added as layers on the QGIS canvas.

|-
|| Cursor on the qgis interface.
|| These layers can be used for further analysis using tools in QGIS.

|-
||
|| Let's summarize.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

Summary
|| In this tutorial we have learnt to

*Download and Install Google Earth Pro.
*Use Google Earth Pro to navigate and create a dataset.
*Create point and polygon files in Kml format using Google Earth Pro.
*Open kml files in QGIS.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

Assignment
|| Assignment

Create a dataset of state capitals in India.

Save the points and boundary files in Kml format.

(Hint: Locate all state capitals and draw the boundary of India.)

|-
||
|| Your completed assignment should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial'''
||
* This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project
* Please download watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Forum for Specific Questions'''
||
* The Spoken tutorial project conducts workshop and gives certificate.
* For more details please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

|-
||
|| This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune, Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Keplers-laws/English

2020-06-05T07:18:48Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Kepler's Law'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning objective '''
|| In this tutorial we will,

Verify Kepler's first law using Kepler's first law simulation.

Calculate Aphelion and Perihelion distances.

Verify Kepler's second law using Kepler's second law simulation.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

* '''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04
* '''Firefox web browser''' version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For pre-requisitie tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Link for Apps on physics '''.

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps'''.

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen'''

|-
|| Point to the Downloads folder.
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
||'''Slide Number 6'''

'''Apps on Physics'''

|| In this tutorial we will use,

* '''Kepler's First Law''' and
* '''Kepler's Second Law''' '''Apps'''.

|-
|| Double click on '''html5phen''' folder.

Double click on '''phen''' folder.
|| Double click on '''html5phen''' folder, then double click on '''phen''' folder.
|-
|| Right-click on''' keplerlaw1_en.htm''' file.

Select option '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.
|| Right-click on''' keplerlaw1_en.htm '''file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''.

'''Kepler's First Law App''' opens in the '''browser'''.
|-
|| Point to show the law in Pink colour.
|| Here is the '''Kepler's First Law of undisturbed planetary motion'''.

It states that, The orbit of each planet is an ellipse and the Sun is at one focus.
|-
|| Scroll down the screen.
|| Let us scroll down the screen.
|-
|| Point to the green panel.
|| The green control panel shows the parameters that we can change.
|-
|| Click on drop down list and point the planets and '''Halley's Comet'''.

Point and show '''Mercury'''.
|| From the drop down list select any planet or '''Halley's Comet'''.

By default '''Mercury''' is selected.
|-
|| Point to '''Semimajor axis'''.
|| Here we can change the '''Semimajor axis''' from 0.1 to 100 '''AU'''.
|-
|| Highlight the wordings from the interface.
|| These lengths are in astronomical units.

'''1AU = 1.495 X 10^11 m '''

This is the average distance between the Earth and the Sun.
|-
|| Point to '''Numerical eccentricity'''.
|| The''' Numerical eccentricity''' should be less than 1.
|-
|| Point to '''Semiminor axis''' and '''Distance from the Sun'''.
|| The '''App''' automatically calculates the '''Semiminor axis''' and '''Distance from the Sun'''.
|-
|| Under '''Distance from the Sun''' point to '''Currently'''.
|| Since the planet is revolving around the Sun, its current distance changes continuously.
|-
|| Point to '''Minimum''' and '''Maximum Distance from the Sun'''.

Point to '''Minimum''' value.

Point to '''Maximum''' value.
||'''Mercury's Minimum''' and '''Maximum Distance from the Sun''' is measured.

'''Minimum''' measured value is '''0.307 AU'''.

And '''Maximum''' measured value is '''0.467 AU'''.
|-
|| Move the cursor at the bottom of the green panel and point to '''Elliptical orbit'''.

'''Axes''' and '''Connecting lines''' check-box.
|| At the bottom of the green panel there are three check-boxes.

'''Elliptical orbit''',
'''Axes''' and
'''Connecting lines'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Elliptical orbit''' check-box.
|| Click on '''Elliptical orbit''' check-box.
|-
|| Point to the orbit and positions of''' Aphelion''' and '''Perihelion'''.
|| Observe that the orbit now has two positions, namely '''Aphelion''' and '''Perihelion'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on '''Pause''' button to pause the simulation.
|-
|| Point to the''' Maximum''' and '''Minimum''' under '''Distance from the Sun'''.
|| '''Aphelion''' is the '''Maximum''' distance and '''Perihelion''' is the '''Minimum''' distance from the Sun.
|-
|| Click on '''Connecting lines''' check-box.
|| Select '''Connecting lines''' check-box.
|-
|| Point to F and F prime.
|| Here we can see the '''foci F''' and '''F prime''' of the elliptical orbit.
|-
|| Point to the connecting lines and foci.
|| Note that the connecting lines between the planet and the '''foci''' are drawn.
|-
|| Click on '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on '''Resume''' button.
|-
|| Select the '''Axes''' check-box.
|| Select the '''Axes''' check-box.
|-
|| Point to the lines.
|| Here we can see that semi-major axis and semi-minor axis are drawn.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us calculate the '''Aphelion''' and '''Perihelion''' distances of Mercury using the formula.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Aphelion and Perihelion Distances'''

'''Ra<nowiki>=a(1+e) </nowiki>Rp<nowiki>=a(1-e)</nowiki>'''

'''Where,'''

'''Ra is Aphelion distance (Maximum)'''

'''Rp is Perihelion distance(Minimum)'''

'''a is semimajor axis'''

'''e is eccentricity'''
|| Formula to calculate '''Aphelion''' and '''Perihelion''' distances:

'''Ra<nowiki>=a(1+e)</nowiki>''' '''Rp<nowiki>=a(1-e)</nowiki>'''

Where,

* Ra is '''Aphelion''' distance.

* Rp is '''Perihelion''' distance.

* a is semi-major axis.

* e is '''eccentricity'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Tabular Column'''
|| Let us make a tabular column to show planets, '''Eccentricity''', '''Aphelion''' and '''Perihelion''' distances.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Aphelion and Perihelion Distances'''

'''Ra<nowiki>=a(1+e) </nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>=</nowiki>0.387(1+0.206)'''

'''<nowiki>=0.466 AU</nowiki>'''

'''Rp<nowiki>=a(1-e)</nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>=0.387(1-0.206)</nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>=0.307 AU</nowiki>'''
||Let us calculate the '''Maximum''' and '''Minimum''' distance of Mercury from the Sun.

Substitute the values of '''Semi-major axis''' and '''eccentricity''' in the formula from the '''App'''.

These are the calculated values of the '''Aphelion''' and '''Perihelion''' distances.

Now we will compare these values with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
|| Highlight the values of '''Minimum''' and '''Maximum''' distance.
|| Observe that the values are comparable.
|-
|| Open drop down list and select Venus.
|| From the drop down I will select Venus.

Observe that the values have changed for Venus.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''
'''Tabular Column'''

Point to values of '''Minimum''' and '''Maximum''' distance.
|| Similarly I have calculated the '''Maximum''' and '''Minimum''' distance for Venus.
And entered these values in the table.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Assignment'''

Calculate the '''Aphelion''' and '''Perhelion''' distances of the other planets.

Use the values of semi-major axis and '''eccentricity''' shown in the '''App'''.

Complete the table and verify the values with the ones shown in the '''App'''.

|| As an assignment

* Calculate the '''Aphelion''' and '''Perhelion''' distances of the other planets.

* Use the values of semi-major axis and '''eccentricity''' shown in the '''App'''.

* Complete the table and verify the values with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
|| Click on the drop down list and select the '''Halley’s comet'''.
|| From the drop down list select '''Halley’s comet'''.
|-
|| Point to show the orbit.
|| Observe that the orbit of '''Halley’s comet''' is different from the other planets.
|-
|| Point to the sun.
|| It's orbit around the Sun is highly elliptical.
|-
|| Point to numerical eccentricity.
|| This is because the numerical '''eccentricity''' of the '''Halley’s comet''' is close to 1.
|-
|| point to semi-major and semi-minor axis.
|| Therefore there is a large difference in the values of semi-major and semi-minor axis.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Halley’s Comet'''

Halley’s comet is a periodic comet.

It returns to Earth’s vicinity in about every 75 years.

A comet appears as a bright head with a long tail.

The tail of a comet is always directed away from the Sun.
|| Let us know more about Halley’s comet.

* Halley’s comet is a periodic comet.

* It returns to Earth’s vicinity in about every 75 years.

* A comet appears as a bright head with a long tail.

* The tail of a comet is always directed away from the Sun.
|-
||
|| Now we will move on to the next '''App'''.
|-
|| To open the '''App''' right click on '''keplerlaw2_en.htm''' file and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| To open the '''App''' right click on '''keplerlaw2_en.htm''' file and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|-
|| Point to Kepler's second law within the pink box.
|| The '''App''' opens with '''Kepler's Second Law of the undisturbed planetary motion'''.
|-
|| Highlight the Law from the simulation.
|| The law states that,

The line joining the planet to the Sun sweeps out equal areas in equal intervals of time.
|-
||Scroll down the screen.
||Scroll down to see the interface.
|-
|| At the bottom of the green panel point to

'''Distance from the Sun''' and '''Velocity'''.
|| In the green control panel, '''App '''measures the '''Distance from the Sun''' and '''Velocity'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Currently''' under '''Velocity'''.
|| The current velocity of the planet is changing continuously as the planet is revolving.
|-
|| Point to the '''Minimum''' and '''Maximum''' velocity.
|| The '''Minimum''' and '''Maximum''' velocity of the planet is measured here.
|-
|| Point to the '''Sectors''' and '''Vector of velocity''' check-boxes.
|| At the bottom there are two check-boxes, '''Sectors''' and '''Vector of velocity'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Sectors'''.

Drag and show the change.
|| By default '''Sectors''' is selected.

Next to the '''Sectors '''check-box, a slider is provided to change the area of the '''sector'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Vector of velocity''' check-box.
|| Select '''Vector of velocity'''.
|-
|| Point to the vector.
|| Here the black velocity vector shows the direction of velocity of the planet.
|-
|| Point to show the '''Maximum velocity'''.
|| The maximum velocity with which '''Mercury''' revolves is 59.1 km/s.
|-
|| Point to the value of velocity.

From the drop down select Jupiter and point to the velocity.

Planets far away from Sun have less velocity as compared to the planets that are near.
||
* Mercury is the closest planet to the Sun so it moves with a greater velocity.

* Now I will show the velocity for Jupiter.

* Select Jupiter from the drop down list.

* Jupiter has less velocity than that of Mercury.

* Planets far away from the Sun have less velocity as compared to the planets that are near.
|-
|| cursor on the interface.
|| This is because the Sun’s gravitational pull is stronger on the planets that are close to it.
|-

|| Point to the two clocks.

Point to the ''' “T “ '''to show the unit.
|| Observe the pink and green digital clocks.

They record the time when the planet sweeps the '''sectors'''.

This time is expressed in orbital period.
|-
|| Drag the sector to show the changes.

|| Let’s drag the '''sector''' slider to maximum.
|-
|| Point to the clocks.
|| Notice that as we increase the area, time increases.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Orbital period'''

|| The Orbital period is the time taken by the celestial object to go around the orbit of another celestial object.
|-
|| Select '''Saturn''' from the drop down list.

Point to the pink and green clock which shows the sweep time.
|| Select the '''Saturn''' from the drop down list.

Observe that the sweep time for each '''sector''' in '''Saturn''' is same.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Assignment'''

Select planets Venus and Uranus from the drop down list.

Observe the difference in the velocity.

Explain your observation.
|| As an assignment

Select planets Venus and Uranus from the drop down list.

Observe the difference in the velocity.

Explain your observation.
|-
||
|| Let us summarise
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

* Verified Kepler's first law using Kepler's first law simulation.

* Calculated Aphelion and Perihelion distances.

* Verified Kepler's second law using Kepler's second law simulation.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| These Apps were created by Walter Fendt and his team.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project'''.

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''.

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project ''' team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries on this forum.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.
|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Sound-waves/English

2020-06-05T07:01:12Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-

|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Sound Waves'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial we will,

Form a standing wave.

Form nodes and antinodes.

View various types of harmonics of a standing wave.

Calculate the wavelength and frequency of standing waves.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

* '''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04
* '''Firefox web browser''' version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''
'''Pre-requitsites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisite tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Learning Goals'''
||Calculate the wavelength and frequency of standing waves.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

Link for '''Apps on physics'''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the''' Downloads''' folder
|| I have downloaded the '''Apps''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
||'''Slide Number 7'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
||In this tutorial we will use,

'''Standing Wave''' and '''Standing Longitudinal Waves Apps'''.

|-
|| Right-click on '''standingwavereflection_en.htm''' file.

Select option '''Open With Firefox Web Browser '''option.
|| Right-click on '''standingwavereflection_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.

'''Standing Wave App''' opens in the '''browser'''.
|-
|| Point to the radio buttons,

'''Reflection from a fixed end '''and '''Reflection from a free end'''.
|| In the green panel under '''Reflection''' we have two radio buttons.

* '''from a fixed end ''' and
* '''from a free end'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Reflection from a fixed end.'''
|| By default '''Reflection from a fixed end''' is selected.
|-
|| Point to '''Reset '''and '''Start''' button.
|| Below these radio buttons you can see, '''Reset''' and '''Start '''buttons.
|-
|| Point to '''Start '''>>''' Pause''' >> '''Resume.'''
|| '''Start '''button is a toggle for '''Start, Pause''' and '''Resume'''.
|-
|| Point to the three check-boxes

'''Incidenting wave'''

'''Reflected wave '''and

'''Resultant standing wave'''.
|| At the bottom of the green panel you can see

* '''Incidenting wave'''
* '''Reflected wave '''and
* '''Resultant standing wave''' check-boxes.
|-
|| Point to the check-boxes.
|| These check-boxes are selected by default.
|-
|| Click '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show oscillations on the string.
|| On the yellow panel, observe the propagation of a wave in a string.

The red wave is the '''Incidenting wave'''.
|-
|| Point the cursor to show the reflection from the fixed end.

Point to the blue '''Reflected wave'''.
|| The blue wave is the '''Reflected wave'''.

Observe that the reflected wave has a phase change of 180 degrees.
|-
|| Point to show the amplitude.
|| Here the incident and reflected waves have the same amplitude.
|-
|| Uncheck the '''Reflected wave'''.
|| Let us uncheck the''' Reflected wave'''.

If we uncheck any of the check-boxes, we cannot see the corresponding wave.
|-
|| Click on the Reflected wave check-box
|| Click the '''Reflected wave''' check-box to make it visible again.
|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button to stop the propagation of the waves.
|-
|| Point to the resultant wave.
|| Here is the resultant '''standing wave'''.
|-
|| Pause the '''App''' when it shows this image.
|| This wave is formed due to the superposition of incident and reflected waves.

The resultant wave is the constructive superposition of the waves.
|-
|| Cursor on the waves.
|| Now I will show the superposition of waves in a step-by-step manner.
|-
|| Click on '''Single step''' radio button.

Point to the animation after clicking.
|| Click on the '''Single steps''' radio button to show the animation step-by-step.
|-
|| Click on the drop down to see the different time period.

Point to '''T/8.'''
|| Here a drop down to show various time periods is seen.

By default it is '''T by 8'''.

We will leave it as it is.
|-
|| Click 3 times on '''Resume''' button.

show Constructive and destructive interference of sound waves.
|| Now click the '''Resume''' button three times to show different superpositions.
|-
|| Click on the Resume button and bring it to Destructive interference.
|| This is destructive interference of sound waves.

Here the waves are out of phase.

So they subtract each other and form a straight line.
|-
|| Click on '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on '''Resume''' button again.
|-
|| Point and show the intermediate superposition.
|| This is an intermediate superposition of waves.

It lies between the constructive and destructive superpositions.
|-
|| Click on '''Resume''' button.
|| Again click on the''' Resume''' button.
|-
|| Point to the wave.
|| This is constructive interference of the waves.

This is the amplitude of the resulting standing wave.
It is the sum of incident and reflected waves.
|-
|| Continuously click on '''Resume '''button to show the three steps.
|| For the time period '''T by 8''', one '''cycle''' takes three steps to complete.

'''T by 8''' means 1/8th of the total time period.
|-
|| Select '''T/24 ''' from the drop down.

Click on the''' Resume '''button

point to various superpositions.
|| Let us select '''T by 24 ''' from the drop-down.

Click on the ''' Resume '''button continuously to see various superpositions.

Observe that one superposition cycle now takes five steps.
|-
|| Select T/4 and T/12 options >> click Resume button.
|| You can try other options given in the drop-down on your own.
|-
|| Point to''' N '''and '''A.'''
|| After the reflection from the fixed end, you can see '''A '''and '''N''' on the string.
|-
|| Point to '''N '''and '''A'''.
|| Here''' N''' is a''' Node''' and '''A''' is an''' Antinode'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Node and Antinode'''

* '''Node '''is the point where the particles do not have any motion.

* '''Antinode''' is the point where the particle oscillates with maximum amplitude.
|| Let us define a '''Node''' and an '''Antinode.'''

*'''Node '''is the point where the particles do not have any motion.

*'''Antinode''' is the point where the particle oscillates with maximum amplitude.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Assignment'''

Using '''Reflection from free end''' option, show the formation of '''standing waves'''.

Observe the reflection by selecting various time period options.

Explain your observation.
|| As an assignment

Using '''Reflection from free end''' option, show the formation of standing waves.

Observe the reflection by selecting various time period options.

Explain your observation.
|-
||
|| Let us move on to '''Standing longitudinal wave App'''.
|-
|| Right-click on '''standinglongitudinalwaves_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| To open the''' App '''right-click on '''standinglongitudinalwaves_en.htm '''file.

Select the option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''App'''.
|| The '''App''' opens in the browser.
|-
|| Highlight the 1st line from the paragraph.
|| Here is the information related to the '''App''' interface.
|-
|| Scroll down to see the interface.
|| Scroll down to see the interface completely.
|-
|| Point to the tube.

Point to the blue points.
|| This interface shows a tube filled with air molecules.

The blue dots inside the tube represent the air molecules.
|-
|| Point to both the graphs in given sequence.
|| Here we can see two plots.

'''Displacement of particles''' and '''Divergence from average pressure'''.
|-
|| Point to both the X- axis.

Point to '''Δx'''.

Point to''' Δp'''.
|| X axis represents the length of the tube.

'''Δ(delta)x''' is the change in displacement of molecules from the equilibrium position.

'''Δ(delta)p''' is the '''Divergence from average pressure.'''
|-
|| Point to pink and red waves.
|| Observe the pink and red waves.

They show the instantaneous movement of air molecules.
|-
|| Point to the''' Form of tube''' and move the cursor to show the different radio buttons.
|| In the green panel, under the heading''' Form of tube''', we have three radio buttons.
|-
|| Point to the default selected form.
|| By default '''both sides open''' radio button is selected.
|-
|| Point to the '''Vibrational mode'''.

Point to '''Lower''' and '''Higher '''buttons.
|| Next, under '''Vibrational mode''' we see two buttons, '''Lower '''and '''Higher'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''Lower''' buttons.

Point to show the '''fundamental'''.
|| By default, the '''App '''shows the lowest '''Vibrational mode'''.

The lowest '''vibrational mode''' of the system is known as '''fundamental'''.

'''Fundamental vibrational mode''' is the first harmonic followed by higher harmonics.

|-
|| Point to '''Length of tube '''edit box.
|| We can change the''' Length of the tube''' in this box.
|-
|| Point to '''Length of tube'''.
|| '''Length of the tube''' can be varied between 1''' meter''' to 10''' meters'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Wavelength''' and '''Frequency'''.
|| The '''App''' calculates the '''Wavelength''' and '''Frequency '''based on the length of the tube.

|-
|| Click on the '''Higher''' button till we get a''' 5th overtone'''.
|| Click the '''Higher '''button continuously.

It shows 5 overtones for the six harmonical vibrations.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to reset the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the tube.

Move the cursor to show the particles at the middle.

Move the cursor to show the particles at extreme positions.

|| Observe the motion of air molecules.

Molecules in the middle of the tube do not displace from the mean position.

Therefore in the '''Displacement of particles''' graph, '''node''' is in the middle.

|-
|| Show the movement of particles and then point to the graph
|| Observe that particles at the extreme positions are oscillating in and out.

Here particles oscillate with maximum amplitude.

Therefore '''antinode''' is present at the extreme ends of the X- axis.

|-
|| Move the cursor to 2nd graph.
|| Let us move to the second graph.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Observe the movement of particles inside the tube and graph simultaneously.

|-
|| Point to graph and the tube.
|| In the graph, movement of the pink wave shows the changes in the pressure.

As the particles move towards the center, they get compressed.

So pressure increases.

When they move away pressure decreases.

|-
|| Click on '''one side open Form of tube '''radio button.
|| Under '''Form of tube''', select '''one side open''' radio button.

|-
|| Cursor on the tube.
|| Observe the movement of particles in this form of the tube.
|-
|| Point to the closed end.
|| Here particles at the closed end are not moving.

Therefore the pressure is maximum at this end.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us calculate the wavelength in this form of the tube.

|-
|| Define Wavelength in a text-box.

show the picture for which we have to calculate the wavelength.

|| First let us define wavelength.

Wavelength is the distance between two consecutive peaks.

|-
|| Click on the '''Higher''' button.

Point to the 1st overtone
|| Click on the '''Higher''' button to show the first overtone.

We have to calculate the wavelength of first overtone wave.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Wavelength'''

'''L = (n/4)x ''λ'''''

'''''L is length of tube'''''

'''''λ is wavelength'''''

'''''n= 1,2,3,......n'''''

'''''λ=4L/n'''''
|| Mathematically we can write,

'''L = n by 4 of lambda'''

here '''L''' is length of the tube and '''lambda''' is the wavelength.

‘'''n'''’ can take values from 1 to n.

By rearranging the equation we can write this as

'''lambda= 4L upon n'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Wavelength'''

'''''λ=4L/n'''''

'''''λ=(4 X 1)<nowiki>/3= </nowiki>1.33 m'''''

|| Let us calculate the wavelength.

The wavelength of the first overtone is three-fourth of the complete wave.

Here the value of n is 3.

From the '''App, '''value of length of tube can be taken as '''L'''.

Therefore the calculated value of wavelength is 1.33 '''metre'''.

This is the wavelength of first overtone mode of vibration.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Frequency'''

The number of complete oscillations per second is known as the frequency of a sound wave.

It is measured in '''hertz (Hz)'''.

'''f=c/λ'''

'''λ''' is wavelength

'''c''' is speed of sound wave
|| Now we will calculate the frequency of the wave.

The number of complete oscillations per second is the frequency of a sound wave.

It is measured in '''hertz (Hz)'''.

Frequency is calculated using the formula.

'''f=c/λ'''

'''λ''' is wavelength and

'''c''' is speed of sound wave
|-
|| Point to the value in the '''App'''.
|| The''' App ''' shows the value of speed of sound wave as 343.5 '''metre per second '''at 20 '''degree Celsius'''.
|-
|| Cursor to show the wave for which frequency has to be calculated.
|| Let us calculate the frequency of the same wave.
|-
|| Show the picture

'''f=c/λ'''

'''<nowiki>=</nowiki>343.5 / 1.33'''

<nowiki>= </nowiki>258.27 Hz
|| Substitute the values for the above formula from the '''App'''.

The value for the frequency is 258.27 '''Hertz'''.

This value is comparable to the value shown in the '''App'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Tabular Column'''

||Make a tabular column to show the wavelength and frequency for 6 harmonical modes.
|-
|| Click on''' Higher'''.
|| Click on the '''Higher '''button to go to next harmonic.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Tabular Column '''

Show the tabular column with values
|| Similarly I have calculated frequency and wavelength for higher harmonics.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Assignment'''

Show the empty table.
|| As an assignment

Change the length of tube to 8 metre.

Calculate the wavelength and frequency for different vibrational modes.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the '''Form of tube''' to '''both sides closed ''' and explain the graphs.
|| Another assignment.

Change the '''form of tube''' to '''both sides closed ''' and explain the graphs.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Summary'''

|| Let us summarize.

Using these '''Apps''' we have,

* Formed a standing wave.

* Formed nodes and antinodes.

* Viewed various types of harmonics of a standing wave.

* Calculated the wavelength and frequency of standing waves.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These '''Apps''' were created by '''Walter-fendt''' and his team.
|| These '''Apps '''were created by '''Walter-fendt''' and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial project.'''

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

||The '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 21'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly.

Someone from our team will answer them.
|| Please post your timed queries on this forum.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 22'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
||Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Sound-waves/English

2020-06-05T06:59:26Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-

|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Sound Waves'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial we will,

Form a standing wave.

Form nodes and antinodes.

View various types of harmonics of a standing wave.

Calculate the wavelength and frequency of standing waves.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

* '''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04
* '''Firefox web browser''' version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''
'''Pre-requitsites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisite tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Learning Goals'''
||Calculate the wavelength and frequency of standing waves.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

Link for '''Apps on physics'''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the''' Downloads''' folder
|| I have downloaded the '''Apps''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
||'''Slide Number 7'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
||In this tutorial we will use,

'''Standing Wave''' and '''Standing Longitudinal Waves Apps'''.

|-
|| Right-click on '''standingwavereflection_en.htm''' file.

Select option '''Open With Firefox Web Browser '''option.
|| Right-click on '''standingwavereflection_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.

'''Standing Wave App''' opens in the '''browser'''.
|-
|| Point to the radio buttons,

'''Reflection from a fixed end '''and '''Reflection from a free end'''.
|| In the green panel under '''Reflection''' we have two radio buttons.

* '''from a fixed end ''' and
* '''from a free end'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Reflection from a fixed end.'''
|| By default '''Reflection from a fixed end''' is selected.
|-
|| Point to '''Reset '''and '''Start''' button.
|| Below these radio buttons you can see, '''Reset''' and '''Start '''buttons.
|-
|| Point to '''Start '''>>''' Pause''' >> '''Resume.'''
|| '''Start '''button is a toggle for '''Start, Pause''' and '''Resume'''.
|-
|| Point to the three check-boxes

'''Incidenting wave'''

'''Reflected wave '''and

'''Resultant standing wave'''.
|| At the bottom of the green panel you can see

* '''Incidenting wave'''
* '''Reflected wave '''and
* '''Resultant standing wave''' check-boxes.
|-
|| Point to the check-boxes.
|| These check-boxes are selected by default.
|-
|| Click '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show oscillations on the string.
|| On the yellow panel, observe the propagation of a wave in a string.

The red wave is the '''Incidenting wave'''.
|-
|| Point the cursor to show the reflection from the fixed end.

Point to the blue '''Reflected wave'''.
|| The blue wave is the '''Reflected wave'''.

Observe that the reflected wave has a phase change of 180 degrees.
|-
|| Point to show the amplitude.
|| Here the incident and reflected waves have the same amplitude.
|-
|| Uncheck the '''Reflected wave'''.
|| Let us uncheck the''' Reflected wave'''.

If we uncheck any of the check-boxes, we cannot see the corresponding wave.
|-
|| Click on the Reflected wave check-box
|| Click the '''Reflected wave''' check-box to make it visible again.
|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button to stop the propagation of the waves.
|-
|| Point to the resultant wave.
|| Here is the resultant '''standing wave'''.
|-
|| Pause the '''App''' when it shows this image.
|| This wave is formed due to the superposition of incident and reflected waves.

The resultant wave is the constructive superposition of the waves.
|-
|| Cursor on the waves.
|| Now I will show the superposition of waves in a step-by-step manner.
|-
|| Click on '''Single step''' radio button.

Point to the animation after clicking.
|| Click on the '''Single steps''' radio button to show the animation step-by-step.
|-
|| Click on the drop down to see the different time period.

Point to '''T/8.'''
|| Here a drop down to show various time periods is seen.

By default it is '''T by 8'''.

We will leave it as it is.
|-
|| Click 3 times on '''Resume''' button.

show Constructive and destructive interference of sound waves.
|| Now click the '''Resume''' button three times to show different superpositions.
|-
|| Click on the Resume button and bring it to Destructive interference.
|| This is destructive interference of sound waves.

Here the waves are out of phase.

So they subtract each other and form a straight line.
|-
|| Click on '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on '''Resume''' button again.
|-
|| Point and show the intermediate superposition.
|| This is an intermediate superposition of waves.

It lies between the constructive and destructive superpositions.
|-
|| Click on '''Resume''' button.
|| Again click on the''' Resume''' button.
|-
|| Point to the wave.
|| This is constructive interference of the waves.

This is the amplitude of the resulting standing wave.
It is the sum of incident and reflected waves.
|-
|| Continuously click on '''Resume '''button to show the three steps.
|| For the time period '''T by 8''', one '''cycle''' takes three steps to complete.

'''T by 8''' means 1/8th of the total time period.
|-
|| Select '''T/24 ''' from the drop down.

Click on the''' Resume '''button

point to various superpositions.
|| Let us select '''T by 24 ''' from the drop-down.

Click on the ''' Resume '''button continuously to see various superpositions.

Observe that one superposition cycle now takes five steps.
|-
|| Select T/4 and T/12 options >> click Resume button.
|| You can try other options given in the drop-down on your own.
|-
|| Point to''' N '''and '''A.'''
|| After the reflection from the fixed end, you can see '''A '''and '''N''' on the string.
|-
|| Point to '''N '''and '''A'''.
|| Here''' N''' is a''' Node''' and '''A''' is an''' Antinode'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Node and Antinode'''

* '''Node '''is the point where the particles do not have any motion.

* '''Antinode''' is the point where the particle oscillates with maximum amplitude.
|| Let us define a '''Node''' and an '''Antinode.'''

*'''Node '''is the point where the particles do not have any motion.

*'''Antinode''' is the point where the particle oscillates with maximum amplitude.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Assignment'''

Using '''Reflection from free end''' option, show the formation of '''standing waves'''.

Observe the reflection by selecting various time period options.

Explain your observation.
|| As an assignment

Using '''Reflection from free end''' option, show the formation of standing waves.

Observe the reflection by selecting various time period options.

Explain your observation.
|-
||
|| Let us move on to '''Standing longitudinal wave App'''.
|-
|| Right-click on '''standinglongitudinalwaves_en.htm''' file.

Select '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| To open the''' App '''right-click on '''standinglongitudinalwaves_en.htm '''file.

Select the option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''App'''.
|| The '''App''' opens in the browser.
|-
|| Highlight the 1st line from the paragraph.
|| Here is the information related to the '''App''' interface.
|-
|| Scroll down to see the interface.
|| Scroll down to see the interface completely.
|-
|| Point to the tube.

Point to the blue points.
|| This interface shows a tube filled with air molecules.

The blue dots inside the tube represent the air molecules.
|-
|| Point to both the graphs in given sequence.
|| Here we can see two plots.

'''Displacement of particles''' and '''Divergence from average pressure'''.
|-
|| Point to both the X- axis.

Point to '''Δx'''.

Point to''' Δp'''.
|| X axis represents the length of the tube.

'''Δ(delta)x''' is the change in displacement of molecules from the equilibrium position.

'''Δ(delta)p''' is the '''Divergence from average pressure.'''
|-
|| Point to pink and red waves.
|| Observe the pink and red waves.

They show the instantaneous movement of air molecules.
|-
|| Point to the''' Form of tube''' and move the cursor to show the different radio buttons.
|| In the green panel, under the heading''' Form of tube''', we have three radio buttons.
|-
|| Point to the default selected form.
|| By default '''both sides open''' radio button is selected.
|-
|| Point to the '''Vibrational mode'''.

Point to '''Lower''' and '''Higher '''buttons.
|| Next, under '''Vibrational mode''' we see two buttons, '''Lower '''and '''Higher'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''Lower''' buttons.

Point to show the '''fundamental'''.
|| By default, the '''App '''shows the lowest '''Vibrational mode'''.

The lowest '''vibrational mode''' of the system is known as '''fundamental'''.

'''Fundamental vibrational mode''' is the first harmonic followed by higher harmonics.

|-
|| Point to '''Length of tube '''edit box.
|| We can change the''' Length of the tube''' in this box.
|-
|| Point to '''Length of tube'''.
|| '''Length of the tube''' can be varied between 1''' meter''' to 10''' meters'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Wavelength''' and '''Frequency'''.
|| The '''App''' calculates the '''Wavelength''' and '''Frequency '''based on the length of the tube.

|-
|| Click on the '''Higher''' button till we get a''' 5th overtone'''.
|| Click the '''Higher '''button continuously.

It shows 5 overtones for the six harmonical vibrations.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to reset the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the tube.

Move the cursor to show the particles at the middle.

Move the cursor to show the particles at extreme positions.

|| Observe the motion of air molecules.

Molecules in the middle of the tube do not displace from the mean position.

Therefore in the '''Displacement of particles''' graph, '''node''' is in the middle.

|-
|| Show the movement of particles and then point to the graph
|| Observe that particles at the extreme positions are oscillating in and out.

Here particles oscillate with maximum amplitude.

Therefore '''antinode''' is present at the extreme ends of the X- axis.

|-
|| Move the cursor to 2nd graph.
|| Let us move to the second graph.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Observe the movement of particles inside the tube and graph simultaneously.

|-
|| Point to graph and the tube.
|| In the graph, movement of the pink wave shows the changes in the pressure.

As the particles move towards the center, they get compressed.

So pressure increases.

When they move away pressure decreases.

|-
|| Click on '''one side open Form of tube '''radio button.
|| Under '''Form of tube''', select '''one side open''' radio button.

|-
|| Cursor on the tube.
|| Observe the movement of particles in this form of the tube.
|-
|| Point to the closed end.
|| Here particles at the closed end are not moving.

Therefore the pressure is maximum at this end.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us calculate the wavelength in this form of the tube.

|-
|| Define Wavelength in a text-box.

show the picture for which we have to calculate the wavelength.

|| First let us define wavelength.

Wavelength is the distance between two consecutive peaks.

|-
|| Click on the '''Higher''' button.

Point to the 1st overtone
|| Click on the '''Higher''' button to show the first overtone.

We have to calculate the wavelength of first overtone wave.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Wavelength'''

'''L = (n/4)x ''λ'''''

'''''L is length of tube'''''

'''''λ is wavelength'''''

'''''n= 1,2,3,......n'''''

'''''λ=4L/n'''''
|| Mathematically we can write,

'''L = n by 4 of lambda'''

here '''L''' is length of the tube and '''lambda''' is the wavelength.

‘'''n'''’ can take values from 1 to n.

By rearranging the equation we can write this as

'''lambda= 4L upon n'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Wavelength'''

'''''λ=4L/n'''''

'''''λ=(4 X 1)<nowiki>/3= </nowiki>1.33 m'''''

|| Let us calculate the wavelength.

The wavelength of the first overtone is three-fourth of the complete wave.

Here the value of n is 3.

From the '''App, '''value of length of tube can be taken as '''L'''.

Therefore the calculated value of wavelength is 1.33 '''metre'''.

This is the wavelength of first overtone mode of vibration.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Frequency'''

The number of complete oscillations per second is known as the frequency of a sound wave.

It is measured in '''hertz (Hz)'''.

'''f=c/λ'''

'''λ''' is wavelength

'''c''' is speed of sound wave
|| Now we will calculate the frequency of the wave.

The number of complete oscillations per second is the frequency of a sound wave.

It is measured in '''hertz (Hz)'''.

Frequency is calculated using the formula.

'''f=c/λ'''

'''λ''' is wavelength and

'''c''' is speed of sound wave
|-
|| Point to the value in the '''App'''.
|| The''' App ''' shows the value of speed of sound wave as 343.5 '''metre per second '''at 20 '''degree Celsius'''.
|-
|| Cursor to show the wave for which frequency has to be calculated.
|| Let us calculate the frequency of the same wave.
|-
|| Show the picture

'''f=c/λ'''

'''<nowiki>=</nowiki>343.5 / 1.33'''

<nowiki>= </nowiki>258.27 Hz
|| Substitute the values for the above formula from the '''App'''.

The value for the frequency is 258.27 '''Hertz'''.

This value is comparable to the value shown in the '''App'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Tabular Column'''

||Make a tabular column to show the wavelength and frequency for 6 harmonical modes.
|-
|| Click on''' Higher'''.
|| Click on the '''Higher '''button to go to next harmonic.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Tabular Column '''

Show the tabular column with values
|| Similarly I have calculated frequency and wavelength for higher harmonics.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Assignment'''

Show the empty table.
|| As an assignment

Change the length of tube to 8 metre.

Calculate the wavelength and frequency for different vibrational modes.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the '''Form of tube''' to '''both sides closed ''' and explain the graphs.
|| Another assignment.

Change the '''form of tube''' to '''both sides closed ''' and explain the graphs.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Summary'''

|| Let us summarize.

Using these '''Apps''' we have,

* Formed a standing wave.

* Formed nodes and antinodes.

* Viewed various types of harmonics of a standing wave.

* Calculated the wavelength and frequency of standing waves.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These '''Apps''' were created by '''Walter-fendt''' and his team.
|| These '''Apps '''were created by '''Walter-fendt''' and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial project.'''

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 21'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

||The '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 22'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly.

Someone from our team will answer them.
|| Please post your timed queries on this forum.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 23'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
||Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Circular-motion/English

2020-06-05T06:40:28Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Circular Motion.'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| In this tutorial we will,

Change the position, velocity, acceleration and force with time.

Calculate angular velocity and angular acceleration.

Calculate centripetal force.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

*'''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04
*'''Firefox Web Browser''' version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial learners should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisite tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Uniform Circular Motion'''

It is a motion of an object on a circular path with a constant speed.

Example: Moon, revolves around the earth in uniform circular motion.

|| Let us first define uniform circular motion.

It is a motion of an object on a circular path with a constant speed.

For example: Moon, revolves around the earth in uniform circular motion.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Link for Apps on physics. '''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps'''.

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|-
|| Open the '''Downloads '''folder.
|| I have already downloaded the '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
||'''Slide Number 7'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
||In this tutorial we will use,

*'''Uniform Circular Motion''' and

*'''Model of a Carousel Apps.'''

|-
|| Right click on '''circularmotion_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.

|| Right-click on '''circularmotion_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.

'''Uniform Circular Motion app''' opens in the '''browser'''.

|-
|| Point to the white point.
|| The interface shows a white coloured point on a circular path.

This white coloured point behaves as an object on a circular path.

|-
|| Scroll down to see the '''App''' completely.
|| Scroll down to see the complete interface.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| Next to the circular path, we see a graph.

This graph shows the change in position of the object with time.

|-
|| Click on the '''Start''' button in the green control panel.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.

|-
|| Click on the '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Click on the '''Slow motion''' check-box to see the motion steadily.

|-
|| Point to bold red vector and then the other two vectors on '''x''' and '''y''' axis.
|| The bold red vector shows the instantaneous position of the point.

The other two red vectors show the position of the point along the '''x''' and '''y''' axes.

|-
|| Click on '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the '''Slow motion''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button to reset the '''App'''.
|-
|| Point to the red dots on the graph.
|| The initial position of the white point is 2 '''metre''' on '''x'''-axis and 0 '''metre''' on '''y'''-axis.

|-
|| Point to the red vector.
|| This is because the white point is on the circle that has a radius of 2 '''metre'''.

And it is pointing in the positive x-axis.

|-
|| Point to the radio button.
Click on the '''Velocity''' radio button.

|| Click on the '''Velocity''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the pink vector.
|| Observe that the direction of the velocity vector is tangential to the circular path.

|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button and observe the change in direction of velocity.

|-
|| Point to the velocity vector.
|| Notice that the magnitude of the velocity is same but its direction changes continuously.

|-
|| Point to the '''y'''-axis.
|| Observe that the representation on the y-axis has changed to velocity.

|-
|| Point to the name of '''y'''-axis.
|| In the graph y-axis has changed from x, y to Vx , Vy.

|-
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.

|-
|| Point to angular velocity.

Point to the value
|| Above the linear velocity the '''App''' has shown '''Angular velocity''', denoted by '''omega'''.

The value of '''omega''' is 1.26 '''radians per second'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.

|-
|| Select '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Select '''Slow motion''' check-box.

|-
|| Point to the bold Pink colour vector
|| Here the bold pink vector shows the magnitude and direction of velocity.

|-
|| Point to other faint '''x''' and '''y''' coordinates.
|| The other two vectors show the magnitude and direction on the '''x''' and '''y''' coordinates.

|-
|| Uncheck the '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the '''Slow motion''' check box.

|-
|| Make a png for the formula and display on the interface.

'''ω=v/r '''

ω = angular velocity

v= linear velocity

r = radius
|| We can calculate angular velocity using the formula.

'''ω=v/r'''

where '''ω '''is angular velocity

'''v '''is linear velocity and

'''r '''is radius of the circle

|-
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.

|-
||Press '''Enter''' after changing every value.

Change
*'''Radius''' to 5 '''metre''',
*'''Period '''to 10 '''s'''and
*'''Mass''' to 10 '''Kg'''.
|| Change the
*'''Radius''' to 5 '''metre,'''
*'''Period''' to 10 '''seconds''' and
*'''Mass''' of the object to 10 '''kg'''.

Press '''Enter''' after changing every value.

|-
|| Show a png

ω=v/r

<nowiki>=3.14/ 5</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 0.628 rad/s</nowiki>
|| I have already calculated the value of angular velocity.

|-
|| Point to the value.
|| The value of angular velocity is 0.628 '''rad/s (radians per second)'''.

|-
|| Point to the measured value of '''Angular velocity''' by the '''App'''.
|| The calculated value is same as the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Acceleration''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Acceleration''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to blue vector as centripetal acceleration.
|| Here the blue vector shows the direction of acceleration.

This acceleration is centripetal acceleration.

|-
|| Point to '''a=1.97 m/s2'''.
|| The magnitude of acceleration is 1.97 '''metre per second square'''.

|-
|| Point to the blue arrow.
|| The direction of acceleration is towards the center of the circle.

|-
|| Make a png to show the formula on the interface. ['''ac<nowiki>=</nowiki>ω2r]'''

Click on '''Velocity '''radio button.
|| This is the formula to calculate centripetal acceleration.

Click on '''Velocity''' radio button.

|-
|| Show the angular velocity value and radius.
|| Substitute the values of angular velocity and radius into the formula.

|-
|| Click on '''Acceleration''' radio button.

'''Show a png'''

'''ac<nowiki>=</nowiki>ω2r'''

'''<nowiki>=(0.628)</nowiki>2 x 5'''

'''<nowiki>=1.97 m/s</nowiki>2'''
|| Again click on '''Acceleration''' radio button.

Here is the calculated value of centripetal acceleration.

Observe that the calculated value is same as the one shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Click''' Force''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Force''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the '''Force''' vector.
|| Note that the direction of '''Force''' vector is same as that of the '''Acceleration''' vector.

|-
|| F directly proportional to acceleration.
|| Recall from '''Newton's''' second law that force and acceleration are directly related to each other.

|-
||Click on the '''Start''' button.
||Click on the '''Start''' button.

|-
|| Point to the force vector.
|| Force acting on a circular field is a centripetal force.

|-
|| Point to the vector that is directed towards the center.
|| This force is always directed towards the center.

|-
||Click on the '''Reset''' button.
||Click on the '''Reset''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Numerical'''

Consider the white point as a toy car of mass 1 Kg that moves

on a circular track of radius 8.00 m in 10.0 seconds.

Calculate the centripetal acceleration of the car.

|| Let us solve a numerical to find centripetal acceleration.

Please pause the video and read the numerical.

|-
|| Edit the values of '''Radius''' to 8 '''m''' and '''Period''' to 10 '''sec'''.
|| Then change the parameters according to the numerical.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Details about all calculations are shown in the '''Additional material'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| For now I will calculate centripetal acceleration using the formula.

|-
|| Click on '''Velocity''' radio button.
|| Click on '''Velocity''' radio button.

|-
|| Make a text-box to show the calculation.

ac<nowiki>=</nowiki>ω2r

<nowiki>= (0.628 )</nowiki>2 x 8

<nowiki>= 3.15 m/s</nowiki>2 
|| Let us substitute the values of angular velocity and radius into the formula.

The calculated value of centripetal acceleration is 3.15 '''metre per second square'''.

|-
|| Click on''' Acceleration''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Acceleration''' radio button to compare the value.

|-
|| Point to the value of '''Acceleration'''.
|| Observe that the values are comparable.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Assignment'''

A particle of mass 0.2 kg moves on a circle of radius 2 m in a time period of 10 s.

Find the angular velocity.
|| As an assignment solve the following numericals by changing the parameters.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Assignment'''

A toy car of mass 2 Kg moves on a circle of radius 10 m.

In a time period of 10 s. Find the values of angular velocity and centripetal force.
||

|-
||
|| Let us move on to '''Carousel App'''.

|-
|| '''html5phen'''<< '''phen'''<<'''carousel_en.htm '''

<<right click on the file name<< open with firefox web browser.
|| To open the '''App''' right-click on '''carousel_en.htm''' file and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| '''Model of a Carousel App''' opens in the '''browser'''.

Below the name a short description about the interface is given.

|-
|| Scroll down to see the interface.
|| Let us scroll down to see the interface.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This '''App''' shows the application of centripetal force.

|-
|| Point to the attached pendulums.
|| Notice that eight pendulums are attached to the '''carousel'''.

|-
|| Point to''' Carousel''' radio button.
|| Here we have four radio buttons.

By default '''Carousel '''is selected.

|-
|| Make a box while editing and Point to the text-fields.
|| In the green panel we can change the values of the text-fields.

|-
|| Edit the value for '''Period''' as 2.

point to the movement of the carousel.
|| Let us change the '''Period''' to 2 seconds and press '''Enter'''.

Notice that the speed of the '''carousel''' has increased.

Due to increase in speed radius of the axis of rotation increases.

|-
|| Point to the pendulums.
|| The pendulums move away from the center.

|-
|| Click on the '''Numerical values''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Numerical values''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the values.
|| Here we can see different parameters that '''App''' has calculated.

|-
|| Point to the value of '''Velocity'''.
|| The value of '''Velocity''' is 5.21 '''metre per second'''.

|-
|| Point the values of '''Frequency''', '''Angular velocity''', and '''Centripetal force'''.
|| Note the values of '''Frequency''', '''Angular velocity''', and '''Centripetal force'''.

|-
|| Change '''Period''' to 5 seconds.
|| Let us increase the '''Period''' to 5 seconds.

|-
|| Point to the '''Frequency''', '''Angular velocity''', and '''Centripetal force'''.
|| As we increase the '''Period''', '''Frequency''', '''Angular velocity '''

and '''Centripetal force''' have decreased.

|-
|| Click on the '''Carousel''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Carousel''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the carousel.
|| Observe that the '''carousel''' speed has slowed down.

|-
|| Change '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' to 1 '''metre'''.
|| Let’s change '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' to 1 '''metre'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation'''.
|| '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' can be changed from 0 to 1 '''metre'''.

|-
|| Point to the carousel.
|| Observe that the size of the '''carousel''' has increased.

|-
|| Change the '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' to 0.3 '''metre'''.
|| Let’s decrease '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' to 0.3 '''metre'''.

|-
|| Point to the carousel.
|| Note the decrease in the size of the '''carousel'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Length of the string'''.
|| Change the '''Length of the string''' to 0.5 '''metre''' and observe the changes on the '''carousel'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Length of the string'''.
|| Note that we can vary the '''Length of the string''' between 0 to 1 metre.

|-
|| Change the '''Mass''' to 0.1 '''kg''' and then to 10 '''kg''' to show the change.
|| Similarly we can vary the '''Mass''' between 0.1 to 10 '''kg'''.

|-
|| Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard to''' Reset'''.
|| Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard to '''Reset''' the '''App'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Carousel with forces''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Carousel with forces''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the vectors.
|| Here it shows three force vectors.

|-
|| Change the value of '''Period''' to 2 '''seconds''' .
|| Let us change '''Period''' to 2 '''seconds''' to see the vectors clearly.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to black vector.

Point to blue vector.

Point to red vector.

|| Black vector shows the force due to the weight.

Blue vector shows the force exerted by the string

And red vector is the net force pointing inward.

|-
|| Select '''Sketch''' radio button.
|| To get a clear view of the vectors let us select '''Sketch''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the interface.
|| Here we can see a 2D view of the force vectors.

|-
|| Click on '''Carousel''' radio button.
|| Click on '''Carousel''' radio button.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Numerical'''

The toy horse suspended to a carousel has a mass of 1.5 kg.

It moves on a circular base with a period of 4 s.

If its distance between the suspension and axis of rotation is 1 m, calculate centripetal force.

|| Let us solve a numerical by varying the parameters in the '''App'''.

Please pause the video and read the numerical.
|-
|| Change and point to show the values.
|| Let us change the values according to the numerical.

|-
|| Make png to show the formula on the interface.

'''Fc<nowiki>= mv</nowiki>2/r'''
|| To calculate the centripetal force we can use the formula :

'''Fc<nowiki>= mv</nowiki>2/r'''

|-
|| Click on '''Numerical values''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Numerical values''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to show the value of radius and velocity.
|| From here we will take the values of radius and velocity.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now calculate the value of centripetal force.

|-
|| '''Show it on a text-box'''.

'''Fc<nowiki>= mv</nowiki>2/r'''

'''<nowiki>= </nowiki>1.5 x 2.06 x 2.06'''

'''1.31'''

'''<nowiki>= </nowiki>4.85 N'''
|| Substitute the values into the formula.

We get the value of centripetal force as 4.85 '''Newton'''.

|-
|| Point to the values side by side.
|| Observe that the values are comparable.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Assignment'''

The toy horse suspended to a carousel has a mass of 5 kg,

it moves on a circular base with a period of 3 s.

If its distance between the suspension and axis of rotation is 0.5 m,

calculate angular velocity, angular acceleration and centripetal force.
|| As an assignment solve the given numerical.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

* Changed the position, velocity, acceleration and force with time.

* Calculated angular velocity and angular acceleration.

* Calculated centripetal force.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps were created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These '''Apps''' were created by '''Walter-fendt''' and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project'''.

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''.

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more information, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly.

Someone from our team will answer them.
|| Please post your timed queries on this forum.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Circular-motion/English

2020-06-05T06:39:53Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Circular Motion.'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| In this tutorial we will,

Change the position, velocity, acceleration and force with time.

Calculate angular velocity and angular acceleration.

Calculate centripetal force.

|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

*'''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04
*'''Firefox Web Browser''' version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial learners should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisite tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Uniform Circular Motion'''

It is a motion of an object on a circular path with a constant speed.

Example: Moon, revolves around the earth in uniform circular motion.

|| Let us first define uniform circular motion.

It is a motion of an object on a circular path with a constant speed.

For example: Moon, revolves around the earth in uniform circular motion.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Link for Apps on physics. '''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps'''.

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|-
|| Open the '''Downloads '''folder.
|| I have already downloaded the '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
||'''Slide Number 7'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
||In this tutorial we will use,

*'''Uniform Circular Motion''' and

*'''Model of a Carousel Apps.'''

|-
|| Right click on '''circularmotion_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.

|| Right-click on '''circularmotion_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.

'''Uniform Circular Motion app''' opens in the '''browser'''.

|-
|| Point to the white point.
|| The interface shows a white coloured point on a circular path.

This white coloured point behaves as an object on a circular path.

|-
|| Scroll down to see the '''App''' completely.
|| Scroll down to see the complete interface.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| Next to the circular path, we see a graph.

This graph shows the change in position of the object with time.

|-
|| Click on the '''Start''' button in the green control panel.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.

|-
|| Click on the '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Click on the '''Slow motion''' check-box to see the motion steadily.

|-
|| Point to bold red vector and then the other two vectors on '''x''' and '''y''' axis.
|| The bold red vector shows the instantaneous position of the point.

The other two red vectors show the position of the point along the '''x''' and '''y''' axes.

|-
|| Click on '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the '''Slow motion''' check-box.

|-
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button to reset the '''App'''.
|-
|| Point to the red dots on the graph.
|| The initial position of the white point is 2 '''metre''' on '''x'''-axis and 0 '''metre''' on '''y'''-axis.

|-
|| Point to the red vector.
|| This is because the white point is on the circle that has a radius of 2 '''metre'''.

And it is pointing in the positive x-axis.

|-
|| Point to the radio button.
Click on the '''Velocity''' radio button.

|| Click on the '''Velocity''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the pink vector.
|| Observe that the direction of the velocity vector is tangential to the circular path.

|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button and observe the change in direction of velocity.

|-
|| Point to the velocity vector.
|| Notice that the magnitude of the velocity is same but its direction changes continuously.

|-
|| Point to the '''y'''-axis.
|| Observe that the representation on the y-axis has changed to velocity.

|-
|| Point to the name of '''y'''-axis.
|| In the graph y-axis has changed from x, y to Vx , Vy.

|-
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.

|-
|| Point to angular velocity.

Point to the value
|| Above the linear velocity the '''App''' has shown '''Angular velocity''', denoted by '''omega'''.

The value of '''omega''' is 1.26 '''radians per second'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.

|-
|| Select '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Select '''Slow motion''' check-box.

|-
|| Point to the bold Pink colour vector
|| Here the bold pink vector shows the magnitude and direction of velocity.

|-
|| Point to other faint '''x''' and '''y''' coordinates.
|| The other two vectors show the magnitude and direction on the '''x''' and '''y''' coordinates.

|-
|| Uncheck the '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Uncheck the '''Slow motion''' check box.

|-
|| Make a png for the formula and display on the interface.

'''ω=v/r '''

ω = angular velocity

v= linear velocity

r = radius
|| We can calculate angular velocity using the formula.

'''ω=v/r'''

where '''ω '''is angular velocity

'''v '''is linear velocity and

'''r '''is radius of the circle

|-
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.

|-
||Press '''Enter''' after changing every value.

Change
*'''Radius''' to 5 '''metre''',
*'''Period '''to 10 '''s'''and
*'''Mass''' to 10 '''Kg'''.
|| Change the
*'''Radius''' to 5 '''metre,'''
*'''Period''' to 10 '''seconds''' and
*'''Mass''' of the object to 10 '''kg'''.

Press '''Enter''' after changing every value.

|-
|| Show a png

ω=v/r

<nowiki>=3.14/ 5</nowiki>

<nowiki>= 0.628 rad/s</nowiki>
|| I have already calculated the value of angular velocity.

|-
|| Point to the value.
|| The value of angular velocity is 0.628 '''rad/s (radians per second)'''.

|-
|| Point to the measured value of '''Angular velocity''' by the '''App'''.
|| The calculated value is same as the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Acceleration''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Acceleration''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to blue vector as centripetal acceleration.
|| Here the blue vector shows the direction of acceleration.

This acceleration is centripetal acceleration.

|-
|| Point to '''a=1.97 m/s2'''.
|| The magnitude of acceleration is 1.97 '''metre per second square'''.

|-
|| Point to the blue arrow.
|| The direction of acceleration is towards the center of the circle.

|-
|| Make a png to show the formula on the interface. ['''ac<nowiki>=</nowiki>ω2r]'''

Click on '''Velocity '''radio button.
|| This is the formula to calculate centripetal acceleration.

Click on '''Velocity''' radio button.

|-
|| Show the angular velocity value and radius.
|| Substitute the values of angular velocity and radius into the formula.

|-
|| Click on '''Acceleration''' radio button.

'''Show a png'''

'''ac<nowiki>=</nowiki>ω2r'''

'''<nowiki>=(0.628)</nowiki>2 x 5'''

'''<nowiki>=1.97 m/s</nowiki>2'''
|| Again click on '''Acceleration''' radio button.

Here is the calculated value of centripetal acceleration.

Observe that the calculated value is same as the one shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Click''' Force''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Force''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the '''Force''' vector.
|| Note that the direction of '''Force''' vector is same as that of the '''Acceleration''' vector.

|-
|| F directly proportional to acceleration.
|| Recall from '''Newton's''' second law that force and acceleration are directly related to each other.

|-
||Click on the '''Start''' button.
||Click on the '''Start''' button.

|-
|| Point to the force vector.
|| Force acting on a circular field is a centripetal force.

|-
|| Point to the vector that is directed towards the center.
|| This force is always directed towards the center.

|-
||Click on the '''Reset''' button.
||Click on the '''Reset''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Numerical'''

Consider the white point as a toy car of mass 1 Kg that moves

on a circular track of radius 8.00 m in 10.0 seconds.

Calculate the centripetal acceleration of the car.

|| Let us solve a numerical to find centripetal acceleration.

Please pause the video and read the numerical.

|-
|| Edit the values of '''Radius''' to 8 '''m''' and '''Period''' to 10 '''sec'''.
|| Then change the parameters according to the numerical.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Details about all calculations are shown in the '''Additional material'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| For now I will calculate centripetal acceleration using the formula.

|-
|| Click on '''Velocity''' radio button.
|| Click on '''Velocity''' radio button.

|-
|| Make a text-box to show the calculation.

ac<nowiki>=</nowiki>ω2r

<nowiki>= (0.628 )</nowiki>2 x 8

<nowiki>= 3.15 m/s</nowiki>2 
|| Let us substitute the values of angular velocity and radius into the formula.

The calculated value of centripetal acceleration is 3.15 '''metre per second square'''.

|-
|| Click on''' Acceleration''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Acceleration''' radio button to compare the value.

|-
|| Point to the value of '''Acceleration'''.
|| Observe that the values are comparable.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Assignment'''

A particle of mass 0.2 kg moves on a circle of radius 2 m in a time period of 10 s.

Find the angular velocity.
|| As an assignment solve the following numericals by changing the parameters.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Assignment'''

A toy car of mass 2 Kg moves on a circle of radius 10 m.

In a time period of 10 s. Find the values of angular velocity and centripetal force.
||

|-
||
|| Let us move on to '''Carousel App'''.

|-
|| '''html5phen'''<< '''phen'''<<'''carousel_en.htm '''

<<right click on the file name<< open with firefox web browser.
|| To open the '''App''' right-click on '''carousel_en.htm''' file and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| '''Model of a Carousel App''' opens in the '''browser'''.

Below the name a short description about the interface is given.

|-
|| Scroll down to see the interface.
|| Let us scroll down to see the interface.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This '''App''' shows the application of centripetal force.

|-
|| Point to the attached pendulums.
|| Notice that eight pendulums are attached to the '''carousel'''.

|-
|| Point to''' Carousel''' radio button.
|| Here we have four radio buttons.

By default '''Carousel '''is selected.

|-
|| Make a box while editing and Point to the text-fields.
|| In the green panel we can change the values of the text-fields.

|-
|| Edit the value for '''Period''' as 2.

point to the movement of the carousel.
|| Let us change the '''Period''' to 2 seconds and press '''Enter'''.

Notice that the speed of the '''carousel''' has increased.

Due to increase in speed radius of the axis of rotation increases.

|-
|| Point to the pendulums.
|| The pendulums move away from the center.

|-
|| Click on the '''Numerical values''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Numerical values''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the values.
|| Here we can see different parameters that '''App''' has calculated.

|-
|| Point to the value of '''Velocity'''.
|| The value of '''Velocity''' is 5.21 '''metre per second'''.

|-
|| Point the values of '''Frequency''', '''Angular velocity''', and '''Centripetal force'''.
|| Note the values of '''Frequency''', '''Angular velocity''', and '''Centripetal force'''.

|-
|| Change '''Period''' to 5 seconds.
|| Let us increase the '''Period''' to 5 seconds.

|-
|| Point to the '''Frequency''', '''Angular velocity''', and '''Centripetal force'''.
|| As we increase the '''Period''', '''Frequency''', '''Angular velocity '''

and '''Centripetal force''' have decreased.

|-
|| Click on the '''Carousel''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Carousel''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the carousel.
|| Observe that the '''carousel''' speed has slowed down.

|-
|| Change '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' to 1 '''metre'''.
|| Let’s change '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' to 1 '''metre'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation'''.
|| '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' can be changed from 0 to 1 '''metre'''.

|-
|| Point to the carousel.
|| Observe that the size of the '''carousel''' has increased.

|-
|| Change the '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' to 0.3 '''metre'''.
|| Let’s decrease '''Distance between suspensions and axis of rotation''' to 0.3 '''metre'''.

|-
|| Point to the carousel.
|| Note the decrease in the size of the '''carousel'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Length of the string'''.
|| Change the '''Length of the string''' to 0.5 '''metre''' and observe the changes on the '''carousel'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Length of the string'''.
|| Note that we can vary the '''Length of the string''' between 0 to 1 metre.

|-
|| Change the '''Mass''' to 0.1 '''kg''' and then to 10 '''kg''' to show the change.
|| Similarly we can vary the '''Mass''' between 0.1 to 10 '''kg'''.

|-
|| Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard to''' Reset'''.
|| Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard to '''Reset''' the '''App'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Carousel with forces''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Carousel with forces''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the vectors.
|| Here it shows three force vectors.

|-
|| Change the value of '''Period''' to 2 '''seconds''' .
|| Let us change '''Period''' to 2 '''seconds''' to see the vectors clearly.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to black vector.

Point to blue vector.

Point to red vector.

|| Black vector shows the force due to the weight.

Blue vector shows the force exerted by the string

And red vector is the net force pointing inward.

|-
|| Select '''Sketch''' radio button.
|| To get a clear view of the vectors let us select '''Sketch''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to the interface.
|| Here we can see a 2D view of the force vectors.

|-
|| Click on '''Carousel''' radio button.
|| Click on '''Carousel''' radio button.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Numerical'''

The toy horse suspended to a carousel has a mass of 1.5 kg.

It moves on a circular base with a period of 4 s.

If its distance between the suspension and axis of rotation is 1 m, calculate centripetal force.

|| Let us solve a numerical by varying the parameters in the '''App'''.

Please pause the video and read the numerical.
|-
|| Change and point to show the values.
|| Let us change the values according to the numerical.

|-
|| Make png to show the formula on the interface.

'''Fc<nowiki>= mv</nowiki>2/r'''
|| To calculate the centripetal force we can use the formula :

'''Fc<nowiki>= mv</nowiki>2/r'''

|-
|| Click on '''Numerical values''' radio button.
|| Click on the '''Numerical values''' radio button.

|-
|| Point to show the value of radius and velocity.
|| From here we will take the values of radius and velocity.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now calculate the value of centripetal force.

|-
|| '''Show it on a text-box'''.

'''Fc<nowiki>= mv</nowiki>2/r'''

'''<nowiki>= </nowiki>1.5 x 2.06 x 2.06'''

'''1.31'''

'''<nowiki>= </nowiki>4.85 N'''
|| Substitute the values into the formula.

We get the value of centripetal force as 4.85 '''Newton'''.

|-
|| Point to the values side by side.
|| Observe that the values are comparable.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Assignment'''

The toy horse suspended to a carousel has a mass of 5 kg,

it moves on a circular base with a period of 3 s.

If its distance between the suspension and axis of rotation is 0.5 m,

calculate angular velocity, angular acceleration and centripetal force.
|| As an assignment solve the given numerical.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

* Changed the position, velocity, acceleration and force with time.

* Calculated angular velocity and angular acceleration.

* Calculated centripetal force.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps were created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These '''Apps''' were created by '''Walter-fendt''' and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project'''.

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''.

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more information, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly.

Someone from our team will answer them.
|| Please post your timed queries on this forum.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Forces/English

2020-06-05T06:26:13Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''
'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Forces'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''

|| In this tutorial we will,

Find the resultant of forces using addition of vectors.

Achieve an equilibrium condition using parallelogram of forces.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''
'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,
*'''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04

*'''Firefox Web Browser''' version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''
'''Pre-requities'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''
Link for Apps on physics simulation
'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps'''.
'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|-
|| Point to the file in the '''Downloads''' folder.
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
||'''Slide Number 6'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
||In this tutorial we will use,

'''Resultant of Forces''' and
'''Equilibrium of Three Forces Apps'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''resultant_en.htm''' file.
Select option '''Open With Firefox Web''' Browser option.
|| Right click on '''resultant_en.htm '''file.

Select the option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.

'''Resultant of Forces App''' opens.

You can open the '''App''' using any other '''browser'''.
|-
|| Point to the interface.
|| This is the interface of '''Resultant of Forces'''.
|-
|| Point to the vectors.
|| By default, '''App''' shows two vectors drawn from a fixed point.
|-
|| Click and drag the vectors and show the changes in magnitude and directions.
|| We can click and drag the vectors to change their magnitude and direction.
|-
|| Point to '''Number of forces.'''
|| In the green control panel there is a drop-down to change the '''Number of forces'''.
|-
|| Click on the drop down.
|| From the drop-down we can change the values from 2 to 5.

By default 2 is selected.
|-
|| Click on '''Find out resultant''' button.
|| Click on '''Find out resultant''' button.
|-
|| Point to the blue vector that shifts parallel in the right upward direction.
|| Notice that the second vector translates parallel to itself.

It is attached to the head of the first vector.
|-
|| Point to head to tail position.
|| Vectors are add using head to tail method.
|-
|| Point to the red vector.
Point to show the formation of resultant.
|| Observe that the red vector, is the resultant vector formed by addition of two vectors.

It is drawn from the point of contact to the head of the second vector.

Addition of vectors follow triangle law of vectors.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''
'''Triangle Law of Vector Addition'''

It states that, when two vectors are represented by two sides of a triangle with same magnitude

and direction then the third side represents the resultant of vectors.
|| Let us state triangle law of vector addition.
It states that,
*when two vectors are represented by two sides of a triangle with same magnitude and direction
*then the third side represents the resultant of vectors.
|-
|| Click on '''Clear construction'''.
|| Click on '''Clear construction''' button to clear the resultant force.
|-
|| Click on the drop down list and select 5.
|| From '''Number of forces '''drop-down select 5.
|-
|| Click, drag and show the change in magnitude and direction.
Drag the to show equal magnitude.
|| Click and drag the vectors to change their magnitude and direction.

Adjust the vectors to get equal magnitude for all vectors.
|-
|| Click on '''Find out resultant'''.
|| Then click on '''Find out resultant''' button.
|-
|| Point to the vector as they join to other vectors.
|| Notice that each vector will get attached to the head of the previous vector.

The resultant is drawn, as its tail is joined to the tail of first vector and head to the head of last vector.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This represents polygon law of vector addition.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''
'''Assignment'''

*Change the number of forces to 3 and 4.

*In each case, change the magnitude and direction.

*Observe the resultant vectors and explain your observation.
|| As an assignment
* Change the number of forces to 3 and 4.

* In each case, change the magnitude and direction.

* Observe the resultant vectors and explain your observation.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now let us explore '''Equilibrium of Three Forces'''.
|-
|| To open the simulation right-click on '''equilibriumforces_en.htm''' file

and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| To open the '''App''' right-click on '''equilibriumforces_en.htm''' file.

And '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|-
|| Point to the interface.
|| This is the interface of '''Equilibrium of Three Forces'''.

Below the name a short description about how to use interface is given.
|-
|| Point to the hanging weights.
|| The hanging weights represent the forces acting on the knot.
|-
|| Point to the''' Forces''' in the green Panel.
Point to the knot.
|| The green panel shows '''Left''', '''Right''' and '''Below''' forces.

These forces are acting on the knot to achieve an equilibrium condition.
|-
|| Highlight the sentence from the simulation.
Point to the forces.
|| Notice that each force must be smaller than the sum of other two forces.
|-
|| Point to the '''Angles''' in the green control panel.
|| '''App''' has measured the '''Left''' angle as 30 degrees and '''Right''' side angle as 56 degrees.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''
'''Equilibrium of Forces'''

When all the forces acting on an object are balanced,

then the object is said to be in a state of equilibrium.

Rightward force = Leftward force

upward force = downward force
|| Let us define equilibrium of forces.
When all the forces acting on an object are balanced,

then the object is said to be in a state of equilibrium.
|-
|| Point''' Parallelogram of forces''' check-box.
|| By default '''Parallelogram of forces''' check-box is selected.
|-
|| Uncheck the '''Parallelogram of forces''' check-box.
|| If we uncheck the box, angles formed will not be seen.
|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to get the default view.
|-
|| Change the forces to 6, 4 and 8.
|| Let us change the forces to 6 '''newton''', 4 '''newton''', and 8 '''newton'''.
|-
||6< 8+4

8< 6 + 4

4< 6 + 8
|| Note that 6 is smaller than the sum of 8 and 4.

And note that 4 is smaller than the sum of 6 and 8.

Similarly 8 is smaller than the sum of 6 and 4.
|-
|| Point to above text box.
|| This satisfies the above balance condition.
|-
|| Drag the pulley and show the movements.
|| We can change the position of the pulleys using the mouse.
|-
|| Change the value of '''Forces''' of '''Left''',''' Right''' and '''Below '''to 4N.
|| Choose 4 newton for''' Left, Right''' and '''Below''' forces.
|-
|| Point to the angles.
|| Notice that for equal forces the '''Angle''' is always 60 '''degrees'''.
|-
|| Press '''F5 '''button of the keyboard to refresh the '''App.'''
|| Use '''F5''' button on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.
|-
|| Edit the values to 7 N in all three forces and point to the angles.
|| Change all the forces to 7 newton and observe the angles.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''
'''Assignment'''

Try different combinations of forces to check the angles and equilibrium conditions.

Give an explanation.
|| As an assignment -
Try different combinations of forces to check the angles and equilibrium conditions.

Give an explanation.
|-
||
|| Let us summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

* Found the resultant of forces using addition of vectors.

* Achieved an equilibrium condition using parallelogram of forces.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''
'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps were created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These '''Apps '''were created by '''Walter-fendt''' and his team.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.
Please download and watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''
'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' team,
conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''
'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?
Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly
Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''
'''Acknowledgements'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.
|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.
Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Forces/English

2020-06-05T06:22:27Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''
'''Title Slide '''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Forces'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''

|| In this tutorial we will,

Find the resultant of forces using addition of vectors.

Achieve an equilibrium condition using parallelogram of forces.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''
'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,
*'''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04

*'''Firefox Web Browser''' version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''
'''Pre-requities'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''
Link for Apps on physics simulation
'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps'''.
'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|-
|| Point to the file in the '''Downloads''' folder.
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
||'''Slide Number 6'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
||In this tutorial we will use,

'''Resultant of Forces''' and
'''Equilibrium of Three Forces Apps'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''resultant_en.htm''' file.
Select option '''Open With Firefox Web''' Browser option.
|| Right click on '''resultant_en.htm '''file.

Select the option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.

'''Resultant of Forces App''' opens.

You can open the '''App''' using any other '''browser'''.
|-
|| Point to the interface.
|| This is the interface of '''Resultant of Forces'''.
|-
|| Point to the vectors.
|| By default, '''App''' shows two vectors drawn from a fixed point.
|-
|| Click and drag the vectors and show the changes in magnitude and directions.
|| We can click and drag the vectors to change their magnitude and direction.
|-
|| Point to '''Number of forces.'''
|| In the green control panel there is a drop-down to change the '''Number of forces'''.
|-
|| Click on the drop down.
|| From the drop-down we can change the values from 2 to 5.

By default 2 is selected.
|-
|| Click on '''Find out resultant''' button.
|| Click on '''Find out resultant''' button.
|-
|| Point to the blue vector that shifts parallel in the right upward direction.
|| Notice that the second vector translates parallel to itself.

It is attached to the head of the first vector.
|-
|| Point to head to tail position.
|| Vectors are add using head to tail method.
|-
|| Point to the red vector.
Point to show the formation of resultant.
|| Observe that the red vector, is the resultant vector formed by addition of two vectors.

It is drawn from the point of contact to the head of the second vector.

Addition of vectors follow triangle law of vectors.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''
'''Triangle Law of Vector Addition'''

It states that, when two vectors are represented by two sides of a triangle with same magnitude

and direction then the third side represents the resultant of vectors.
|| Let us state triangle law of vector addition.
It states that,
*when two vectors are represented by two sides of a triangle with same magnitude and direction
*then the third side represents the resultant of vectors.
|-
|| Click on '''Clear construction'''.
|| Click on '''Clear construction''' button to clear the resultant force.
|-
|| Click on the drop down list and select 5.
|| From '''Number of forces '''drop-down select 5.
|-
|| Click, drag and show the change in magnitude and direction.
Drag the to show equal magnitude.
|| Click and drag the vectors to change their magnitude and direction.

Adjust the vectors to get equal magnitude for all vectors.
|-
|| Click on '''Find out resultant'''.
|| Then click on '''Find out resultant''' button.
|-
|| Point to the vector as they join to other vectors.
|| Notice that each vector will get attached to the head of the previous vector.

The resultant is drawn, as its tail is joined to the tail of first vector and head to the head of last vector.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This represents polygon law of vector addition.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''
'''Assignment'''

*Change the number of forces to 3 and 4.

*In each case, change the magnitude and direction.

*Observe the resultant vectors and explain your observation.
|| As an assignment
* Change the number of forces to 3 and 4.

* In each case, change the magnitude and direction.

* Observe the resultant vectors and explain your observation.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now let us explore '''Equilibrium of Three Forces'''.
|-
|| To open the simulation right-click on '''equilibriumforces_en.htm''' file

and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| To open the '''App''' right-click on '''equilibriumforces_en.htm''' file.

And '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|-
|| Point to the interface.
|| This is the interface of '''Equilibrium of Three Forces'''.

Below the name a short description about how to use interface is given.
|-
|| Point to the hanging weights.
|| The hanging weights represent the forces acting on the knot.
|-
|| Point to the''' Forces''' in the green Panel.
Point to the knot.
|| The green panel shows '''Left''', '''Right''' and '''Below''' forces.

These forces are acting on the knot to achieve an equilibrium condition.
|-
|| Highlight the sentence from the simulation.
Point to the forces.
|| Notice that each force must be smaller than the sum of other two forces.
|-
|| Point to the '''Angles''' in the green control panel.
|| '''App''' has measured the '''Left''' angle as 30 degrees and '''Right''' side angle as 56 degrees.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''
'''Equilibrium of Forces'''

When all the forces acting on an object are balanced,

then the object is said to be in a state of equilibrium.

Rightward force = Leftward force

upward force = downward force
|| Let us define equilibrium of forces.
When all the forces acting on an object are balanced,

then the object is said to be in a state of equilibrium.
|-
|| Point''' Parallelogram of forces''' check-box.
|| By default '''Parallelogram of forces''' check-box is selected.
|-
|| Uncheck the '''Parallelogram of forces''' check-box.
|| If we uncheck the box, angles formed will not be seen.
|-
|| Press F5 key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to get the default view.
|-
|| Change the forces to 6, 4 and 8.
|| Let us change the forces to 6 '''newton''', 4 '''newton''', and 8 '''newton'''.
|-
||6< 8+4

8< 6 + 4

4< 6 + 8
|| Note that 6 is smaller than the sum of 8 and 4.

And note that 4 is smaller than the sum of 6 and 8.

Similarly 8 is smaller than the sum of 6 and 4.
|-
|| Point to above text box.
|| This satisfies the above balance condition.
|-
|| Drag the pulley and show the movements.
|| We can change the position of the pulleys using the mouse.
|-
|| Change the value of '''Forces''' of '''Left''',''' Right''' and '''Below '''to 4N.
|| Choose 4 newton for''' Left, Right''' and '''Below''' forces.
|-
|| Point to the angles.
|| Notice that for equal forces the '''Angle''' is always 60 '''degrees'''.
|-
|| Press '''F5 '''button of the keyboard to refresh the '''App.'''
|| Use '''F5''' button on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.
|-
|| Edit the values to 7 N in all three forces and point to the angles.
|| Change all the forces to 7 newton and observe the angles.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''
'''Assignment'''

Try different combinations of forces to check the angles and equilibrium conditions.

Give an explanation.
|| As an assignment -
Try different combinations of forces to check the angles and equilibrium conditions.

Give an explanation.
|-
||
|| Let us summarize.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

* Found the resultant of forces using addition of vectors.

* Achieved an equilibrium condition using parallelogram of forces.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''
'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps were created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These '''Apps '''were created by '''Walter-fendt''' and his team.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.
Please download and watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''
'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project''' team,
conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''
'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?
Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly
Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''
'''Acknowledgements'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.
|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.
Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Linear-Motion/English

2020-06-05T06:14:33Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-

|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Linear Motion'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning objectives'''
|| In this tutorial we will,

Verify Newton's first law of motion using constant acceleration simulation.

Calculate position and velocity of a car using equations of motion.

Verify Newton's second law of motion using air track glider simulation.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 16.04.
* '''Firefox Web Browser''' version 62.0.3.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial,

learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

Link for '''Apps on physics'''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''

|| Use the given link to download the ''' App'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the '''Downloads''' folder.
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''
'''Apps on Physics'''

||In this tutorial we will use,

* '''Motion with constant Acceleration''' and
* '''Newton's Second Law Experiment Apps'''

|-
|| Click on the '''phen''' folder.

Press '''Ctrl''' and '''F''' keys simultaneously.
||Double-click on '''html5phen''' folder.
Double-click on the '''phen''' folder.

To open '''Motion with Constant Acceleration''', press '''Ctrl''' + '''F''' keys simultaneously.
|-
|| Type '''acceleration''' in the search bar.
|| In the search bar type '''acceleration'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''acceleration_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''option.
|| Right click on '''acceleration_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| '''Motion with constant Acceleration App''' opens in the browser.
|-
|| Point to the interface.
|| Interface has two panels.
|-
|| Point to the text fields in the green panel

'''Initial position'''

'''Initial velocity '''

and '''Acceleration'''.
|| Green control panel contains text fields.

Here we can edit

* '''Initial position '''
* '''Initial velocity''' and
* '''Acceleration'''.
|-
|| Point to the radio buttons.

'''Show velocity vector''' and

'''Show acceleration vector'''.
|| At the bottom of the green panel there are two radio buttons.

* '''Show velocity vector''' and
* '''Show acceleration vector'''.

By default '''Show velocity vector''' is selected.
|-
|| Point to the three digital clocks.
|| On the yellow panel we have three digital clocks.

They show the elapsed time.
|-
|| Point to the barriers.
|| Here we can see a green and red colored barriers.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Click on '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Click the '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|-
|| Point to the car.

|| Observe that a car starts to move with a constant acceleration.
|-
|| Point to '''Acceleration'''.
|| The default value for '''Acceleration''' is

1 '''m/s2''' (meter per second square).
|-
|| Point to the green barrier and clock.
|| When the car crosses the green barrier with its front bumper, green digital clock stops.
|-
|| Point to red digital clock.
|| Similarly when the car crosses the red barrier, the red digital clock stops.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show that car has moved out of screen.
|| Notice that car has moved out of the screen, but it is still in motion.
|-
|| Point to the grey digital clock.
|| This is indicated by grey digital clock.

This clock shows the instantaneous time of the moving car.
|-
|| At the bottom point to '''x''' and '''v''' values.
|| Observe that, the values of '''x''' and '''v''' are changing continuously.

It means that the car is in uniform motion.

And it will continue to be in motion until an external force is applied.

This is due to '''Newton's first law of motion'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Pause''' button >> uncheck '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button and uncheck the '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|-
|| Point to the '''Pause''' button.
|| Let’s assume that by clicking '''Pause''' button we have applied an external force on the car.
|-
|| Point to the grey digital clock.
|| Notice that the grey digital clock has stopped.

It means that car has stopped moving.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Change the '''Initial position''' to 5 '''m''' >> press '''Enter'''.
|| Let's change the '''Initial position''' to 5 '''m ''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Change the '''Initial velocity''' to 5 '''m/s'''.
|| Change the '''Initial velocity''' to 5 '''m/s''' ('''meter per second''') and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Edit the value of '''Acceleration''' to 2 '''m/s2'''.
|| And value of '''Acceleration''' to 2 '''m/s2''' ('''meter per second square)''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show the change in the '''Position''' from 0 to 5 '''m'''.
|| Observe the '''Position v/s time''' and '''Velocity v/s time''' graphs.

The red point in the '''Position v/s time''' graph has shifted from 0 '''m''' to 5 '''m'''.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show the change in the
'''Velocity''' from 0 to 5 '''m/s'''.
|| The pink point in the '''Velocity v/s time''' graph has shifted from 0 '''m/s''' to 5 '''m/s'''.
|-
|| Point the blue point in '''Acceleration v/s time''' graph.
|| Notice the shift in blue point in '''Acceleration v/s time''' graph.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Click on '''Pause''' button when it reaches the red barrier.
|| And then click on the '''Pause''' button when car touches the red barrier.
|-
|| Point to pink color vector.
|| Observe that the pink colored vector shows the direction of velocity.
|-
|| Point to each graph.
|| Now let us study the variations in each graph.
|-
|| Point to '''Acceleration v/s time''' graph.

Move the cursor to show the straight line.

Point to the time axis of acceleration.
|| Observe the '''Acceleration v/s time''' graph.

It shows a straight line parallel to the time axis.

As time changes acceleration remains constant.
|-
|| Point to '''Velocity v/s time''' graph

point to the pink line.

|| Observe the '''Velocity v/s time''' graph.

Note that velocity increases linearly with time.

|-
|| Point to '''Position v/s time''' graph.
|| Look at the '''Position v/s time''' graph.

This graph is exponentially increasing, due to the change in '''position''' and '''velocity''' of the car.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the values of '''position''' and '''velocity''' using equations of motion.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Equations of Motion'''

'''v = v0 + at '''

'''x = x0 + v0 t + 1/2at2 '''

'''v2 = v02 + 2 a (x − x0)'''

'''v0 '''and '''v''' are the initial and final velocities.

'''x0''' and '''x''' are the initial and final positions.

|| Here are the '''Equations of motion'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Tabular column'''.
|| We will note the measured and calculated values in the table.
|-
|| Point to red and green barrier.
|| Next we will use both green and red barrier to measure position and velocity.
|-
|| Click >> drag the green barrier to 15 '''m'''.
|| Click and drag the green barrier to 15 '''m'''.
|-
|| Drag the red barrier to 40 '''m'''.
|| Similarly drag the red barrier to 40 '''m'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Start''' button >> '''Pause''' when it touches the green barrier.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button and then '''Pause''' when it touches the green barrier.
|-
|| Point to position and velocity values.
|| Note that the '''App''' has measured the values of position and velocity.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Equations of Motion'''

'''v = v0 + at'''

'''<nowiki>= 5 + 2 * 1.531</nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>=8.06 m/s</nowiki>'''

|| Let us calculate velocity using the first equation of motion.

Substitute the values of acceleration, time and initial velocity shown in the '''App''' in the equation.

8.06 '''m/s''' is the calculated value of the velocity.
|-
|| '''x = x0 + v0 t + 1/2at2'''

'''<nowiki>= 5 + 5 * 1.531 + 1/2 * 2 * (1.531)</nowiki>2'''

'''<nowiki>= </nowiki>14.99 m'''.
|| Let us calculate the '''position''' using the second equation of motion.

Similarly substitute the values shown in the '''App'''.

14.99 '''m''' is the calculated value of the position.
|-
|| Point to the value of position in the '''App'''.
|| Observe that the values of position and velocity are approximately equal to the measured values.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Note the calculated and measured values in the table.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Assignment'''

Measure the position and velocity when the car reaches the red barrier.

Calculate the values using Equations of motion.

Complete the table and compare your answers.
|| As an assignment

* Measure the '''position''' and '''velocity''' when the car reaches the red barrier.
* Calculate the values using '''Equations of motion'''.
* Complete the table and compare your answers with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will explore the next '''App'''.
|-
|| Open '''Newton's Second Law Experiment App'''.

Right click on the '''newtonlaw2_en.htm''' file and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| To open '''Newton's Second Law Experiment App'''.

Right click on the '''newtonlaw2_en.htm''' file and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Using this '''App''' we will verify the '''Newton's second law'''.
|-
|| Point to air track glider setup.
|| The '''App''' opens with air track glider setup.
|-
|| Point to blue wagon.
|| The screen shows a wagon on the air track.
|-
|| Point to show the digital clock.

Point to '''LB '''.
|| Here digital clock is used to record the time when wagon crosses the '''LB'''.

'''LB '''is the light barrier.
|-
|| Point to graph.
|| The graph records '''position''' v/s '''time''' data.
|-
|| In green control panel we can vary

'''Mass of the wagon'''

'''Hanging mass'''and

'''Coefficient of friction'''.
|| In the green control panel we can vary

* '''Mass of the wagon '''
* '''Hanging mass '''and
* '''Coefficient of friction'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Mass of the wagon'''.
|| The default '''Mass of the wagon''' is 100 '''g'''.

It can take values from 1 g to 1000 g
|-
|| Scroll down to show the '''Underlying formulas'''.
|| Scroll down the screen.

Here we have the formula used in this experiment.

By default, '''motion with constant acceleration''' is used in the '''App'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Start/Record Data''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.

This button is a toggle for '''Start''' and '''Record data'''.
|-
|| Point to the hanging mass.

Point to the value of '''Mass of the wagon''' and '''Hanging mass''' in the green panel.
|| Observe that the hanging mass pulls the wagon downwards.

Default value of the '''Hanging mass''' is 1 '''gram''', it takes values from 1 '''gram''' to 100 '''grams'''.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show digital clock
|| Here digital clock notes the time when the wagon crosses the '''LB'''.

The distance from the start to '''LB''' is shown as 0.5 '''meter'''.
|-
|| Point to the formula of acceleration.
|| The '''App''' has calculated the acceleration using the formula '''2s/t2'''(2s upon t square).

The calculated value of acceleration is 0.097 '''m/s2'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Click >> drag the '''LB''' to the left on second black rectangle.
|| Click and drag the '''LB '''to the left on second black rectangle.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to show the value of acceleration.
|| Notice that here also the value of acceleration is 0.097 '''m/s2'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Record''' button.

At the bottom of green control panel point to '''Data''' box.
|| Click on the '''Record data''' button.

The values are recorded in the '''Data''' box.
|-
|| Point to show inactive '''Diagram''' button.

Move the cursor to '''Data'''.
|| Observe that the '''Diagram''' button is inactive.

It becomes active when at least four values are recorded in the '''Data''' box.
|-
|| Click >> drag the '''LB''' to second green rectangle.
|| Again click and drag the '''LB''' to second green rectangle.
|-
|| Click on the '''Start''' button >> click on '''Record data''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button and then click on '''Record data''' button.
|-
|| Take four more readings.
|| Similarly take four more readings for distance and time and record in the '''Data''' box.
|-
|| Scroll down the '''Data''' to show the readings.
|| In the '''Data''' box, readings of six different distances have been recorded.
|-
|| Point to show the plotted points in the graph.
|| Observe the plotted points for position and time in the graph.
|-
|| Point to the '''Diagram''' button.

Click on the '''Diagram''' button.
|| '''Diagram''' button is now active.

Click on the '''Diagram''' button to plot the graph.
|-
|| Point to show the line.
|| An exponential graph appears on the screen.
|-
|| Point the acceleration and distances.
|| Notice that, acceleration remains same for all the distances.

It means that change in distance does not change the acceleration.
|-
|| Point to wagon.
|| According to '''Newton's second law''' the '''acceleration''' depends on the mass of the wagon.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Change the '''Mass of the wagon''' to 300 '''g'''.
|| Now change the '''Mass of the wagon''' to 300 '''g'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to show the value of acceleration.
|| Notice the change in the acceleration.

The value of acceleration has changed to 0.033 '''m/s2'''.
|-
||Click on '''Reset''' button.
||Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Change the value of '''Hanging mass''' to 4 '''g'''.
|| Now let us change the value of '''Hanging mass''' to 4 '''g'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to show the value of acceleration.

Point to underlying formula.
|| Notice the change in the acceleration.
The value of acceleration has changed to 0.129 '''m/s2'''.

Recall that acceleration depends on mass of the wagon and the hanging mass.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 12 '''

'''Tabular Column'''
|| Let us make a tabular column to note the values.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the values of mass of the wagon and note the changes in acceleration.

For each value of mass of the wagon change the value of Hanging mass.

Observe the difference in the acceleration.
||As an assignment

Change the values of mass of the wagon and note the changes in acceleration.

For each value of mass of the wagon change the value of the Hanging mass.

Observe the difference in the acceleration.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Tabular column'''

Show the glimpse of the completed assignment.
|| Your completed assignment should look like this.

|-
||
|| Let us summarize

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Summary'''

|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

* Verified Newton's first law of motion using constant acceleration simulation.

* Calculated position and velocity of a car using equations of motion.

* Verified Newton's second law of motion using air track glider simulation.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These '''Apps''' were created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|| These '''Apps''' were created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial project'''.

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''.

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries on this forum.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by, MHRD, Government of India.
|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.
Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Linear-Motion/English

2020-06-05T06:08:49Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-

|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Linear Motion'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning objectives'''
|| In this tutorial we will,

Verify Newtons first law of motion using constant acceleration simulation.

Calculate position and velocity of a car using equations of motion.

Verify Newton's second law of motion using air track glider simulation.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,
* '''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 16.04.
* '''Firefox Web Browser''' version 62.0.3.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requities'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial,

learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

Link for '''Apps on physics'''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''

|| Use the given link to download the ''' App'''.

|-
|| Point to the file in the '''Downloads''' folder.
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics''' to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''
'''Apps on Physics'''

||In this tutorial we will use,

* '''Motion with constant Acceleration''' and
* '''Newton's Second Law Experiment Apps'''

|-
|| Click on the '''phen''' folder.

Press '''Ctrl''' and '''F''' keys simultaneously.
||Double-click on '''html5phen''' folder.
Double-click on the '''phen''' folder.

To open '''Motion with Constant Acceleration''', press '''Ctrl''' + '''F''' keys simultaneously.
|-
|| Type '''acceleration''' in the search bar.
|| In the search bar type '''acceleration'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''acceleration_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''option.
|| Right click on '''acceleration_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| '''Motion with constant Acceleration App''' opens in the browser.
|-
|| Point to the interface.
|| Interface has two panels.
|-
|| Point to the text fields in the green panel

'''Initial position'''

'''Initial velocity '''

and '''Acceleration'''.
|| Green control panel contains text fields.

Here we can edit

* '''Initial position '''
* '''Initial velocity''' and
* '''Acceleration'''.
|-
|| Point to the radio buttons.

'''Show velocity vector''' and

'''Show acceleration vector'''.
|| At the bottom of the green panel there are two radio buttons.

* '''Show velocity vector''' and
* '''Show acceleration vector'''.

By default '''Show velocity vector''' is selected.
|-
|| Point to the three digital clocks.
|| On the yellow panel we have three digital clocks.

They show the elapsed time.
|-
|| Point to the barriers.
|| Here we can see a green and red colored barriers.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Click on '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Click the '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|-
|| Point to the car.

|| Observe that a car starts to move with a constant acceleration.
|-
|| Point to '''Acceleration'''.
|| The default value for '''Acceleration''' is

1 '''m/s2''' (meter per second square).
|-
|| Point to the green barrier and clock.
|| When the car crosses the green barrier with its front bumper, green digital clock stops.
|-
|| Point to red digital clock.
|| Similarly when the car crosses the red barrier, the red digital clock stops.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show that car has moved out of screen.
|| Notice that car has moved out of the screen, but it is still in motion.
|-
|| Point to the grey digital clock.
|| This is indicated by grey digital clock.

This clock shows the instantaneous time of the moving car.
|-
|| At the bottom point to '''x''' and '''v''' values.
|| Observe that, the values of '''x''' and '''v''' are changing continuously.

It means that the car is in uniform motion.

And it will continue to be in motion until an external force is applied.

This is due to '''Newton's first law of motion'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Pause''' button >> uncheck '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button and uncheck the '''Slow motion''' check-box.
|-
|| Point to the '''Pause''' button.
|| Let’s assume that by clicking '''Pause''' button we have applied an external force on the car.
|-
|| Point to the grey digital clock.
|| Notice that the grey digital clock has stopped.

It means that car has stopped moving.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Change the '''Initial position''' to 5 '''m''' >> press '''Enter'''.
|| Let's change the '''Initial position''' to 5 '''m ''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Change the '''Initial velocity''' to 5 '''m/s'''.
|| Change the '''Initial velocity''' to 5 '''m/s''' ('''meter per second''') and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Edit the value of '''Acceleration''' to 2 '''m/s2'''.
|| And value of '''Acceleration''' to 2 '''m/s2''' ('''meter per second square)''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show the change in the '''Position''' from 0 to 5 '''m'''.
|| Observe the '''Position v/s time''' and '''Velocity v/s time''' graphs.

The red point in the '''Position v/s time''' graph has shifted from 0 '''m''' to 5 '''m'''.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show the change in the
'''Velocity''' from 0 to 5 '''m/s'''.
|| The pink point in the '''Velocity v/s time''' graph has shifted from 0 '''m/s''' to 5 '''m/s'''.
|-
|| Point the blue point in '''Acceleration v/s time''' graph.
|| Notice the shift in blue point in '''Acceleration v/s time''' graph.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Click on '''Pause''' button when it reaches the red barrier.
|| And then click on the '''Pause''' button when car touches the red barrier.
|-
|| Point to pink color vector.
|| Observe that the pink colored vector shows the direction of velocity.
|-
|| Point to each graph.
|| Now let us study the variations in each graph.
|-
|| Point to '''Acceleration v/s time''' graph.

Move the cursor to show the straight line.

Point to the time axis of acceleration.
|| Observe the '''Acceleration v/s time''' graph.

It shows a straight line parallel to the time axis.

As time changes acceleration remains constant.
|-
|| Point to '''Velocity v/s time''' graph

point to the pink line.

|| Observe the '''Velocity v/s time''' graph.

Note that velocity increases linearly with time.

|-
|| Point to '''Position v/s time''' graph.
|| Look at the '''Position v/s time''' graph.

This graph is exponentially increasing, due to the change in '''position''' and '''velocity''' of the car.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us verify the values of '''position''' and '''velocity''' using equations of motion.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Equations of Motion'''

'''v = v0 + at '''

'''x = x0 + v0 t + 1/2at2 '''

'''v2 = v02 + 2 a (x − x0)'''

'''v0 '''and '''v''' are the initial and final velocities.

'''x0''' and '''x''' are the initial and final positions.

|| Here are the '''Equations of motion'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Tabular column'''.
|| We will note the measured and calculated values in the table.
|-
|| Point to red and green barrier.
|| Next we will use both green and red barrier to measure position and velocity.
|-
|| Click >> drag the green barrier to 15 '''m'''.
|| Click and drag the green barrier to 15 '''m'''.
|-
|| Drag the red barrier to 40 '''m'''.
|| Similarly drag the red barrier to 40 '''m'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Start''' button >> '''Pause''' when it touches the green barrier.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button and then '''Pause''' when it touches the green barrier.
|-
|| Point to position and velocity values.
|| Note that the '''App''' has measured the values of position and velocity.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Equations of Motion'''

'''v = v0 + at'''

'''<nowiki>= 5 + 2 * 1.531</nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>=8.06 m/s</nowiki>'''

|| Let us calculate velocity using the first equation of motion.

Substitute the values of acceleration, time and initial velocity shown in the '''App''' in the equation.

8.06 '''m/s''' is the calculated value of the velocity.
|-
|| '''x = x0 + v0 t + 1/2at2'''

'''<nowiki>= 5 + 5 * 1.531 + 1/2 * 2 * (1.531)</nowiki>2'''

'''<nowiki>= </nowiki>14.99 m'''.
|| Let us calculate the '''position''' using the second equation of motion.

Similarly substitute the values shown in the '''App'''.

14.99 '''m''' is the calculated value of the position.
|-
|| Point to the value of position in the '''App'''.
|| Observe that the values of position and velocity are approximately equal to the measured values.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Note the calculated and measured values in the table.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Assignment'''

Measure the position and velocity when the car reaches the red barrier.

Calculate the values using Equations of motion.

Complete the table and compare your answers.
|| As an assignment

* Measure the '''position''' and '''velocity''' when the car reaches the red barrier.
* Calculate the values using '''Equations of motion'''.
* Complete the table and compare your answers with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will explore the next '''App'''.
|-
|| Open '''Newton's Second Law Experiment App'''.

Right click on the '''newtonlaw2_en.htm''' file and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| To open '''Newton's Second Law Experiment App'''.

Right click on the '''newtonlaw2_en.htm''' file and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Using this '''App''' we will verify the '''Newton's second law'''.
|-
|| Point to air track glider setup.
|| The '''App''' opens with air track glider setup.
|-
|| Point to blue wagon.
|| The screen shows a wagon on the air track.
|-
|| Point to show the digital clock.

Point to '''LB '''.
|| Here digital clock is used to record the time when wagon crosses the '''LB'''.

'''LB '''is the light barrier.
|-
|| Point to graph.
|| The graph records '''position''' v/s '''time''' data.
|-
|| In green control panel we can vary

'''Mass of the wagon'''

'''Hanging mass'''and

'''Coefficient of friction'''.
|| In the green control panel we can vary

* '''Mass of the wagon '''
* '''Hanging mass '''and
* '''Coefficient of friction'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Mass of the wagon'''.
|| The default '''Mass of the wagon''' is 100 '''g'''.

It can take values from 1 g to 1000 g
|-
|| Scroll down to show the '''Underlying formulas'''.
|| Scroll down the screen.

Here we have the formula used in this experiment.

By default, '''motion with constant acceleration''' is used in the '''App'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Start/Record Data''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.

This button is a toggle for '''Start''' and '''Record data'''.
|-
|| Point to the hanging mass.

Point to the value of '''Mass of the wagon''' and '''Hanging mass''' in the green panel.
|| Observe that the hanging mass pulls the wagon downwards.

Default value of the '''Hanging mass''' is 1 '''gram''', it takes values from 1 '''gram''' to 100 '''grams'''.
|-
|| Move the cursor to show digital clock
|| Here digital clock notes the time when the wagon crosses the '''LB'''.

The distance from the start to '''LB''' is shown as 0.5 '''meter'''.
|-
|| Point to the formula of acceleration.
|| The '''App''' has calculated the acceleration using the formula '''2s/t2'''(2s upon t square).

The calculated value of acceleration is 0.097 '''m/s2'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Click >> drag the '''LB''' to the left on second black rectangle.
|| Click and drag the '''LB '''to the left on second black rectangle.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to show the value of acceleration.
|| Notice that here also the value of acceleration is 0.097 '''m/s2'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Record''' button.

At the bottom of green control panel point to '''Data''' box.
|| Click on the '''Record data''' button.

The values are recorded in the '''Data''' box.
|-
|| Point to show inactive '''Diagram''' button.

Move the cursor to '''Data'''.
|| Observe that the '''Diagram''' button is inactive.

It becomes active when at least four values are recorded in the '''Data''' box.
|-
|| Click >> drag the '''LB''' to second green rectangle.
|| Again click and drag the '''LB''' to second green rectangle.
|-
|| Click on the '''Start''' button >> click on '''Record data''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button and then click on '''Record data''' button.
|-
|| Take four more readings.
|| Similarly take four more readings for distance and time and record in the '''Data''' box.
|-
|| Scroll down the '''Data''' to show the readings.
|| In the '''Data''' box, readings of six different distances have been recorded.
|-
|| Point to show the plotted points in the graph.
|| Observe the plotted points for position and time in the graph.
|-
|| Point to the '''Diagram''' button.

Click on the '''Diagram''' button.
|| '''Diagram''' button is now active.

Click on the '''Diagram''' button to plot the graph.
|-
|| Point to show the line.
|| An exponential graph appears on the screen.
|-
|| Point the acceleration and distances.
|| Notice that, acceleration remains same for all the distances.

It means that change in distance does not change the acceleration.
|-
|| Point to wagon.
|| According to '''Newton's second law''' the '''acceleration''' depends on the mass of the wagon.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Change the '''Mass of the wagon''' to 300 '''g'''.
|| Now change the '''Mass of the wagon''' to 300 '''g'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to show the value of acceleration.
|| Notice the change in the acceleration.

The value of acceleration has changed to 0.033 '''m/s2'''.
|-
||Click on '''Reset''' button.
||Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Change the value of '''Hanging mass''' to 4 '''g'''.
|| Now let us change the value of '''Hanging mass''' to 4 '''g'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to show the value of acceleration.

Point to underlying formula.
|| Notice the change in the acceleration.
The value of acceleration has changed to 0.129 '''m/s2'''.

Recall that acceleration depends on mass of the wagon and the hanging mass.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 11 '''

'''Tabular Column'''
|| Let us make a tabular column to note the values.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the values of mass of the wagon and note the changes in acceleration.

For each value of mass of the wagon change the value of Hanging mass.

Observe the difference in the acceleration.
||As an assignment

Change the values of mass of the wagon and note the changes in acceleration.

For each value of mass of the wagon change the value of the Hanging mass.

Observe the difference in the acceleration.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Tabular column'''

Show the glimpse of the completed assignment.
|| Your completed assignment should look like this.
|-
||
|| Let us summarize
|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Summary'''

* Demonstrated motion of a car with constant acceleration.
* Explained '''position''', '''velocity''' and '''acceleration''' graphs.
* Calculated the '''position''' and '''velocity''' of a car using '''equation of motion'''.

|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

* Demonstrated motion of a car with constant acceleration.
* Explained '''position, velocity''' and '''acceleration''' graphs.
* Calculated the '''position''' and '''velocity''' of a car using '''equation of motion'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Summary'''

* Verified Newtons first law of motion using constant acceleration simulation.

* Calculated position and velocity of a car using equations of motion.

* Verified Newton's second law of motion using air track glider simulation.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These '''Apps''' were created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|| These '''Apps''' were created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial project'''.

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''.

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them
|| Please post your timed queries on this forum.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by, MHRD, Government of India.
|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.
Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Inclined-Plane/English

2020-06-05T05:51:30Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Inclined Plane'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objectives'''
|| In this tutorial we will learn to,

Simulate the motion of a load on an inclined plane.

Resolve the vector components using basic trigonometry.

Calculate the vector components.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

*'''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04
*'''Firefox Web Browser''' version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Inclined Plane'''
|| Let us define an inclined plane.
An '''inclined plane''', is a flat supporting surface tilted at an angle.

It has one end higher than the other.

It is used for raising or lowering a load.

Use of an inclined plane provides greater mechanical advantage.

Examples of an inclined plane are ramps, slides, stairs, water slides and others.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

Link for Apps on physics '''App'''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''

|| Use the given link to download the''' Apps.'''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
||In this tutorial we will use,

'''Inclined Plane App'''.

|-
|| Point to '''html5phen''' folder in the '''Downloads''' folder.
|| After downloading, '''html5phen''' folder appears in the '''Downloads''' folder.
|-
||Double click on '''html5phen''' folder.
||Double click on '''html5phen''' folder.
|-
||Point to '''Apps''' in '''java script''' format and '''htm''' format.
|| Now double-click on the '''phen '''folder.

In this folder, we see '''Apps''' in '''java script''' and '''htm''' format.
|-
|| Point to the '''htm''' formats '''Apps'''.
|| We will use the '''Apps''' with '''htm file''' format.

|-
|| Point to''' Inclined Plane Apps'''.
|| To open '''Inclined Plane''' press '''Ctrl, F''' keys simultaneously.

In the search bar type '''inclined plane'''.
|-
|| Right click on '''inclinedplane_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right click on '''inclinedplane_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''.

'''Inclined Plane App''' opens in the '''browser'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This is the interface of '''Inclined plane'''.
|-
|| Point to green panel.
|| The green panel shows different parameters that we can change.
|-
|| Point to '''Reset '''and '''Start '''button.
|| '''Reset''' button on the top of the green panel helps to edit values.

The yellow '''Start''' button is a '''toggle button''' for '''Start/Pause''' and '''Resume'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''Slow motion.'''
|| '''Slow motion''' check-box is used to observe the motion steadily.

|-
|| Point to '''Springscale''' and '''Force vectors'''
|| Then we have '''Springscale''' and '''Force vectors''' radio buttons.

By default '''Springscale''' is selected.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|-
||Point to the block.
||Notice that a load is pulled by the '''springscale'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|-
|| Click on the radio button of '''Force vectors'''.
|| Now select '''Force vectors radio button'''.
|-
||Point to the arrows.
|| Observe that there are five arrows pointing in different directions.

|-
|| Point to the white box for:

'''Angle of inclination'''

'''Weight'''

'''Coefficient of friction'''.
|| We can change the values of:

'''Angle of inclination''', '''Weight''' and '''Coefficient of friction''' in the white colour boxes.
|-
||Highlight the line from the '''App'''.
||Note that these values can be changed within certain limits.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Show the changes when the values changed to 0 and 90 degrees.

Change the '''Angle of inclination''' to 45 degrees and press '''Enter'''.
|| Here we can change the '''Angle of inclination''' from 0 degrees to 90 degrees.

Let’s change the '''Angle of inclination''' to 45 degrees and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Start'''button.
|| Now click on '''Start''' button.
|-
||Point to the load >> click on '''Pause''' button.
|| When the load reaches the middle of the '''inclined plane '''click on '''Pause''' button.
|-
||Point to the pink vector.
|| Notice that the pink vector shows the force of gravity('''mg''').

It tries to pull the load towards the center of the Earth.
|-
||Point to blue and red vectors.
||The blue and red vectors are the resolution vectors of gravity.
|-
||Point to red vector.
||The red vector is perpendicular to the surface of the '''inclined plane'''.
|-
||Point to blue vector and incline plane.
||The blue vector is parallel to the surface of the '''inclined plane'''.
|-
|| In the incline plane point to each angles.

Sum of the interior angle of a triangle is 180 degrees.
|| If '''theta(θ)''' is 45 degrees, then this angle is 90 degrees.

As it is perpendicular to the surface of the earth.

From the triangle’s geometry this angle would be '''(90-θ)'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Resolution of vectors'''
|| To calculate the magnitude of the forces we need to know '''theta''' value.

Now these two lines are parallel and if we assume that this line is a transversal line.

Then angle '''(90-θ)''' is equal this angle through interior angle property.

Recall that red vector is perpendicular to the inclined plane.

Here the angle would be 90 degrees.

Let us assume this angle as '''x'''.

So 90 minus '''theta''' plus 90 plus '''x''' equals to 180

Therefore, '''x''' equals to '''theta'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Resolution of Vectors'''
|| Using basic trigonometry we can resolve the parallel and perpendicular components.

Consider this right angle triangle.

Here the blue parallel component is equal to the black line.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Resolution of Vector'''
|| Parallel force is '''Sin theta'''.

'''Sin theta''' equals to '''F'''(parallel) upon '''mg'''.

Let’s rearrange the equation.

'''F'''(parallel) equals to '''mg sin theta'''.

Similarly we can resolve the perpendicular component.

'''F'''(perpendicular) equals to '''mg cos theta'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Numerical'''

A mass of 1.02 kg rests on a plane that is inclined at an angle of 30 degrees.

From resolution of vectors find parallel and perpendicular components.

Calculate the necessary force to pull the mass.
|| Let us solve this numerical and verify the answers with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button to reset the '''App'''.
|-
|| 1.02 Kg = 10 N.

Change the weight to 10 N.

|| In the '''App''' change the values according to the numerical.

First let us convert 1.02 '''Kg''' into '''Newton''' and enter the value in the '''Weight''' box.
|-
|| Change the '''Angle of inclination''' to 30 '''degrees''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Next change the '''Angle of inclination''' to 30 '''degrees''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Start '''button.
|| Now click on '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to the load >> click on '''Pause '''button.
|| Again click on '''Pause''' button when the load reaches the center of the inclined plane.
|-
|| Point to '''Normal force''', '''Parallel component''' and '''Necessary force'''.
||Observe that the '''App''' has calculated the parameters.
|-
||
||Next we will calculate using the formulae.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Resolution of Gravity Forces'''

'''F||<nowiki>=mg sin </nowiki>'''θ

<nowiki>= 1.02 </nowiki>x 9.8 x sin 30

<nowiki>= 4.99 N</nowiki>

F⟂'''<nowiki>= mg cos </nowiki>'''θ

<nowiki>= 1.02 </nowiki>x 9.8 x cos 30

<nowiki>= 8.65 N</nowiki>

Necessary force = -F||

|| Calculated value of the parallel component is 4.99 '''N''' and that of normal component is 8.65 '''N'''.

And the necessary force is equal to the parallel force but in the opposite direction.

Let us compare the answers with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
||Point to values of '''Normal force''', '''Parallel component''' and '''Necessary force'''.
||Observe that the calculated values are comparable to the measured values.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
||Let's observe the effect of friction.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Enter 0.2 in the '''Coefficient of friction''' box.
|| In the '''Coefficient of friction''' box type 0.5 and press '''Enter'''.
|-th
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to the load >> click on '''Pause''' button.
|| When the load reaches the middle of the '''inclined plane''' click on '''Pause''' button.
|-
||Move the cursor on the black vector.
||Notice that a black vector is added to the blue vector.

This vector represents '''Force of friction'''.
|-
||Point to Force of friction
|| In the green panel '''Force of friction''' is measured as 4.3 '''N'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Necessary force.'''

Move the cursor on the blue and black vector and then point to green vector.
|| Notice that the '''Necessary force''' required to pull the load has changed to 9.3 '''N'''.

This is because the total necessary force is, sum of parallel and frictional forces.

|-
||'''Slide Number 13'''

'''Assignment '''

A load of 0.612 kg rests on a plane that is inclined at an angle of 60 degrees.

From resolution of vectors find parallel and perpendicular components.

Calculate the necessary force to pull the load.
||As an assignment solve this numerical and compare your answer with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
||
||Let us summarise
|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using this '''App''' we have

* Simulated the motion of a load on an inclined plane.

* Resolve the vector components using basic trigonometry.

* Calculated the vector components.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

||These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project'''.
|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

and gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

|| Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site.

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly someone from our team will answer them.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.
|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Inclined-Plane/English

2020-06-05T05:50:08Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Inclined Plane'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objectives'''
|| In this tutorial we will learn to,

Simulate the motion of a load on an inclined plane.

Resolve the vector components using basic trigonometry.

Calculate the vector components.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

*'''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04
*'''Firefox Web Browser''' version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Inclined Plane'''
|| Let us define an inclined plane.
An '''inclined plane''', is a flat supporting surface tilted at an angle.

It has one end higher than the other.

It is used for raising or lowering a load.

Use of an inclined plane provides greater mechanical advantage.

Examples of an inclined plane are ramps, slides, stairs, water slides and others.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

Link for Apps on physics '''App'''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''

|| Use the given link to download the''' Apps.'''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''
||In this tutorial we will use,

'''Inclined Plane App'''.

|-
|| Point to '''html5phen''' folder in the '''Downloads''' folder.
|| After downloading, '''html5phen''' folder appears in the '''Downloads''' folder.
|-
||Double click on '''html5phen''' folder.
||Double click on '''html5phen''' folder.
|-
||Point to '''Apps''' in '''java script''' format and '''htm''' format.
|| Now double-click on the '''phen '''folder.

In this folder, we see '''Apps''' in '''java script''' and '''htm''' format.
|-
|| Point to the '''htm''' formats '''Apps'''.
|| We will use the '''Apps''' with '''htm file''' format.

|-
|| Point to''' Inclined Plane Apps'''.
|| To open '''Inclined Plane''' press '''Ctrl, F''' keys simultaneously.

In the search bar type '''inclined plane'''.
|-
|| Right click on '''inclinedplane_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right click on '''inclinedplane_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''.

'''Inclined Plane App''' opens in the '''browser'''.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This is the interface of '''Inclined plane'''.
|-
|| Point to green panel.
|| The green panel shows different parameters that we can change.
|-
|| Point to '''Reset '''and '''Start '''button.
|| '''Reset''' button on the top of the green panel helps to edit values.

The yellow '''Start''' button is a '''toggle button''' for '''Start/Pause''' and '''Resume'''.
|-
|| Point to the '''Slow motion.'''
|| '''Slow motion''' check-box is used to observe the motion steadily.

|-
|| Point to '''Springscale''' and '''Force vectors'''
|| Then we have '''Springscale''' and '''Force vectors''' radio buttons.

By default '''Springscale''' is selected.
|-
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|-
||Point to the block.
||Notice that a load is pulled by the '''springscale'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|-
|| Click on the radio button of '''Force vectors'''.
|| Now select '''Force vectors radio button'''.
|-
||Point to the arrows.
|| Observe that there are five arrows pointing in different directions.

|-
|| Point to the white box for:

'''Angle of inclination'''

'''Weight'''

'''Coefficient of friction'''.
|| We can change the values of:

'''Angle of inclination''', '''Weight''' and '''Coefficient of friction''' in the white colour boxes.
|-
||Highlight the line from the '''App'''.
||Note that these values can be changed within certain limits.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Show the changes when the values changed to 0 and 90 degrees.

Change the '''Angle of inclination''' to 45 degrees and press '''Enter'''.
|| Here we can change the '''Angle of inclination''' from 0 degrees to 90 degrees.

Let’s change the '''Angle of inclination''' to 45 degrees and press '''Enter.'''
|-
|| Click on '''Start'''button.
|| Now click on '''Start''' button.
|-
||Point to the load >> click on '''Pause''' button.
|| When the load reaches the middle of the '''inclined plane '''click on '''Pause''' button.
|-
||Point to the pink vector.
|| Notice that the pink vector shows the force of gravity('''mg''').

It tries to pull the load towards the center of the Earth.
|-
||Point to blue and red vectors.
||The blue and red vectors are the resolution vectors of gravity.
|-
||Point to red vector.
||The red vector is perpendicular to the surface of the '''inclined plane'''.
|-
||Point to blue vector and incline plane.
||The blue vector is parallel to the surface of the '''inclined plane'''.
|-
|| In the incline plane point to each angles.

Sum of the interior angle of a triangle is 180 degrees.
|| If '''theta(θ)''' is 45 degrees, then this angle is 90 degrees.

As it is perpendicular to the surface of the earth.

From the triangle’s geometry this angle would be '''(90-θ)'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Resolution of vectors'''
|| To calculate the magnitude of the forces we need to know '''theta''' value.

Now these two lines are parallel and if we assume that this line is a transversal line.

Then angle '''(90-θ)''' is equal this angle through interior angle property.

Recall that red vector is perpendicular to the inclined plane.

Here the angle would be 90 degrees.

Let us assume this angle as '''x'''.

So 90 minus '''theta''' plus 90 plus '''x''' equals to 180

Therefore, '''x''' equals to '''theta'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Resolution of Vectors'''
|| Using basic trigonometry we can resolve the parallel and perpendicular components.

Consider this right angle triangle.

Here the blue parallel component is equal to the black line.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Resolution of Vector'''
|| Parallel force is '''Sin theta'''.

'''Sin theta''' equals to '''F'''(parallel) upon '''mg'''.

Let’s rearrange the equation.

'''F'''(parallel) equals to '''mg sin theta'''.

Similarly we can resolve the perpendicular component.

'''F'''(perpendicular) equals to '''mg cos theta'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Numerical'''

A mass of 1.02 kg rests on a plane that is inclined at an angle of 30 degrees.

From resolution of vectors find parallel and perpendicular components.

Calculate the necessary force to pull the mass.
|| Let us solve this numerical and verify the answers with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button to reset the '''App'''.
|-
|| 1.02 Kg = 10 N.

Change the weight to 10 N.

|| In the '''App''' change the values according to the numerical.

First let us convert 1.02 '''Kg''' into '''Newton''' and enter the value in the '''Weight''' box.
|-
|| Change the '''Angle of inclination''' to 30 '''degrees''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Next change the '''Angle of inclination''' to 30 '''degrees''' and press '''Enter'''.
|-
|| Click on '''Start '''button.
|| Now click on '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to the load >> click on '''Pause '''button.
|| Again click on '''Pause''' button when the load reaches the center of the inclined plane.
|-
|| Point to '''Normal force''', '''Parallel component''' and '''Necessary force'''.
||Observe that the '''App''' has calculated the parameters.
|-
||
||Next we will calculate using the formulae.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Resolution of Gravity Forces'''

'''F||<nowiki>=mg sin </nowiki>'''θ

<nowiki>= 1.02 </nowiki>x 9.8 x sin 30

<nowiki>= 4.99 N</nowiki>

F⟂'''<nowiki>= mg cos </nowiki>'''θ

<nowiki>= 1.02 </nowiki>x 9.8 x cos 30

<nowiki>= 8.65 N</nowiki>

Necessary force = -F||

|| Calculated value of the parallel component is 4.99 '''N''' and that of normal component is 8.65 '''N'''.

And the necessary force is equal to the parallel force but in the opposite direction.

Let us compare the answers with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
||Point to values of '''Normal force''', '''Parallel component''' and '''Necessary force'''.
||Observe that the calculated values are comparable to the measured values.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
||Let's observe the effect of friction.
|-
|| Click on '''Reset''' button.
|| Click on the '''Reset''' button.
|-
|| Enter 0.2 in the '''Coefficient of friction''' box.
|| In the '''Coefficient of friction''' box type 0.5 and press '''Enter'''.
|-th
|| Click on '''Start''' button.
|| Click on the '''Start''' button.
|-
|| Point to the load >> click on '''Pause''' button.
|| When the load reaches the middle of the '''inclined plane''' click on '''Pause''' button.
|-
||Move the cursor on the black vector.
||Notice that a black vector is added to the blue vector.

This vector represents '''Force of friction'''.
|-
||Point to Force of friction
|| In the green panel '''Force of friction''' is measured as 4.3 '''N'''.
|-
|| Point to '''Necessary force.'''

Move the cursor on the blue and black vector and then point to green vector.
|| Notice that the '''Necessary force''' required to pull the load has changed to 9.3 '''N'''.

This is because the total necessary force is, sum of parallel and frictional forces.

|-
||'''Slide Number 13'''

'''Assignment '''

A load of 0.612 kg rests on a plane that is inclined at an angle of 60 degrees.

From resolution of vectors find parallel and perpendicular components.

Calculate the necessary force to pull the load.
||As an assignment solve this numerical and compare your answer with the ones shown in the '''App'''.
|-
||
||Let us summarise
|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using this '''App''' we have

* Simulated the motion of a load on an inclined plane.

* Resolve the vector components using basic trigonometry.

* Calculated the vector components.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

||These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project'''.
|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

and gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

|| Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site.

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly someone from our team will answer them.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.
|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Simple-Machines/English

2020-06-05T05:29:36Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-

||'''Slide Number 1 '''
'''Title Slide'''
||Welcome to this spoken tutorial on '''Simple Machines'''.

|-
||'''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objectives '''
||In this tutorial we will learn to,

Simulate the working of a pulley system.

Calculate the necessary force to pull the load.

Achieve a balance condition for the lever.

Calculate the torque.

|-
||'''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
||Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3
|-
||'''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
||To follow this tutorial,
learner should be familiar with topics in basic physics.

|-
||'''Slide Number 5'''

'''Pulley'''

A pulley is a simple machine that is used to lift heavy objects.

We can either use a single pulley or a combination of pulleys.

For example pulleys can be used in

wells, escalators, rock climbing, flag poles and others.

||First we will define a pulley.

A pulley is a simple machine that is used to lift heavy objects.

We can either use a single pulley or a combination of pulleys.

For example pulleys can be used in

wells, escalators, rock climbing, flag poles and others.
|-
||'''Slide Number 6'''

Link for '''Apps on physics''' .

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''

||Use the given link to download the '''Apps'''.

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''

|-
||Point to the file in the downloads folder.
||I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
||'''Slide Number 7'''

'''Apps on Physics'''

||In this tutorial we will use,

Pulley system

Lever Principle Apps.

|-
||Point to '''html5phen''' folder in the '''Downloads '''folder.
||After downloading, '''html5phen''' folder appears in the '''Downloads '''folder.

|-
||Double-click on '''html5phen''' folder.

Point to the '''ph''' and '''phen''' folders.
||Double-click on '''html5phen''' folder.

We see two folders namely '''ph''' and '''phen'''.

|-
||Double-click on '''phen '''folder.

Point to '''Apps''' in '''java script''' and '''htm '''format.
||Now double-click on the '''phen '''folder.

In this folder, we see the '''Apps''' in '''java script ''' and '''htm '''format.
|-
||Point to the '''htm''' formats '''Apps'''.
||We will use the Apps with '''htm file''' format.

|-
||Point to '''Pulley system App'''.
||To open the Pulley system app, press '''Ctrl+F''' keys simultaneously.

In the search bar type '''Pulley system'''.
|-
||Right click on '''pulleysystem_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
||Right click on '''pulleysystem_en.htm ''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser'''.

'''Pulley System App''' opens in the browser.
|-
||Point to the '''App''' interface.

Move the cursor to the yellow panel.

Move the cursor to the green panel.
||The '''App''' interface opens with two panels.

A yellow panel with a pulley system and

A green panel to change and display parameters.
|-
||Move the cursor on the load – pulley-rope.
||In the yellow panel, notice that a load is attached to the pulley with the help of a rope.
|-
||Point to the '''Springscale.'''
||We can either raise or lower the load using a '''Springscale. '''
|-
||Show the movement of the '''Springscale''' by the pressed mouse.

Point to the values in the right panel.
||Click and drag the mouse to raise or lower the load.

Observe that there is no change in the value on the right panel.

This is because the necessary force required to drag the load remains the same.
|-
||Click on drop down list to show the numbers of pulleys
||On the top of the green panel you can see a drop down list of pulleys.

List has 2, 4, and 6 pulley systems.
|-
||Point to the '''Weight'''.

Edit and show 1 value
||The weight of the load is displayed in the white box.

The default weight of the load is 14 '''Newton'''.

We can change the value of the weight from 1 '''Newton''' to 40 '''Newton'''.
|-
||Move the cursor to show the Weight of the loose pulleys.
||We can change the '''Weight of the loose pulley '''in this box.
|-
|| Point to the black pulleys.
|| This is the total weight of the 4 pulleys.
|-
||Point to show '''Necessary force'''.
||The '''Necessary force''' used to lift the load is calculated using the '''App'''.
|-
||

Point to '''Springscale''' and

'''Force vectors'''.
||At the bottom of the green panel we have '''Springscale''' and '''Force vectors''' radio buttons.

By default '''Springscale''' is selected.
|-
||cursor on the interface

||Let us demonstrate the working of the pulley.
|-
||Point to the load.

Point to the 4 sections of the rope.

Point to '''Necessary force'''.
||Observe that weight of 20 '''Newton''' is hanging from the 4 pulley sections of the rope.

Each section of the rope has one fourth of the total weight.

In the '''App''' force required to raise the weight in air is calculated.
|-
||'''Slide Number 8'''

'''Necessary force'''

'''F= (Wl+ Wp)/4'''

'''Wl''' is '''Weight of the load'''.

'''Wp''' is '''Weight of the loose pulley'''.
||The '''Necessary force''' is calculated using formula.

'''F= (Wl+ Wp)/4'''

'''Wl''' is '''weight of the load'''.

'''Wp '''is '''weight of the loose pulley'''.
|-
||Edit the '''Weight of the loose pulley to 20 '''Newton'''.

Point to '''Necessary force'''
||Now change the '''Weight of the loose pulley''' to 20 '''Newton'''.

Observe that the '''Necessary force''' is changed to 10 '''Newton'''.
|-
||Change the '''Weight''' of the load to 30 '''Newton'''.
||Next change the weight of the load to 30 '''Newton'''.
|-
||

Point to the '''Weight of the loose pulley'''.

Highlight the last line from the '''App'''.
||observe that the '''weight of the loose pulley''' has changed to 10 '''Newton'''.

This is because the '''Springscale’s''' limit is 10 '''Newton'''.

Values more than 10 '''Newton''' are automatically changed.

|-
||'''Slide Number 9'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the weight of the load to 25 N and weight of the loose pulley to 10 N. Calculate the necessary force and verify your answer from the App.

||As an assignment,

Change the weight of the load to 25 N and weight of the loose pulley to 10 N.
Calculate the necessary force and verify your answer from the App.

|-
||To open '''Lever Principle App''' right-click on '''lever_en.htm''' file and '''Open With''' '''Firefox Web Browser'''.
||Next we will move on to '''Lever Principle App'''.

To open '''Lever Principle App''' right-click on '''lever_en.htm''' file and '''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|-
||Point to the screen(highlight the sentence from the App.)
||This '''App''' shows a symmetrical lever with some mass pieces.

Each mass piece weighs 1 '''Newton'''.
|-
||Scroll down to show the lever principle.
||At the bottom of the interface '''Lever Principle ''' is defined.

A lever is in balance if the total left side torque is equal to the total right side torque.
|-
||Scroll up to see the '''App'''.

Point to the lever arm.
||Observe that the lever arm is shown by green and orange rectangles.

Length of each rectangle is 0.10 '''m'''.
|-
||Point to the torque measured.
||At the bottom left of the screen torque is calculated.
|-
||'''Slide Number 10'''

'''Torque'''

Torque is the twisting force that tends to cause a rotation.

The point where the object rotates is aixs of rotation.
||Torque is the twisting force that tends to cause a rotation.

The point where the object rotates is the axis of rotation.
|-
||Point to the fulcrum.
||In the '''App''' fulcrum is the axis of rotation.
|-
||'''Slide Number 11'''

'''Torque'''

'''(tau) τ <nowiki>= F x r</nowiki>⟂'''

'''F''' is a force applied by the load.

'''r'''⟂ is a perpendicular distance from the fulcrum.
||We can calculate the torque using the formula.

'''(tau)τ <nowiki>= F x r</nowiki>⟂'''(perpendicular).

|-
||Point to green and orange rectangles.
||Green and orange rectangles indicate perpendicular distances.
|-
||Remove one weight from the left side of the fulcrum.
||We can change the hanging weight by clicking and holding the mouse.
|-
||Point to fulcrum.

Move the cursor to show the calculations.
||Observe that, the lever is unbalanced.

This is because torque on both the sides is not same.
|-
||Point to 0.9 Nm.
||Notice that the value of left side torque is reduced to '''0.9 Nm'''

'''(Newton-meter)'''.
|-
||Cursor on the interface.

||What happens when hanging weights are removed from both the sides.
|-
||Point to the left side of the fulcrum.
||Let us hang the weights at different distances to the left of the fulcrum.
|-
||Click and hold the mouse to add one weight on the third rectangle.
||Click and hold the mouse to add one weight on the third rectangle.
|-
||Add two weights on the fourth rectangle.

One weight on the fifth rectangle.
||Add two weights on the fourth rectangle.

And one weight on the fifth rectangle.
|-
||Point to the lever.
||Observe that the lever is now unbalanced.
|-
||Point to the right side.
||Let us add weights to the right side of the fulcrum to balance the lever.
|-
||Use pressed mouse to add the weights from

right to 1st rectangle.
||Click and hold the mouse to add one weight to the first rectangle.
|-
||Hang the weight to 3rd, 4th, and 5th rectangles.
||Continue to add weights to third, fourth and fifth rectangles.
|-
||Point to the lever.
||Notice that the lever is now balanced.
|-
||'''Slide Number 12'''

'''Assignment'''

On the same side of the fulcrum, if a block weighing 5 N is kept at 0.5 m and a block weighing 3 N is kept at 0.6 m, then how far a block weighing 7 N should be kept on the other side of the fulcrum to achieve a balance condition.

||As an assignment solve this numerical.

|-
||
||Let us summarize
|-
||'''Slide Number 13'''

'''Summary'''
||In this tutorial we have,

* Simulated the working of a pulley system.
* Calculated the necessary force to pull the load.
* Achieved a balance condition for the lever.
* Calculated the torque.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|| These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
||

'''Slide Number 15'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''
The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

||The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.
|-
||'''Slide Number 16'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

'''Spoken Tutorial Project team,

conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

and gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.
||'''Spoken Tutorial Project team,

conducts workshops using spoken tutorials

and gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
||'''Slide Number 17'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them.

||Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question. Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them.

|-
||'''Slide Number 18'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial

Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them

This will help reduce the clutter

With less clutter, we can use these discussion as instructional material
||The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial

Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them

This will help reduce the clutter

With less clutter, we can use these discussion as instructional material.

|-
||'''Slide Number 19'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

||Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.
|-
||
||This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Reflection-and-Refraction/English

2020-05-28T11:56:50Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Reflection and Refraction'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,

Simulate reflection and refraction of a light ray.

Calculate the angles of reflection and refraction.

Change the medium and angle of incidence to verify '''Snell's Law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| Calculate the value of critical angle.

Verify '''Huygens' principle'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Link for Apps on physics. '''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps.'''

|-
|| Open the '''Downloads '''folder.
|| I have downloaded the '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial, we will use,

'''Refraction of Light '''and

'''Reflection and Refraction of Light Waves Apps.'''

|-
|| Right click on '''pulleysystem_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right click on '''refraction_en.htm '''file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser.'''

'''Reflection and Refraction of Light App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The''' App '''shows reflection and refraction of light through a given medium.

|-
|| Point to air and water on the interface
|| The default media are air and water.

|-
|| Point to air.

Point to water.
|| Note that the medium with lesser refractive index is shown in white background.

The medium with greater refractive index is shown in blue background.

|-
|| Point to the light that has been incident.
|| Light from the top left corner, strikes the boundary surface of the two media.

|-
|| Point to both reflection and refraction angles.
|| It shows reflection and refraction.

|-
|| Point to blue angels
|| Reflection is shown by the blue coloured angle.

|-
|| Point to black and blue angles.
|| Observe that the angle of incidence and reflection are the same.

|-
|| Point to the refraction.
|| Here we see the refraction of light.

|-
|| Show the phenomena with the motion of the cursor.
|| When light travels from rarer medium to denser medium, it bends towards normal.

|-
|| Cursor on the green panel.
|| On the green panel we have a choice to change a few parameters.

|-
|| Point to the drop downs.
|| Let us reverse the two media using the drop downs.

|-
|| Click on the first drop down and change the medium to water.
|| Select water as the upper medium.

|-
|| Click on second drop down.

Select air from the drop down.
|| Select''' '''air''' '''as the lower medium.

|-
|| Move the cursor to show the movements
|| Here the ray of light travels from denser to rarer medium.

The ray bends away from the normal.

|-
|| Click on both drop down to show the material medium.
|| Note that both the drop downs show the same material media.

|-
|| Point to each drop down.
|| Below the drop down, we see two text fields.

These are provided to enter the values of refractive indices.

|-
|| Enter the value 4 in the '''1st index of refraction '''and show the change.
|| Here we can also change the values manually between the range of 1 to 5.

|-
|| Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Change the values from 0.1 degrees to 90 degrees and show the changes.

Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh and show the default value.
|| Next '''Angle of incidence''' can be changed from 0.1 degrees to 90 degrees.

Press '''F5 '''key to see the default value.

It shows 30 degrees.

|-
|| Point below the text fields.
|| Below the text fields '''App''' shows the '''Angle of reflection and refraction'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| Graph shows the angle of refraction with angle of incidence.

|-
|| Click and drag the angle of incidence.

Drag it slowly.
|| We can also change the angle of incidence by dragging this red coloured ray.

|-
|| Point and show the changes when the angle of incidence is changed.
|| Notice the change in angle of reflection and refraction.

Simultaneously observe the graph.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now from the graph we will learn the two cases of '''Snell’s law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Snell’s Law of Refraction'''

sin i / sin r = n21

“n21” is the refractive index of the second medium w.r.t first.
|| Before that let us state '''Snell’s law''' of Refraction.

Ratio of sine of angle of incidence to sine of angle of refraction is a constant.

n21 is the refractive index of the second medium with respect to first medium.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Snell’s Law of Refraction'''

'''Case1: '''If''' '''n21 > 1, angle of refraction is less than angle of incidence.

'''Case2: '''If''' '''n21 < 1, angle of refraction is greater than angle of incidence.
|| Here are the 2 cases of '''Snell’s law'''.

1. If n21 is greater than 1, angle of refraction is less than angle of incidence.

2. If n21 is less than 1, angle of refraction is greater than angle of incidence.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Angle of incidence''' to 20 degrees.
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 20 degrees.

Observe that the angle of refraction has changed to 14.9.

|-
|| Point to the graph and values of the angles.
|| This graph shows the first case of Snell’s law.

Here angle of incidence is greater than the

angle of refraction.

|-
|| Point to the value of refractive index of the second medium.
|| Observe that the light ray bends towards the normal.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us see what happens, when incident ray passes from denser to rarer medium.

|-
|| Click on the first drop down and change the medium to diamond.
|| From the first drop down change the material medium to '''diamond'''.

|-
|| Point to show the refraction.
|| Notice that the light ray has bent away from the normal.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| This graph shows the second case of '''Snell’s law'''.

|-
|| Point to show Angle of refraction.
|| Here the angle of refraction is greater than the angle of incidence.

|-
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 30 degrees.
|| Increase the '''Angle of incidence''' to 30 degrees.

|-
|| Point to the refracted ray.
|| The refracted ray has bent still more further away from the normal.

|-
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 35 degrees.
|| Again increase the angle of incidence to

35 degrees.

In this case observe that the refraction is not possible.

|-
|| Point to the reflected ray.
|| Here the incident ray is totally reflected.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This phenomenon is known as total internal reflection.

Here the critical angle is formed.

|-
|| Point to the Critical angle.
|| The critical angle for diamond and water is 33.3 degrees.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Critical angle'''

ic<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(n2/n1)

ic<nowiki>= Critical angle</nowiki>

n1<nowiki>= Refractive index of first medium</nowiki>

n2<nowiki>= Refractive index of the second medium</nowiki>
|| Now we will calculate the critical angle using the formula.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Let us make a tabular column to calculate critical angle for two different media.

|-
||
|| Here I have calculated the critial angle for diamond and water.

|-
|| Point to the on the interface Critical angle.
|| The calculated value is comparable to the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Tabular column'''

|| Now enter these values in the table.

|-
|| Change the upper medium to water and lower medium to air.
|| Next change the upper medium to '''water''' and lower medium to '''air'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Tabular Column'''

Show one glimpse of the table
|| Note the refractive indices for both the media.

|-
|| Show the calculation''' '''for critical angle on a text-box or on a png.
|| Then calculate the critical angle using the above formula.

|-
|| Point to show the values.
|| Observe that the values are comparable.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Note these values in the table.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Assignment '''

Show the incomplete table.
|| As an assignment
* Note the values of refractive indices for the following media from the '''App'''.

* Calculate the critical angle for the two media.

* Compare the values with the ones shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will move on to the next '''App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''refractionhuygens_en.htm'''<<

'''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| Right click on '''refractionhuygens_en.htm '''file.

'''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.

The''' App '''opens in the browser.

|-
|| Highlight the main topic from the screen.
|| '''App''' shows '''Reflection''' and '''Refraction''' of light waves using '''Huygens''' principle.

|-
|| Click on the '''Restart''' button.
|| Click on the '''Restart''' button.

|-
|| Point to the wavefront.
|| Here the plane wavefront is incident diagonally on the boundary of the media.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Point to the box and scroll the slider.(Highlight the box)
|| Explanation of each step is provided in this text box.

|-
|| Point to the wavefronts.
|| Note the change in media, when the wavefront is incident on the boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to the pink point on the boundary.
|| Observe the pink points on the boundary between the media.

Each pink point is the source of spherical wavefront.

|-
|| Point to the waves in '''Medium1 '''and '''Medium 2'''.
|| These generating waves in the '''Medium 1 '''and''' Medium 2''' are the wavelets.

|-
|| Click on the''' Resume''' button.
|| Click on the''' Resume''' button.

|-
||
|| Note that the waves in '''Medium 2''' move with less velocity as compared to '''Medium 1'''.

This is because, the medium 2 has higher refractive index.

So here the waves move with less velocity.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to the line drawn.
|| Observe the tangent drawn to all these spherical waves.

This line, here is the source for the secondary wavefront.

|-
|| Points on the wavelets.
|| So, the points on every wavelet result in the formation of secondary wavefront.

|-
||
|| Here the values of '''Angle of incidence''', '''reflection '''and '''refraction '''are given.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| Point and show the direction of propagation of the red and blue waves.
|| Direction of propogation changes when waves move from medium 1 to medium 2.

|-
|| Again click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Again click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Point to direction of the propagation of waves.
|| Here the direction of the propagation of waves is shown.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point and show the perpendicular lines.
|| Observe that these lines of propagation are perpendicular to the wavefronts.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| Change '''Angle of incidence '''<nowiki>= 60 degrees.</nowiki>
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence '''to 60 degrees.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step'''.
|| Click on the '''Next step '''button.

|-
|| Point the series of waves.
|| Here we can see a series of wavefronts that are incident on the boundary surface.

|-
|| Cursor on both mediums.
|| Observe the speed and wavelength of wavefronts in both the media.

|-
|| Point to the denser medium.
|| The wavelength and speed of the wavefront decreases in the denser medium.

But the frequency of the plane wavefronts remains the same.

|-
|| make the refractive index of 1 to 2 and refractive index of 2 to 1.
|| Let us reverse the refractive indices and observe the formation of wavefronts.

|-
|| Point to the wavefronts.
|| Here the speed of the wavefront decreases, as it moves from denser medium.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.

Point to show the critical angle.
|| This shows the total internal reflection.

Here the incident wavefront is completely reflected and not refracted.

This results in the formation of critical angle.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the refractive index values of both media as given in the previous '''App'''.

Observe the formation of wavefront and give an explanation.

|| As an assignment

Change the refractive index values of both media as given in the previous '''App'''.

Observe the formation of wavefront and give an explanation.

|-
||
|| Let us summarize

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''', we have

Simulated reflection and refraction of a light ray.

Calculated the angles of reflection and refraction.

Changed the medium and angle of incidence to verify '''Snell's Law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Summary'''
|| Calculated the value of critical angle.

Verified '''Huygens' principle'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These '''Apps''' were created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial project.'''

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 21'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 22'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly.

Someone from our team will answer them.
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 23'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay

Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Reflection-and-Refraction/English

2020-05-28T11:43:25Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Reflection and Refraction'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,

Simulate reflection and refraction of a light ray.

Calculate the angles of reflection and refraction.

Change the medium and angle of incidence to verify '''Snell's Law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| Calculate the value of critical angle.

Verify '''Huygens' principle'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Link for Apps on physics. '''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps.'''

|-
|| Open the '''Downloads '''folder.
|| I have downloaded the '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial, we will use,

'''Refraction of Light '''and

'''Reflection and Refraction of Light Waves Apps.'''

|-
|| Right click on '''pulleysystem_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right click on '''refraction_en.htm '''file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser.'''

'''Reflection and Refraction of Light App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The''' App '''shows reflection and refraction of light through a given medium.

|-
|| Point to air and water on the interface
|| The default media are air and water.

|-
|| Point to air.

Point to water.
|| Note that the medium with lesser refractive index is shown in white background.

The medium with greater refractive index is shown in blue background.

|-
|| Point to the light that has been incident.
|| Light from the top left corner, strikes the boundary surface of the two media.

|-
|| Point to both reflection and refraction angles.
|| It shows reflection and refraction.

|-
|| Point to blue angels
|| Reflection is shown by the blue coloured angle.

|-
|| Point to black and blue angles.
|| Observe that the angle of incidence and reflection are the same.

|-
|| Point to the refraction.
|| Here we see the refraction of light.

|-
|| Show the phenomena with the motion of the cursor.
|| When light travels from rarer medium to denser medium, it bends towards normal.

|-
|| Cursor on the green panel.
|| On the green panel we have a choice to change a few parameters.

|-
|| Point to the drop downs.
|| Let us reverse the two media using the drop downs.

|-
|| Click on the first drop down and change the medium to water.
|| Select water as the upper medium.

|-
|| Click on second drop down.

Select air from the drop down.
|| Select''' '''air''' '''as the lower medium.

|-
|| Move the cursor to show the movements
|| Here the ray of light travels from denser to rarer medium.

The ray bends away from the normal.

|-
|| Click on both drop down to show the material medium.
|| Note that both the drop downs show the same material media.

|-
|| Point to each drop down.
|| Below the drop down, we see two text fields.

These are provided to enter the values of refractive indices.

|-
|| Enter the value 4 in the '''1st index of refraction '''and show the change.
|| Here we can also change the values manually between the range of 1 to 5.

|-
|| Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Change the values from 0.1 degrees to 90 degrees and show the changes.

Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh and show the default value.
|| Next '''Angle of incidence''' can be changed from 0.1 degrees to 90 degrees.

Press '''F5 '''key to see the default value.

It shows 30 degrees.

|-
|| Point below the text fields.
|| Below the text fields '''App''' shows the '''Angle of reflection and refraction'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| Graph shows the angle of refraction with angle of incidence.

|-
|| Click and drag the angle of incidence.

Drag it slowly.
|| We can also change the angle of incidence by dragging this red coloured ray.

|-
|| Point and show the changes when the angle of incidence is changed.
|| Notice the change in angle of reflection and refraction.

Simultaneously observe the graph.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now from the graph we will learn the two cases of '''Snell’s law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Snell’s Law of Refraction'''

sin i / sin r = n21

“n21” is the refractive index of the second medium w.r.t first.
|| Before that let us state '''Snell’s law''' of Refraction.

Ratio of sine of angle of incidence to sine of angle of refraction is a constant.

n21 is the refractive index of the second medium with respect to first medium.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Snell’s Law of Refraction'''

'''Case1: '''If''' '''n21 > 1, angle of refraction is less than angle of incidence.

'''Case2: '''If''' '''n21 < 1, angle of refraction is greater than angle of incidence.
|| Here are the 2 cases of '''Snell’s law'''.

1. If n21 is greater than 1, angle of refraction is less than angle of incidence.

2. If n21 is less than 1, angle of refraction is greater than angle of incidence.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Angle of incidence''' to 20 degrees.
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 20 degrees.

Observe that the angle of refraction has changed to 14.9.

|-
|| Point to the graph and values of the angles.
|| This graph shows the first case of Snell’s law.

Here angle of incidence is greater than the

angle of refraction.

|-
|| Point to the value of refractive index of the second medium.
|| Observe that the light ray bends towards the normal.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us see what happens, when incident ray passes from denser to rarer medium.

|-
|| Click on the first drop down and change the medium to diamond.
|| From the first drop down change the material medium to '''diamond'''.

|-
|| Point to show the refraction.
|| Notice that the light ray has bent away from the normal.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| This graph shows the second case of '''Snell’s law'''.

|-
|| Point to show Angle of refraction.
|| Here the angle of refraction is greater than the angle of incidence.

|-
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 30 degrees.
|| Increase the '''Angle of incidence''' to 30 degrees.

|-
|| Point to the refracted ray.
|| The refracted ray has bent still more further away from the normal.

|-
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 35 degrees.
|| Again increase the angle of incidence to

35 degrees.

In this case observe that the refraction is not possible.

|-
|| Point to the reflected ray.
|| Here the incident ray is totally reflected.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This phenomenon is known as total internal reflection.

Here the critical angle is formed.

|-
|| Point to the Critical angle.
|| The critical angle for diamond and water is 33.3 degrees.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Critical angle'''

ic<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(n2/n1)

ic<nowiki>= Critical angle</nowiki>

n1<nowiki>= Refractive index of first medium</nowiki>

n2<nowiki>= Refractive index of the second medium</nowiki>
|| Now we will calculate the critical angle using the formula.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Let us make a tabular column to calculate critical angle for two different media.

|-
||
|| Here I have calculated the critial angle for diamond and water.

|-
|| Point to the on the interface Critical angle.
|| The calculated value is comparable to the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Tabular column'''

|| Now enter these values in the table.

|-
|| Change the upper medium to water and lower medium to air.
|| Next change the upper medium to '''water''' and lower medium to '''air'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Tabular Column'''

Show one glimpse of the table
|| Note the refractive indices for both the media.

|-
|| Show the calculation''' '''for critical angle on a text-box or on a png.
|| Then calculate the critical angle using the above formula.

|-
|| Point to show the values.
|| Observe that the values are comparable.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Note these values in the table.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Assignment '''

Show the incomplete table.
|| As an assignment
* Note the values of refractive indices for the following media from the '''App'''.

* Calculate the critical angle for the two media.

* Compare the values with the ones shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will move on to the next '''App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''refractionhuygens_en.htm'''<<

'''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| Right click on '''refractionhuygens_en.htm '''file.

'''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.

The''' App '''opens in the browser.

|-
|| Highlight the main topic from the screen.
|| '''App''' shows '''Reflection''' and '''Refraction''' of light waves using '''Huygens''' principle.

|-
|| Click on the '''Restart''' button.
|| Click on the '''Restart''' button.

|-
|| Point to the wavefront.
|| Here the plane wavefront is incident diagonally on the boundary of the media.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Point to the box and scroll the slider.(Highlight the box)
|| Explanation of each step is provided in this text box.

|-
|| Point to the wavefronts.
|| Note the change in media, when the wavefront is incident on the boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to the pink point on the boundary.
|| Observe the pink points on the boundary between the media.

Each pink point is the source of spherical wavefront.

|-
|| Point to the waves in '''Medium1 '''and '''Medium 2'''.
|| These generating waves in the '''Medium 1 '''and''' Medium 2''' are the wavelets.

|-
|| Click on the''' Resume''' button.
|| Click on the''' Resume''' button.

|-
||
|| Note that the waves in '''Medium 2''' move with less velocity as compared to '''Medium 1'''.

This is because, the medium 2 has higher refractive index.

So here the waves move with less velocity.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to the line drawn.
|| Observe the tangent drawn to all these spherical waves.

This line, here is the source for the secondary wavefront.

|-
|| Points on the wavelets.
|| So, the points on every wavelet result in the formation of secondary wavefront.

|-
||
|| Here the values of '''Angle of incidence''', '''reflection '''and '''refraction '''are given.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| Point and show the direction of propagation of the red and blue waves.
|| Direction of propogation changes when waves move from medium 1 to medium 2.

|-
|| Again click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Again click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Point to direction of the propagation of waves.
|| Here the direction of the propagation of waves is shown.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point and show the perpendicular lines.
|| Observe that these lines of propagation are perpendicular to the wavefronts.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| Change '''Angle of incidence '''<nowiki>= 60 degrees.</nowiki>
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence '''to 60 degrees.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step'''.
|| Click on the '''Next step '''button.

|-
|| Point the series of waves.
|| Here we can see a series of wavefronts that are incident on boundary surface.

|-
|| Cursor on both mediums.
|| Observe the speed and wavelength of wavefronts in both the media.

|-
|| Point to the denser medium.
|| The wavelength and speed of the wavefront decreases in the denser medium.

But the frequency of the plane wavefronts remains the same.

|-
|| make the refractive index of 1 to 2 and refractive index of 2 to 1.
|| Let us reverse the refractive indices and observe the formation of wavefronts.

|-
|| Point to the wavefronts.
|| Here the speed of the wavefront decreases, as it moves from denser medium.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.

Point to show the critical angle.
|| This shows the total internal reflection.

Here the incident wavefront is completely reflected and not refracted.

This results in the formation of critical angle.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the refractive index values of both media as given in the previous '''App'''.

Observe the formation of wavefront and give an explanation.

|| As an assignment

Change the refractive index values of both media as given in the previous '''App'''.

Observe the formation of wavefront and give an explanation.

|-
||
|| Let us summarize

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''', we have

Simulated reflection and refraction of a light ray.

Calculated the angles of reflection and refraction.

Changed the medium and angle of incidence to verify '''Snell's Law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Summary'''
|| Calculated the value of critical angle.

Verified '''Huygens' principle'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These '''Apps''' were created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial project.'''

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 21'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 22'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly.

Someone from our team will answer them.
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 23'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay

Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Convex-Lenses/English

2020-05-06T12:12:29Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Convex Lenses.'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,

*Change the focal length and see the kind of image formed.

*Change the object distance and object height and see the kind of image formed.

*Calculate the magnification and length of the telescope tube.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

*Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04
*Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://spoken-tutorial.org/ https://spoken-tutorial.org/] '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the prerequisite tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,

*'''Image Formation by Converging Lenses '''and

*'''Refracting Astronomical Telescope Apps'''.

|-
|| Right-click on '''imageconverginglens_en.htm''' file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox Web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right-click on '''imageconverginglens_en.htm '''file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox Web Browser '''option.

'''Image Formation by Converging Lenses App''' opens in the '''browser'''.

|-
|| Point to the convex lens in the App.
|| The '''App''' shows a ray diagram of the convex lens.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Converging Lens Ray Diagram'''

Show the ray diagram with all the positions.
|| Before moving to the '''App''' let us first be familiar with a ray diagram.

Let us define principal axis.

It is an imaginary line passing through the optical center.

A vertical axis divides the lens into two equal halves.

There are four positions on the principal axis.

These positions are 2F , F , F’ and 2F’.

F is the focal length and 2F is twice the distance of focal length.

F’ and 2F’ are on the opposite side of the lens with the same distance as F and 2F.

|-
|| Open App.
|| Now let us open the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the scale at the bottom of the yellow panel.
|| Let us use the scale to spot the positions of focal length F and 2F.

|-
|| Point to show the Zero on the scale.

Point to '''Object distance'''.

Move the screen using the pressed mouse.
|| Initially the object is placed at the zero position of the scale.

The distance of the object from the lens is 50 cm.

The vertical black line beyond the lens is a screen.

This screen can be moved back and forth.

|-
|| Point to the blue arrow.
|| Blue arrow indicates the height of the object.

It is placed beyond 2F.

|-
|| Point the cursor on 2F position.
|| 2F is twice the distance of the focal length F.

|-
|| Show it on the scale.
|| From the '''App''', the focal length is 10 cm, so position of 2F has to be at 20 cm.

|-
|| Point to the green arrow.
|| Green arrow indicates the image formed by the convex lens.

|-
|| In the green control panel point to '''Focal length''',

'''Object distance''', and '''Object height'''.
|| In the green control panel we can edit the values of the following parameters.

|-
|| Edit the '''Focal length''' to 20 '''cm''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Change the value of '''Focal length''' to 20 cm and press''' Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to the radio buttons Principle light rays and Bundle of light rays.
|| At the bottom of the green panel, there are two radio buttons.

'''Principal light rays''' and '''Bundle of light rays'''.

|-
|| Point to Principal light rays.
|| By default '''Principal light rays '''option is selected.

|-
|| Click on the drop down list.
|| A drop-down is provided to '''Emphasize''' different parameters.

|-
|| Click on the drop down and Select''' Object distance.'''
|| From the drop-down list, select '''Object distance.'''

|-
|| Point to the object distance.
Point to blinking line.
|| Observe that the '''App '''emphasizes the object distance using a blinking line.

The blinking line disappears after sometime.

|-
|| Drag the object(blue arrow) to show the changes in object distance.
|| We can also change the object distance by dragging the object.

As we drag, the value in the text-box changes accordingly.

|-
|| Press '''F5 '''key on the keyboard
|| Press '''F5 '''key on the keyboard to refresh the''' App'''.

|-
|| Edit the '''Object height''' to 15 '''cm''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Now change the value of '''Object height''' to 15 cm.

Change the '''Focal length''' to 20 cm.

|-
|| Cursor on the ray diagram.
|| Let us learn about the ray diagram.

|-
|| Point to the ray which is parallel to the optical axis.

Point to the ray.
|| The ray emerging from the object is parallel to the principal axis of the lens.

This ray after refraction passes through the second principal focus F’.

|-
|| Point to the second ray of light which passes without any deviation.
|| A second ray of light passes through the optical center of the lens.

This ray after refraction emerges without any deviation.

|-
|| Point to the last ray which parallel to the optical axis after refraction.
|| A third ray passes through the first principal focus.

This ray, after refraction, is parallel to the principal axis.

|-
|| Point to show the meeting point of the rays.
|| The image is formed at point of intersection of the three rays.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us change the position of the object and see where the image appears.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Object distance '''to 35 cm and '''Object height''' to 10 cm.
|| Change the '''Object distance '''to 40 cm and '''Object height''' to 10 cm.

|-
|| In the control panel point to the '''Kind of image''' formed.

'''real, inverted''' and '''equal dimension'''.
|| The '''Kind of image ''' is '''real, inverted '''and '''equal dimension'''.

|-
|| Point to show the values of following.

'''Object distance'''

'''Object height'''

'''Image distance '''

'''Image height.'''
|| This is the condition for''' 2F'''.

When object is at''' 2F''' the image will appear at '''2F'''’.

Here the object distance and height will be equal to image distance and image height.

|-
|| Drag the object between '''2F''' and '''F'''.

Drag the object to 10 cm.
|| Drag the object between the '''2F''' and '''F.'''

Drag the object to''' 10 cm.'''

Here we can use the scale to take the measurement.

|-
|| Point to the image formed.
|| Observe that the image is formed beyond '''2F’'''.

The image formed is '''real, inverted''' and '''magnified'''.

|-
|| Drag the object between''' F '''and optic center.

Drag it to 30 cm.
|| Drag the object between '''F''' and optic center.

Drag the object to 30 cm.

|-
|| Point to the image (green arrow).
|| Observe that image is formed at the first principal focus behind the object.

Here the image formed is '''virtual, upright''', and '''magnified'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment

Change the focal length of a convex lens to 10 cm and its object distance to 15 cm.

What characteristics of the image do you observe?

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us move on to next '''App'''.

|-
|| To open the '''App''' right-click on '''refractor_en.htm.

Select '''Open with Firefox Web Browser.'''
|| To open the''' App''' right-click on '''refractor_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.

|-
|| Point to the''' App.'''
|| The '''App '''opens with a '''Refracting Astronomical Telescope.'''

|-
|| Point the cursor to show the information.
|| Before moving to the simulation, please read the information given on the screen.

|-
||Scroll down.
||Scroll down the screen.

|-
|| Point to the bigger lens.
|| In the yellow panel, the bigger lens is the objective.

The objective has a large focal length.

|-
|| Point to the smaller lens.
|| Here the smaller lens is an '''Eyepiece'''.

|-
|| Point to the red coloured rays.
|| The red coloured rays indicate the light from a distant object.

|-
|| Move the cursor to show the path of the rays.
|| Light rays from a distant object enter the objective lens.

After refraction a real image is formed at the second focal point.

|-
|| Point to the eyepiece.
|| Then the eyepiece magnifies the image.

The image formed is enlarged and inverted.

|-
|| Point to the black circle which is at the bottom right corner.
|| The magnified image of six brightest star of the pleiades is seen in the black circle.

|-
|| In the green control panel point to '''Focal length''' of '''Objective '''and '''Eyepiece'''.
|| In the green panel, '''Focal lengths''' of '''Objective''' and '''Eyepiece''' can be edited.

|-
|| Highlight this sentence from the '''App'''(2nd para 1st line).
|| Here we can vary the '''Focal lengths''' of '''Objective''' and '''Eyepiece''' from 0.05 m to 0.5 m.

|-
|| Point to the '''Angles'''

'''Objective '''and '''Eyepiece'''.

Point to '''Magnification'''.
|| As per the changes in the '''Focal lengths, App '''calculates '''Angles''' and '''Magnification'''.

|-
|| Scroll down to see the formula for magnification.
|| At the bottom of the screen, '''App''' has given the formula for magnification.

|-
|| Point to the formula.
|| That is:

'''v'''<nowiki>= - f</nowiki>1/ f2 

Here v is the '''Magnification'''

f1 is the focal length of '''Objective''' and

f2 is the focal length of '''Eyepiece'''.

|-
||
|| Let us calculate the magnification using the data from the '''App'''.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Focal length''' of the '''Objective''' to 0.45 m and '''Eyepiece''' to 0.1 m.
|| Change the '''Focal length''' of '''Objective''' to 0.45 m and '''Eyepiece''' to 0.1 m.

|-
|| Point to the observed value.
|| Observe that '''App '''has calculated the value for '''Magnification'''.

|-
|| Point to the black circle.
|| Notice the changes in the black circle.

If we increase the focal length of the '''Objective''', image will be more magnified.

|-
||
|| Let us now calculate the length of the telescope tube.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Change the '''Focal lengths '''of the '''Objective '''and '''Eyepiece''' to their default values.

Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Telescope Tube'''

'''Length of the tube is sum of the focal lengths'''

'''of objective and eyepiece'''.

'''L= f1 + f2'''

'''<nowiki>= 0.50 + 0.10</nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>= 0.6 m</nowiki>'''
|| Formula to calculate the length of the telescope tube is sum of the '''Focal lengths''' of '''Objective''' and '''Eyepiece'''.

That is: L= f1 + f2.

Here f1 is focal length of '''Objective''' and f2 is focal length of '''Eyepiece'''.

Substitute the '''Focal lengths''' and calculate the length of the telescope tube.

Observe that the length of the telescope is 0.6 m.

|-
|| Edit the values of '''Focal length''' of '''Objective '''to 0.1 '''m'''

and''' Eyepiece''' to 0.5''' m'''.
|| Now reverse the '''Focal lengths '''of the '''Objective''' and '''Eyepiece'''.

|-
|| Point to the single dot in the second black circle.
|| Observe that the six brightest stars of pleiades appear to be a single point.

|-
||
|| This is because the focal length of the '''Objective''' is smaller than that of the '''Eyepiece'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Assignment'''

*An astronomical telescope has an objective of focal length 0.45 m and an eyepiece of focal length 0.25 m.

*Find the magnification produced by the telescope.

*Verify the calculated value with the ones shown in the '''App.'''
|| As an assignment solve this numerical.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

*Changed the focal length and seen the kind of image formed.

*Changed the object distance and object height and seen the kind of image formed.

*Calculated the magnification and length of the telescope tube.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|| These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
||The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Convex-Lenses/English

2020-04-28T06:01:16Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Convex Lenses.'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,

Change the focal length and see the kind of image formed.

Change the object distance and object height and see the kind of image formed.

Calculate the magnification and length of the telescope tube.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://spoken-tutorial.org/ https://spoken-tutorial.org/] '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the Pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,

'''Image Formation by Converging Lenses '''and

'''Refracting Astronomical Telescope Apps'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''imageconverginglens_en.htm''' file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right click on '''imageconverginglens_en.htm '''file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option'''.'''

'''Image Formation by Converging Lenses App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to the convex lens in the App.
|| The '''App''' shows a ray diagram of the convex lens.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Converging Lens Ray Diagram'''

Show the ray diagram with all the positions.
|| Before moving to the '''App''' let us first be familiar with a ray diagrams.

Let us define principal axis.

It is an imaginary line passing through the optical center.

A vertical axis divides the lens into two equal halves.

There are four positions on the principal axis, these positions are 2F , F , F’ and 2F’.

F is the focal length and 2F is the twice the distance of focal length.

F’ and 2F’ are on the opposite side of the lens with the same distance as F and 2F’.

|-
|| Open App.
|| Now let us open the '''App'''.

|-
|| Point to the scale at the bottom of the yellow panel.
|| Let us use the scale to spot the positions of focal length F and 2F.

|-
|| Point to show the Zero on the scale.

Point to '''Object distance'''.

Move the screen using the pressed mouse.
|| Initially the object is placed at the zero position of the scale.

The distance of the object from the lens is 50 cm.

The vertical black line beyond the lens is a screen.

This screen can be moved back and forth.

|-
|| Point to the blue arrow.
|| Blue arrow indicates the height of the object.

It is placed beyond 2F.

|-
|| Point the cursor on 2F position.
|| 2F is twice the distance of the focal length F.

|-
|| Show it on the scale.
|| From the '''App''', the focal length is 10 cm, so position of 2F has to be at 20 cm.

|-
|| Point to the green arrow.
|| Green arrow indicates the image formed by the convex lens.

|-
|| In the green control panel point to '''Focal length''',

'''Object distance''', and '''Object height'''.
|| In the green control panel we can edit the values of the following parameters.

|-
|| Edit the '''Focal length''' to 20 '''cm''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Change the value of '''Focal length''' to 20 '''cm '''and press''' Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to the radio buttons Principle light rays and Bundle of light rays.
|| At the bottom of the green panel there are two radio buttons.

'''Principal light rays''' and '''Bundle of light rays'''.

|-
|| Point to Principal light rays.
|| By default '''Principal light rays '''option is selected.

|-
|| Click on the drop down list.
|| A drop down is provided to '''Emphasize''' different parameters.

|-
|| Click on the drop down and Select''' Object distance.'''
|| From the drop down list, select '''Object distance.'''

|-
|| Point to the object distance.
Point to blinking line.
|| Observe that the '''App '''emphasizes the object distance using a blinking line.

The blinking line disappears after sometime.

|-
|| Drag the object(blue arrow) to show the changes in object distance.
|| We can also change the object distance by dragging the object.

As we drag the value in the text-box changes accordingly.

|-
|| Press '''F5 '''key on the keyboard
|| Press '''F5 '''key on the keyboard to refresh the''' App'''.

|-
|| Edit the '''Object height''' to 15 '''cm''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Now change the value of '''Object height''' to 15 cm.

Change the '''Focal length''' to 20 cm.

|-
|| Cursor on the ray diagram.
|| Let us learn about the ray diagram.

|-
|| Point to the ray which is parallel to the optical axis.

Point to the ray.
|| The ray emerging from the object is parallel to the principal axis of the lens.

This ray after refraction passes through the second principal focus F’.

|-
|| Point to the second ray of light which passes without any deviation.
|| A second ray of light passes through the optical center of the lens.

This ray after refraction emerges without any deviation.

|-
|| Point to the last ray which parallel to the optical axis after refraction.
|| A third ray passes through the first principal focus F.

This ray, after refraction is parallel to the principal axis.

|-
|| Point to show the meeting point of the rays.
|| The image is formed, at point of intersection of the three rays.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us change the position of the object and see where the image appears.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Object distance '''to 35 cm and '''Object height''' to 10 cm.
|| Change the '''Object distance '''to 40 cm and '''Object height''' to 10 cm.

|-
|| In the control panel point to the '''Kind of image''' formed.

'''real, inverted''' and '''equal dimension'''.
|| The '''Kind of image ''' is '''real, inverted '''and '''equal dimension'''.

|-
|| Point to show the values of following.

'''Object distance'''

'''Object height'''

'''Image distance '''

'''Image height.'''
|| This is the condition for''' 2F''', when object is at''' 2F''' the image will appear at '''2F'''’.

Here the object distance and height will be equal to image distance and image height.

|-
|| Drag the object between '''2F''' and '''F'''.

Drag the object to 10 cm.
|| Drag the object between the '''2F''' and '''F.'''

Drag the object to''' 10 cm.'''

Here we can use the scale to take the measurement.

|-
|| Point to the image formed.
|| Observe that the image is formed beyond '''2F’'''.

The image formed is '''real''',''' inverted''' and '''magnified'''.

|-
|| Drag the object between''' F '''and optic center.

Drag it to 30 cm.
|| Drag the object between '''F''' and optic center.

Drag the object to 30 cm.

|-
|| Point to the image (green arrow).
|| Observe that image is formed at the first principal focus behind the object.

Here the image formed is '''virtual''', '''upright''', and '''magnified'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment

Change the focal length of a convex lens to 10 cm and its object distance to 15 cm.

What characteristics of the image do you observe?

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us move on to next '''App'''.

|-
|| To open the '''App''' right click on '''refractor_en.htm.

Select option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser.'''
|| To open the''' App''' right click on '''refractor_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.

|-
|| Point to the''' App.'''
|| The '''App '''opens with a '''Refracting Astronomical Telescope.'''

|-
|| Point the cursor to show the information.
|| Before moving to the simulation please read the information given on the screen.

|-
||Scroll down.
||Scroll down the screen.

|-
|| Point to the bigger lens.
|| In the yellow panel the bigger lens is the objective.

The objective has a large focal length.

|-
|| Point to the smaller lens.
|| Here the smaller lens is an Eyepiece.

|-
|| Point to the red coloured rays.
|| The red coloured rays indicate the light from a distant object.

|-
|| Move the cursor to show the path of the rays.
|| Light rays from a distant object enter the objective lens.

After refraction a real image is formed at the second focal point.

|-
|| Point to the eyepiece.
|| Then the eyepiece magnifies the image.

The image formed is enlarged and inverted.

|-
|| Point to the black circle which is at the bottom right corner.
|| The magnified image of six brightest star of the pleiades is seen in the black circle.

|-
|| In the green control panel point to '''Focal length''' of '''Objective '''and '''Eyepiece'''.
|| In the green panel, '''Focal lengths''' of '''Objective''' and '''Eyepiece''' can be edited.

|-
|| Highlight this sentence from the '''App'''(2nd para 1st line).
|| Here we can vary the '''Focal lengths '''of '''Objective''' and '''Eyepiece''' from 0.05 '''m '''to 0.5 '''m'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Angles'''

'''Objective '''and '''Eyepiece'''.

Point to '''Magnification'''.
|| As per the changes in the focal lengths,

'''App '''calculates '''Angles''' and '''Magnification'''.

|-
|| Scroll down to see the formula for magnification.
|| At the bottom of the screen '''App''' has given the formula for magnification.

|-
|| Point to the formula.
|| That is:

'''v'''<nowiki>= - f</nowiki>1/ f2 

Here v is the magnification

f1 is the focal length of Objective and

f2 is the focal length of Eyepiece.

|-
||
|| Let us calculate the magnification using the data from the '''App'''.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Focal length''' of the '''Objective''' to 0.45 m

and '''Eyepiece''' to 0.1''' m.'''
|| Change the '''Focal length''' of '''Objective''' to 0.45 '''m '''and '''Eyepiece''' to 0.1''' m.'''

|-
|| Point to the observed value.
|| Observe that '''App '''has calculated the value for magnification.

|-
|| Point to the black circle.
|| Notice the changes in the black circle.

If we increase the focal length of the Objective image will be more magnified.

|-
||
|| Let us now calculate the length of the telescope tube.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Change the '''Focal lengths '''of the '''Objective '''and '''Eyepiece''' to their default values.

Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Telescope Tube'''

'''Length of the tube is sum of the focal lengths'''

'''of objective and eyepiece'''.

'''L= f1 + f2'''

'''<nowiki>= 0.50 + 0.10</nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>= 0.6 m</nowiki>'''
|| Formula to calculate the length of the telescope tube is sum of the focal lengths of objective and eyepiece.

That is: L= f1 + f2.

Here f1 is focal length of Objective and f2 is focal length of Eyepiece.

Substitute the focal lengths and calculate the length of the telescope tube.

Observe that the length of the telescope is 0.6 '''m'''.

|-
|| Edit the values of '''Focal length''' of '''Objective '''to 0.1 '''m'''

and''' Eyepiece''' to 0.5''' m'''.
|| Now reverse the '''Focal lengths '''of the '''Objective''' and '''Eyepiece'''.

|-
|| Point to the single dot in the second black circle.
|| Observe that the six brightest stars of pleiades appear to be a single point.

|-
||
|| This is because the focal length of the '''Objective''' is smaller than that of the '''Eyepiece'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Assignment'''

An astronomical telescope has an objective of focal length

0.45 m and an eyepiece of focal length 0.25 m.

Find the magnification produced by the telescope.

Verify the calculated value with the ones shown in the App.'''
|| As an assignment solve this numerical.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

Changed the focal length and saw the kind of image formed.

Changed the object distance and object height and saw the kind of image formed.

Calculated the magnification and length of the telescope tube.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|| These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
||The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C3/Convex-Lenses/English

2020-04-27T12:18:01Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with " {|border=1 |- || '''Visual Cue ''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Slide Number 1 ''' '''Title Slide''' || Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Convex Lenses.''' |- || '''Slid..."

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual Cue '''
|| '''Narration'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 1 '''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to the spoken tutorial on '''Convex Lenses.'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning objective '''
|| At the end of this tutorial you will be able to,

Change the focal length and see the kind of image formed.

Change the object distance and object height and see the kind of image formed.

Calculate the magnification and length of the telescope tube.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox Web Browser version 62.0.3

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

[https://spoken-tutorial.org/ https://spoken-tutorial.org/] '''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with topics in '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the Pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| Point to the file in the downloads folder
|| I have already downloaded '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Apps on Physics'''
|| In this tutorial we will use,

'''Image Formation by Converging Lenses '''and

'''Refracting Astronomical Telescope Apps'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''imageconverginglens_en.htm''' file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right click on '''imageconverginglens_en.htm '''file.

Select the '''Open With Firefox web Browser '''option'''.'''

'''Image Formation by Converging Lenses App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Point to the convex lens in the App.
|| The '''App''' shows a ray diagram of the convex lens.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Converging Lense'''

Show the ray diagram with all the positions.

'''The image is given at the end of this script.'''
|| Before moving to the App let us first be familiar with ray diagrams.

Let us define principal axis.

It is an imaginary line passing through the optical center.

A vertical axis divides the lens into two equal halves.

There are four positions on the principal axis, these positions are 2F , F , F’ and 2F’.

F is the focal length and 2Fis the twice the distance of focal length.

F’ and 2F’ is on the opposite side of the lense with the same distance as F and 2F’.

|-
|| Open App.
|| Let us open the App.

|-
|| Point to the scale at the bottom of the yellow panel.
|| Let us use the scale to spot the positions of focal length F and 2F.

|-
|| Point to show the Zero on the scale.

Point to '''Object distance'''.

Move the screen using the pressed mouse.
|| Initially the object is placed at the zero position of the scale.

The distance of the object from the lens is 50 cm.

The vertical black line beyond the lens is a screen.

This screen can be moved back and forth.

|-
|| Point to the blue arrow.
|| Blue arrow indicates the height of the object.

It is placed beyond 2F.

|-
||
|| 2F is twice the distance of the focal length F.

|-
|| Show it on the scale.
|| From the App, the focal length is 10 cm, so position of 2F has to be at 20 cm.

|-
|| Point to the green arrow.
|| Green arrow indicates the image formed by the convex lens.

|-
|| In the green control panel point to '''Focal length''',

'''Object distance''', and '''Object height'''.
|| In the green control panel we can edit the values of the following parameters.

|-
|| Edit the '''Focal length''' to 20 '''cm''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Change the '''Focal length''' value of the '''lens''' to 20 '''cm '''and press''' Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to the radio buttons Principle light rays and Bundle of light rays.
|| At the bottom of the green panel there are two radio buttons.

'''Principal light rays''' and '''Bundle of light rays'''.

|-
|| Point to Principal light rays.
|| By default '''Principal light rays '''option is selected.

|-
|| Click on the drop down list.
|| A drop down is provided to '''Emphasize''' different paramet ers.

|-
|| Click on the drop down and Select''' Object distance.'''
|| From the drop down list, select '''Object distance.'''

|-
|| Point to the object distance.
Point to blinking line.
|| Observe that the '''App '''emphasizes the object distance using a blinking line.

The blinking line disappears after sometime.

|-
|| Drag the object(blue arrow) to show the changes in object distance and height.
|| We can also change the object distance and object height by dragging the object.

As we drag the value in the text-box changes accordingly.

|-
|| Press the '''F5 '''key on the keyboard
|| Press the '''F5 '''key on the keyboard to refresh the''' App'''.

|-
|| Edit the '''Object height''' to 15 '''cm''' and press '''Enter'''.
|| Now change the value of '''Object height''' to 15 cm.

|-
|| Cursor on the ray diagram.
|| Let us learn about the ray diagram.

|-
|| Point to the ray which is parallel to the optical axis.

Point to the ray.
|| The ray emerging from the '''object''' is parallel to the principal axis of the lens.

This ray after refraction passes through the second principal focus F’.

|-
|| Point to the second ray of light which passes without any deviation.
|| A second ray of light passes through the optical center of the lens.

This ray after refraction emerges without any deviation.

|-
|| Point to the last ray which parallel to the optical axis after refraction.
|| A third ray passes through the first principal focus F.

This ray, after refraction is parallel to the principal axis.

|-
|| Point to show the meeting point of the rays.
|| The image is formed, at point of intersection of the three rays.

|-
||
|| Let us change the position of the object and see where the image appears.

|-
|| Edit the value of focal length to 20 cm.
|| Change the focal length to 20 cm.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Object distance '''to 35 cm and '''Object height''' to 10 cm.
|| Change the '''Object distance '''to 40 cm and '''Object height''' to 10 cm.

|-
|| In the control panel point to the '''Kind of image''' formed.

'''real, inverted''' and '''equal dimension'''.
|| The '''Kind of image '''formed is '''real, inverted '''and '''equal dimension'''.

|-
|| Point to show the values of following.

'''Object distance'''

'''Object height'''

'''Image distance '''

'''Image height.'''
|| This is the condition for''' 2F''', when object is at''' 2F''' the image will appear at '''2F'''’.

Here the object distance and height will be equal to image distance and height.

|-
|| Drag the object between '''2F''' and '''F'''.

Drag the object to 10 cm.
|| Drag the object between the '''2F''' and '''F.'''

Drag the object to''' 10 cm.'''

Here we can use the scale to take the measurement.

|-
|| Point to the image formed.
|| Observe that image is formed beyond '''2F’''' and the image is '''real''',''' inverted''' and '''magnified'''.

|-
|| Drag the object between''' F '''and optic center.

Drag it to 30 cm.
|| Drag the object between '''F''' and optic center.

Drag the object to 30 cm.

|-
|| Point to the image (green arrow).
|| Observe that image is formed at the first principal focus behind the object.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment

Change the focal length of a convex lens to 10 cm and its object distance to 15 cm.

What characteristics of the image do you observe?

|-
||
|| Let us move on to next '''App'''.

|-
|| To open the '''App''' right click on '''refractor_en.htm.

Select option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser.'''
|| To open the''' App''' right click on '''refractor_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open with Firefox Web Browser'''.

|-
|| Point to the''' App.'''
|| The '''App '''opens with a '''Refracting Astronomical Telescope.'''

|-
|| Point to the bigger lens.
|| In the yellow panel the bigger lens is the objective.

The objective has a large focal length.

|-
|| Point to the smaller lens.
|| Here the smaller lens is an Eyepiece.

|-
|| Point to the red coloured rays.
|| The red coloured rays indicate the light from a distant object.

|-
|| Move the cursor to show the path of the rays.
|| Light rays from a distant object enter the objective lens.

After refraction a real image is formed at the second focal point.

|-
|| Point to the eyepiece.
|| Then the eyepiece magnifies the image.

The image formed is enlarged and inverted.

|-
|| Point to the black circle which is at the bottom right corner.
|| The magnified image of six brightest star of the pleiades is seen in the black circle.

|-
|| In the green control panel point to '''Focal length''' of '''Objective '''and '''Eyepiece'''.
|| In the green panel, Focal lengths of objective and Eyepiece can be edited.

|-
|| Highlight this sentence from the '''App'''(2nd para 1st line).
|| Here we can vary the '''Focal lengths '''of '''Objective''' and '''Eyepiece''' from 0.05 '''m '''to 0.5 '''m'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Angles'''

'''Objective '''and '''Eyepiece'''.

Point to '''Magnification'''.
|| As per the changes in the focal lengths,

'''App '''calculates '''Angles''' and '''Magnification'''.

|-
|| Scroll down to see the formula for magnification.
|| At the bottom of the screen '''App''' has given the formula for magnification.

|-
|| Point to the formula.
|| '''v'''<nowiki>= - f</nowiki>1/ f2 

Here v is the magnification

f1 is the focal length of Objective and

f2 is the focal length of Eyepiece.

|-
||
|| Let us calculate the magnification using the data from the '''App'''.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Focal length''' of the '''Objective''' to 0.45 m

and '''Eyepiece''' to 0.1''' m.'''
|| Change the '''Focal length''' of the '''Objective''' to 0.45 '''m '''and '''Eyepiece''' to 0.1''' m.'''

|-
|| Point to the observed value.
|| Observe that '''App '''has calculated the value for magnification.

|-
|| Point to the black circle.
|| Notice the changes in the black circle.

If we increase the focal length of the Objective image will be more magnified.

|-
||
|| Let us now calculate the length of the telescope tube.

|-
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Change the '''Focal lengths '''of the '''Objective '''and '''Eyepiece''' to their default values.

Press F5 key on the keyboard to restart the '''App'''.or we can just refresh the page.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Telescope Tube'''

'''Length of the tube is sum of the focal lengths'''

'''of objective and eyepiece'''.

'''L= f1 + f2'''

'''<nowiki>= 0.50 + 0.10</nowiki>'''

'''<nowiki>= 0.6 m</nowiki>'''
|| Formula to calculate length of the tube is,

L= f1 + f2.

Here f1 is focal length of Objective and f2 is focal length of Eyepiece.

Substitute the focal lengths and calculate the length of the telescope tube.

Observe that the length of the telescope is 0.6 '''m'''.
|-
|| Drag the rays and point to the changes in the '''Angles''' and the '''Magnification.'''
|| Note that as we drag the rays, there will be changes in both '''Angles''' and '''Magnification'''.

|-
||
|| This happens because the focal lengths of both objective and eyepiece changes.

|-
|| Edit the values of '''Focal length''' of '''Objective '''to 0.1 '''m'''

and''' Eyepiece''' to 0.5''' m'''.
|| Now reverse the '''Focal lengths '''of the '''Objective''' and '''Eyepiece'''.

|-
|| Point to the single dot in the second black circle.
|| Observe that the six brightest stars of pleiades appear to be a single point.

|-
||
|| This is because the focal length of the '''Objective''' is smaller than that of the '''Eyepiece'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Assignment'''

An astronomical telescope has an objective of focal length

0.45 m and an eyepiece of focal length 0.25 m.

Find the magnification produced by the telescope.

Verify the calculated value with the ones shown in the App.'''
|| As an assignment solve this numerical.

|-
||
|| Let us summarise

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''' we have,

Changed the focal length and saw the kind of image formed

Changed the object distance and object height and saw the kind of image formed

Calculated the magnification and length of the telescope tube.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|| These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project.'''

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
||The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD, Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT-Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

QGIS/C4/Nearest-Neighbour-Analysis/English

2020-04-14T06:53:36Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with "{|border=1 |- ||'''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Slide Number 1''' '''Title Slide''' ||Welcome to this tutorial on '''Nearest Neighbour Analysis''' in''' QGIS.'''..."

{|border=1
|-
||'''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
||Welcome to this tutorial on '''Nearest Neighbour Analysis''' in''' QGIS.'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
||In this tutorial, we will learn about
* '''Nearest Neighbour Analysis '''by '''Distance matrix''' method.
* '''Statistics''' using '''Nearest Neighbour Analysis''' tool.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
||Here I am using,

'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version. 16.04

'''QGIS '''version''' '''2.18
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
||To follow this tutorial learner must be familiar with '''QGIS '''interface.
For pre-requisite QGIS tutorials, please use this link.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Example Files for Demonstration'''
||The files required to practise this tutorial are available in the Code files link.

Please download and extract the contents of the folder.

|-
||Point to the '''Code files''' folder on desktop.
||Here I have the folder with the required file to practise this tutorial.

|-
|| Double-click on '''Code files''' folder to open it.
Point to the files.
||Double-click to open the folder.
Here you will find, '''Urban areas.shp''' and '''Volcanoes.shp'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Volcanoes.shp''' and '''Urban Areas.shp'''.
||'''Volcanoes.shp''' layer shows active volcanoes in the world.

'''Urban areas.shp''' shows populated urban areas of the world.

|-
|| Press '''Ctrl''' key and select '''Volcanoes.shp''' and '''Urban Areas.shp'''.

Right-click and open with QGIS Desktop.
||Open the two shape files in QGIS, select both the files.

Right-click and select '''Open with QGIS Desktop''' option from the context menu.

|-
|| Point to Layers panel.

Righ-click on Volcanoes layer and select zoom to layer option.
||QGIS interface opens with two layers loaded in the layers panel.

Right-click on the '''volcanoes '''layer and select '''zoom to layer''' option.

|-
||Cursor on the map.
||On the canvas you will see a map with point features.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us label these point features.

|-
|| Right click on the '''Volcanoes layer.'''

Select''' Properties .'''
|| Right click on '''Volcanoes layer''', from the sub menu click on '''Properties'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the Layer properties dialog-box.
|| '''Layer Properties''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Select '''Labels '''from left panel.
|| Select '''Labels''' from the left panel.

|-
|| From the first drop down select '''Show labels for this layer '''option.
|| Select '''Show labels for this layer''' option from the drop down.

|-
|| Cursor on the '''Label with '''and click on it, from the drop down select '''Name.'''
|| In the '''Label with '''drop down select '''Name'''.

|-
|| Point to the text box.

Choose Arial in the text and click on '''OK '''button at the bottom.

||Here you will find various options to modify the label style.

Choose the required style and click on '''OK '''button.
|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| On the canvas, points with the names is displayed.

|-
|| Follow the same steps as for Volcanoes layer.

Please fast forward and show the Labeling part
|| Similarly let us label Urban areas.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| On the canvas point features are labeled with there cities.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
||QGIS has tools to analyze spatial relationships between features.

One such tool is '''Nearest Neighbour Analysis. '''

|-
|| '''Slide number 6'''

'''Nearest Neighbour Analysis'''.
||'''Nearest Neighbour Analysis '''is used for the following analysis.

1 Finding distance Between two '''Point features'''.

2 Finding features which are closest to a given feature.

|-
|| Cursor on QGIS interface
||First, we will create distance matrix for calculating the distances.

|-
|| Point towards the '''Volcanoes.shp''' layer on Layers panel

Right-click on the '''Volcanoes''' layer.

||Let us open the''' attribute''' table for the '''Volcanoes''' layer.

Right-click on '''Volcanoes''' layer.

Select '''Open Attribute Table''' option.

|-
|| Cursor on the third column of the '''Attribute table'''.

Click on x icon on the top to close the attribute table.
||In the attribute table there are multiple columns.

Various attributes for the point features are listed here.

Names of the volcanoes and their locations are also listed here.

Close the attribute table.

|-
|| Right-click on  '''Urban areas''' layer.

Select '''Open Attribute Table''' option.
||Open the attribute table for the '''Urban areas''' layer.

|-
|| Cursor on the first column of the '''Attribute table'''.

Click on x icon on the top to Close the attribute table.
||Notice the various columns in the table.

You will find names of the cities, countries and other information in this table.

Close the attribute table.
|-
|| Click on '''Vector''' menu.

Select '''Analysis Tools'''.

Select '''Distance Matrix''' option from the sub-menu.
||Let us''' '''calculate the distance between the active volcanoes and nearest cities.

Click on '''Vector''' menu.

Select '''Analysis Tools'''.

Select '''Distance Matrix''' option from the sub-menu.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Distance Matrix''' dialogue-box.
||'''Distance Matrix''' dialogue-box opens.

Please read the description about '''Distance matrix''' on the right-panel.

|-
|| Cursor on the '''Distance Matrix'''.

Click on '''Volcanoes''' in '''Input Point Layer''' drop-down.

Select '''NAME''' as '''Input unique ID field '''

||By default '''Parameters '''tab opens on the screen.

Select the Parameters as shown here.

Select '''Volcanoes''' as an '''Input Point Layer'''.

Select '''NAME''' as '''Input unique ID field '''

|-
|| Click on '''Urban Areas '''in''' Target Point layer '''drop-down.

Click on '''City''' in '''Target unique ID field''' drop-down.

Keep''' Output matrix type''' as '''Linear'''.

||Select '''Urban Areas '''as''' Target Point Layer'''.

Select '''City''' as '''Target unique ID field'''.

Keep''' Output matrix type''' as '''Linear'''.

|-
|| select 2 in '''Use only the nearest (K) target Points''' field.
||Let us find the distance from the volcano to two nearest cities.

Hence, select 2 in '''Use only the nearest (K) target Points''' field.

|-
|| Click on the 3 dots button next to '''Distance Matrix''' field.

From the drop-down menu, select '''Save to File''' option.
||Click on the 3 dots button next to '''Distance Matrix''' field.

From the drop-down menu, select '''Save to file..''' option.

|-
|| Type '''Distance-1''' in the name field.

Select '''Desktop''' folder for location.

Click on '''Save '''button.
||In the dialog-box, give an appropriate name and location.

Choose''' Files of type''', as''' csv '''.

In the '''Encoding''' field choose '''System'''.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| In the '''Distance matrix''' dialog-box check the check-box for the following.

Check the check-box for '''Open output file after running the algorithm'''.

Click on the '''Run '''button at the bottom-right corner of the dialogue box.
||In the '''Distance matrix''' dialog-box check the check-box for the following.

'''Open output file after running the algorithm'''.

Click on the '''Run '''button at the bottom-right corner of the dialogue box.

The process will take '''few '''seconds.

|-
|| Cursor on the '''Layers Panel.'''
||A new '''csv layer''' named as '''Distance matrix''' is added in the '''Layers''' panel.

|-
|| Right click on the distance matrix layer.

Click on the '''open attribute layer.'''
||Open the attribute table for '''Distance matrix''' layer.

|-
|| Cursor on the columns of attribute tables.
||In the attribute table there are three columns.

The last column is the distance between the volcano and nearest city.

Please note, here the distance is in meters.

This is because the layers are projected in WGS 84 UTM Zone 46N system.

|-
|| Cursor on the attribute table.
||Depending on the CRS, the distance can also be in layer units or in degrees.

|-
|| Cursor on the Cities column
||Also observe that for each volcano, two nearest cities are listed.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''
'''Nearest Neighbour Analysis'''
||Let us get some statistical analysis for the layers using Nearest neighbour tool.

We will run a nearest neighbour analysis to analyze the distribution of features.

The results will establish the distribution as clustered, dispersed or random.

Close the attribute table.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Vector '''menu bar.

Scroll down and click on the '''Analysis Tools '''option.

From the sub-menu, Select the '''Nearest Neighbour analysis'''.
||Click on '''Vector''' menu.

Scroll down and click on the '''Analysis Tools '''option.

From the sub-menu, Select the '''Nearest Neighbour analysis'''.

|-
|| Point towards '''Nearest Neighbour Analysis''' dialog-box.

Click on '''Run''' button at the bottom-right corner.
||'''Nearest Neighbour Analysis''' dialog-box opens.

Read the information given about '''Nearest Neighbour analysis''' on the right-panel.

Select '''Volcanoes''' layer in the '''Points '''drop-down.

Click on '''Run''' button at the bottom-right corner.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Results''' window.

Point to parameters.
||'''Results''' window opens.

Some statistical parameters for the volcanoes layer are listed here.

|-
||Point the cursor to each of the parameters.
||'''Observed mean distance'''

'''Expected mean distance'''

'''Nearest neighbour index'''

'''Number of point features''' and

'''Z-score'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Nearest Neighbour Index'''

The expected distance is the average distance between neighbours in a hypothetical random distribution.
||The '''Nearest Neighbour Index''' is expressed as the ratio of the '''Observed Mean Distance''' to the '''Expected Mean Distance'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Nearest Neighbour Index'''

If the index is less than 1, the pattern exhibits clustering.

If the index is greater than 1, the trend is toward dispersion or competition.
||If the index value is less than 1, the pattern exhibits clustering;

If the index value is greater than 1, the trend is towards dispersion.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
||Here the '''Nearest Neighbor Index''' value of 0.2 indicates clustering.

Which means the volcanoes are located close to each other.

Similarly a negative Z-score also indicates clustering of point features.

|-
|| Click on x icon on the top.
||Close the '''Results''' window.

|-
|| '''Save''' your '''Project'''
||Save the project using '''Project''' menu.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Summary'''
||In this tutorial we have learnt about

* '''Nearest Neighbour Analysis''' by '''Distance Matrix''' method.
* Statistics using '''Nearest Neighbour Analysis''' tool.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Assignment'''
||'''Assignment'''
Create '''Distance matrix''' for nearest 5 Volcanoes to urban areas.

Hint: Use '''Urban areas''' as Input and '''K''' as 5.

|-
|| '''Results of assignments'''
||Your completed assignment should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial'''
||The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
||The Spoken Tutorial project conducts workshops and gives certificates.
For more details please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Spoken Tutorial Forum'''
||Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

||The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by''', MHRD''' '''Government''' of India.
This tutorial is contributed by Ambadas Maske from College of Engineering Pune, Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.

Thankyou for joining.
|-
|}

QGIS/C4/Create-Contour-Lines/English

2020-01-30T05:56:12Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
||'''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Create Contour Lines''' in '''QGIS'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''

|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,
* Clip the area in '''DEM''' using the '''Clipper''' tool.

* Show '''contour''' lines for the '''DEM'''.

* And mark the highest elevated area on the '''contour '''map.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| Here I am using

*'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04

*QGIS version 2.18

*And a working Internet connection.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with '''QGIS''' interface.

For the prerequisite tutorials in this series please visit this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Example file'''
||'''DEM''' data required to practise this tutorial is provided in the '''Code files''' link.

Please download and extract the contents of the folder.

|-
|| Cursor on the code files folder.

Double-click on the folder.
||I have saved this folder on the '''Desktop'''.

Double-click on the folder to open it.

|-
|| Right-click on '''srtm_51_09.tif '''file and open with '''QGIS''' Desktop.
|| Right-click on '''srtm.tif''' file and select '''Open with QGIS Desktop'''.

The map opens on the screen.

|-
|| Click on '''layer '''on the '''menu bar'''.

Click on '''Add Layer'''.

Click on '''Add Raster layer'''.

|| You can also open the '''tif '''file using '''Add Raster Layer '''option in '''Layer''' menu.

|-
|| Point to the DEM on canvas.
|| On the canvas you will see '''DEM''' of the terrain.

|-
|| Click on '''Raster menu >>Extraction>>Contour'''.
||'''Contour lines''' for this '''DEM''' can be generated using '''Contour tool''' in '''Raster menu'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Contour lines'''

It is a line on a map joining points of equal height above or below sea level.

Contour lines help us to determine the highest and least elevated areas on the map.
||About '''Contour lines'''.

It is a line on a map joining points of equal height above or below sea level.

Contour lines help us to determine the highest and least elevated areas on the map.

|-
|| Cursor on the map on '''QGIS''' interface.
||We can draw contour lines for the selected area on this map.

|-
|| Click on '''Raster menu>>Extraction>>Clipper'''.
||We will use the '''Clipper''' tool in the '''Raster''' menu to clip the area.

|-
|| Click on the menu item '''Raster'''.

Select '''Extraction''' from drop down.

Select '''Clipper'''.
||Click on the '''Raster '''menu.

Click on '''Extraction''' from drop-down.

Click on '''Clipper'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Clipper''' dialog-box.
||'''Clipper''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Input file '''field.
||Select '''Input file''' as the '''DEM''' layer.

Here, by default this layer is already selected.

|-
|| Click on '''Select''' button next to '''Output file '''field.
||Click on '''Select''' button for '''Output file'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog box.

In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Clip-DEM.tif'''.

Click on '''Save '''button.
||'''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog-box opens.

In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Clip-DEM.tif'''.

Click on '''Save '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box for '''No data value'''.
||In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box for '''No data value'''.

Let the value be zero.

|-
|| Under the heading '''Clipping mode''',

Click on '''Extent '''radio button.
||Under the heading '''Clipping mode''',
click on '''Extent''' radio button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''QGIS''' window.

Point to cursor.

Hold left mouse and draw rectangle over Mumbai region.
||Switch to the '''QGIS''' window.

The cursor is now seen as '''plus'''(+) sign.

Hold your left mouse button and draw a rectangle covering the area of interest.

|-
|| Point to Mumbai region.
|| For this demonstration I will select Mumbai region.

|-
|| In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box next to
'''Load into canvas when finished'''.
||In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.

|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner.
||Keep other default settings as such.

Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on '''OK'''.

Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Once the process completes, close the pop-up windows by clicking on '''OK''' buttons.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button at the bottom right corner in the '''Clipper''' dialog-box .
|| Click on '''Close''' button at the bottom right corner in the '''Clipper''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Point to '''Clip-DEM layer'''.
||On the canvas you will see a new layer loaded.

|-
||Uncheck check boxes for '''srtm 51 09, Hillshade, Slope layers'''.
||Disable all the layers in the '''Layers Panel''', except '''Clip-DEM''' layer.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Now we are ready to generate contour lines for this map using '''Contour''' tool.

|-
|| Click on the '''Raster''' menu, select '''Extraction''', from the sub-menu,

Click on '''Contour'''.
||Click on the '''Raster '''menu.

Scroll down to '''Extraction'''.

From the sub-menu, click on '''Contour'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Contour''' dialog-box.

From the '''Input file''' drop-down select '''Clip-DEM''' layer.
||'''Contour''' dialog-box opens.

From the '''Input file''' drop-down, select '''Clip-DEM''' layer.

|-
|| Click on '''Select '''button next to '''Output file '''field.

'''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog box opens.
||Click on '''Select '''button for the '''Output file'''.

Dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Name the file as '''Contour.shp.'''

Click on '''Save '''button.
||In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Contour.shp'''.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| In the '''Contour''' dialog box, select '''Interval between contour lines''' as 50.
||In the '''Contour''' dialog box, select '''Interval between contour lines''' as 50.

This will generate contour lines for 50 meter intervals.

|-
|| Click on the check-box next to '''Attribute name'''.
||Click on the check-box next to '''Attribute name'''.

Elevation value for each contour line will be recorded as an attribute '''E L E V'''.

|-
|| Check the box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.

Click on '''OK''' button.
||Check the box next to '''Load into canvas''' '''when finished'''.
Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner in the contour dialog box.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on '''OK'''.

Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Once the process completes, close the pop-up windows by clicking on '''OK''' buttons.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close''' button to close the '''Contour''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Contour''' layer.
||A new layer '''Contour''' is added in the '''Layers panel'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''Contour''' '''Layer'''.

Select '''Styles'''.

Rotate the triangle to change the colour.
||Let us change the colour of the contour lines.

Right click on '''Contour''' layer.

Select '''Styles'''.

Rotate the triangle to change the colour.

Choose the colour of your choice.

|-
|| Uncheck check boxes for

'''srtm 51 09, Clip-DEM '''layer.
|| Hide the other layers by un-checking the check-boxes in the '''Layers panel'''.

|-
|| Right-click on the '''Contour''' layer, click on '''Open Attribute table'''.
||Open the '''Attribute table '''for the '''Contour''' layer.

|-
|| Point to '''ELEV''' column on the attribute table.

||In the attribute table, each line feature has an attribute named '''E L E V'''.

The value given in this column is the height in meters for that contour line.

|-
|| Click on '''ELEV''' column header.
||Click on the column header a few times to sort the values in descending order.

|-
|| Point to 1st row.
|| The first row represents the highest elevation in our data.

|-
|| Point to last row.
||Scroll down the table, the last row represents the lowest elevation.

|-
|| Click on the first row.

Click on '''Zoom map to the selected rows''' button in the menu bar.
||Scroll up and click on the first row to select it

Click on '''Zoom map to the selected rows''' button on the tool bar.

|-
|| Point to map on '''QGIS''' canvas.
||Switch to the '''QGIS''' window.

You will see the selected contour line highlighted in yellow.

|-
|| Point to the highlighted point.
||This is the area of the highest elevation in this '''data-set'''.

|-
|| Click on “'''Save As'''” tool on tool bar.

Type “Contour-Mumbai”

Select “'''Desktop'''” as Location.

Click on '''Save''' button.
||Save this project.

Click on “'''Save As'''” tool on the tool bar.

Give an appropriate name.

Save it at a convenient location.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Summary'''
|| Let us summarize,

In this tutorial we have learnt to

* Clip the area in '''DEM''' using the '''Clipper''' tool.

* Show '''contour''' lines for the '''DEM'''.

* Mark the highest elevated area on the '''contour''' map.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment '''

* Create '''contour '''lines for the area of your choice on the '''DEM'''.

* Find the highest elevation for the area.

||Here is the assignment.
* Create '''contour '''lines for the area of your choice on the '''DEM'''.

* Find the highest elevation for the area.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial Project'''
||This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Spoken Tutorial Workshops'''

|| The spoken tutorial project team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Forum for specific question'''

|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Acknowledgements'''
||The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune.

Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

QGIS/C4/Create-Contour-Lines/English

2020-01-29T12:20:09Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
||'''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Create Contour Lines''' in '''QGIS'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''

|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,
* Clip the area in '''DEM''' using the '''Clipper''' tool.

* Show '''contour''' lines for the '''DEM'''.

* And mark the highest elevated area on the '''contour '''map.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| Here I am using

*'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04

*QGIS version 2.18

*And a working Internet connection.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with '''QGIS''' interface.

For the prerequisite tutorials in this series please visit this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Example file'''
||'''DEM''' data required to practise this tutorial is provided in the '''Code files''' link.

Please download and extract the contents of the folder.

|-
|| Cursor on the code files folder.

Double-click on the folder.
||I have saved this folder on the '''Desktop'''.

Double-click on the folder to open it.

|-
|| Right-click on '''srtm_51_09.tif '''file and open with '''QGIS''' Desktop.
|| Right-click on '''srtm.tif''' file and select '''Open with QGIS Desktop'''.

The map opens on the screen.

|-
|| Click on '''layer '''on the '''menu bar'''.

Click on '''Add Layer'''.

Click on '''Add Raster layer'''.

|| You can also open the '''tif '''file using '''Add Raster Layer '''option in '''Layer''' menu.

|-
|| Point to the DEM on canvas.
|| On the canvas you will see '''DEM''' of the terrain.

|-
|| Click on '''Raster menu >>Extraction>>Contour'''.
||'''Contour lines''' for this '''DEM''' can be generated using '''Contour tool''' in '''Raster menu'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Contour lines'''

It is a line on a map joining points of equal height above or below sea level.

Contour lines help us to determine the highest and least elevated areas on the map.
||About '''Contour lines'''.

It is a line on a map joining points of equal height above or below sea level.

Contour lines help us to determine the highest and least elevated areas on the map.

|-
|| Cursor on the map on '''QGIS''' interface.
||We can draw contour lines for the selected area on this map.

|-
|| Click on '''Raster menu>>Extraction>>Clipper'''.
||We will use the '''Clipper''' tool in the '''Raster''' menu to clip the area.

|-
|| Click on the menu item '''Raster'''.

Select '''Extraction''' from drop down.

Select '''Clipper'''.
||Click on the '''Raster '''menu.

Click on '''Extraction''' from drop-down.

Click on '''Clipper'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Clipper''' dialog-box.
||'''Clipper''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Input file '''field.
||Select '''Input file''' as the '''DEM''' layer.

Here, by default this layer is already selected.

|-
|| Click on '''Select''' button next to '''Output file '''field.
||Click on '''Select''' button for '''Output file'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog box.

In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Clip-DEM.tif'''.

Click on '''Save '''button.
||'''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog-box opens.

In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Clip-DEM.tif'''.

Click on '''Save '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box for '''No data value'''.
||In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box for '''No data value'''.

Let the value be zero.

|-
|| Under the heading '''Clipping mode''',

Click on '''Extent '''radio button.
||Under the heading '''Clipping mode''',
click on '''Extent''' radio button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''QGIS''' window.

Point to cursor.

Hold left mouse and draw rectangle over Mumbai region.
||Switch to the '''QGIS''' window.

The cursor is now seen as '''plus'''(+) sign.

Hold your left mouse button and draw a rectangle covering the area of interest.

|-
|| Point to Mumbai region.
|| For this demonstration I will select Mumbai region.

|-
|| In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.
||In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.

|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner.
||Keep other default settings as such.

Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on '''OK'''.

Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Once the process completes, close the pop-up windows by clicking on '''OK''' buttons.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button at the bottom right corner in the '''Clipper''' dialog-box .
|| Click on '''Close''' button at the bottom right corner in the '''Clipper''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Point to '''Clip-DEM layer'''.
||On the canvas you will see a new layer loaded.

|-
||Uncheck check boxes for '''srtm 51 09, Hillshade, Slope layers'''.
||Disable all the layers in the '''Layers Panel''', except '''Clip-DEM''' layer.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Now we are ready to generate contour lines for this map using '''Contour''' tool.

|-
|| Click on the '''Raster''' menu, select '''Extraction''', from the sub-menu, Click on '''Contour'''.
||Click on the '''Raster '''menu.

Scroll down to '''Extraction'''.

From the sub-menu, click on '''Contour'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Contour''' dialog-box.

From the '''Input file''' drop-down select '''Clip-DEM''' layer.
||'''Contour''' dialog-box opens.

From the '''Input file''' drop-down, select '''Clip-DEM''' layer.

|-
|| Click on '''Select '''button next to '''Output file '''field.

'''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog box opens.
||Click on '''Select '''button for the '''Output file'''.

Dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Name the file as '''Contour.shp.'''

Click on '''Save '''button.
||In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Contour.shp'''.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| In the '''Contour''' dialog box, select '''Interval between contour lines''' as 50.
||In the '''Contour''' dialog box, select '''Interval between contour lines''' as 50.

This will generate contour lines for 50 meter intervals.

|-
|| Click on the check-box next to '''Attribute name'''.
||Click on the check-box next to '''Attribute name'''.

Elevation value for each contour line will be recorded as an attribute '''E L E V'''.

|-
|| Check the box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.

Click on '''OK''' button.
||Check the box next to '''Load into canvas''' '''when finished'''.
Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner in the contour dialog box.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on '''OK'''.

Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Once the process completes, close the pop-up windows by clicking on '''OK''' buttons.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close''' button to close the '''Contour''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Contour''' layer.
||A new layer '''Contour''' is added in the '''Layers panel'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''Contour''' '''Layer'''.

Select '''Styles'''.

Rotate the triangle to change the colour.
||Let us change the colour of the contour lines.

Right click on '''Contour''' layer.

Select '''Styles'''.

Rotate the triangle to change the colour.

Choose the colour of your choice.

|-
|| Uncheck check boxes for

'''srtm 51 09, Clip-DEM '''layer.
|| Hide the other layers by un-checking the check-boxes in the '''Layers panel'''.

|-
|| Right-click on the '''Contour''' layer, click on '''Open Attribute table'''.
||Open the '''Attribute table '''for the '''Contour''' layer.

|-
|| Point to '''ELEV''' column on the attribute table.

||In the attribute table, each line feature has an attribute named '''E L E V'''.

The value given in this column is the height in meters for that contour line.

|-
|| Click on '''ELEV''' column header.
||Click on the column header a few times to sort the values in descending order.

|-
|| Point to 1st row.
|| The first row represents the highest elevation in our data.

|-
|| Point to last row.
||Scroll down the table, the last row represents the lowest elevation.

|-
|| Click on the first row.

Click on '''Zoom map to the selected rows''' button in the menu bar.
||Scroll up and click on the first row to select it

Click on '''Zoom map to the selected rows''' button on the tool bar.

|-
|| Point to map on '''QGIS''' canvas.
||Switch to the '''QGIS''' window.

You will see the selected contour line highlighted in yellow.

|-
|| Point to the highlighted point.
||This is the area of the highest elevation in this '''data-set'''.

|-
|| Click on “'''Save As'''” tool on tool bar.

Type “Contour-Mumbai”

Select “'''Desktop'''” as Location.

Click on '''Save''' button.
||Save this project.

Click on “'''Save As'''” tool on the tool bar.

Give an appropriate name.

Save it at a convenient location.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Summary'''
|| Let us summarize,

In this tutorial we have learnt to

* Clip the area in '''DEM''' using the '''Clipper''' tool.

* Show '''contour''' lines for the '''DEM'''.

* Mark the highest elevated area on the '''contour''' map.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment '''

* Create '''contour '''lines for the area of your choice on the '''DEM'''.

* Find the highest elevation for the area.

||Here is the assignment.
* Create '''contour '''lines for the area of your choice on the '''DEM'''.

* Find the highest elevation for the area.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial Project'''
||This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Spoken Tutorial Workshops'''

|| The spoken tutorial project team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Forum for specific question'''

|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Acknowledgements'''
||The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune.

Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

QGIS/C4/Create-Contour-Lines/English

2020-01-24T10:40:14Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
||'''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Create Contour Lines''' in '''QGIS'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''

|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,
* Clip the area in '''DEM''' using the '''Clipper''' tool.

* Show '''contour''' lines for the '''DEM'''.

* And mark the highest elevated area on the '''contour '''map.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| Here I am using

*'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04

*QGIS version 2.18

*And a working Internet connection.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with '''QGIS''' interface.

For the prerequisite tutorials in this series please visit this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Example file'''
||'''DEM''' data required to practise this tutorial is provided in the '''Code files''' link.

Please download and extract the contents of the folder.

|-
|| Cursor on the code files folder.

Double-click on the folder.
||I have saved this folder on the '''Desktop'''.

Double-click on the folder to open it.

|-
|| Right-click on '''srtm_51_09.tif '''file and open with '''QGIS''' Desktop.
|| Right-click on '''srtm.tif''' file and select '''Open with QGIS Desktop'''.

The map opens on the screen.

|-
|| Click on '''layer '''on the '''menu bar'''.

Click on '''Add Layer'''.

Click on '''Add Raster layer'''.

|| You can also open the '''tif '''file using '''Add Raster Layer '''option in '''Layer''' menu.

|-
|| Point to the DEM on canvas.
|| On the canvas you will see '''DEM''' of the terrain.

|-
|| Click on '''Raster menu >>Extraction>>Contour'''.
||'''Contour lines''' for this '''DEM''' can be generated using '''Contour tool''' in '''Raster menu'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Contour lines'''

It is a line on a map joining points of equal height above or below sea level.

This will help us to determine the highest and least elevated areas on the map.
||About '''Contour lines'''.

It is a line on a map joining points of equal height above or below sea level.

This will help us to determine the highest and least elevated areas on the map.

|-
|| Cursor on the map on '''QGIS''' interface.
||We can draw contour lines for the selected area on this map.

|-
|| Click on '''Raster menu>>Extraction>>Clipper'''.
||We will use the '''Clipper''' tool in the '''Raster''' menu to clip the area.

|-
|| Click on the menu item '''Raster'''.

Select '''Extraction''' from drop down.

Select '''Clipper'''.
||Click on the '''Raster '''menu.

Click on '''Extraction''' from drop-down.

Click on '''Clipper'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Clipper''' dialog-box.
||'''Clipper''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Input file '''field.
||Select '''Input file''' as the '''DEM''' layer.

Here, by default this layer is already selected.

|-
|| Click on '''Select''' button next to '''Output file '''field.
||Click on '''Select''' button for '''Output file'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog box.

In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Clip-DEM.tif'''.

Click on '''Save '''button.
||'''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog-box opens.

In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Clip-DEM.tif'''.

Click on '''Save '''button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box for '''No data value'''.
||In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box for '''No data value'''.

Let the value be zero.

|-
|| Under the heading '''Clipping mode''',

Click on '''Extent '''radio button.
||Under the heading '''Clipping mode''',
click on '''Extent''' radio button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''QGIS''' window.

Point to cursor.

Hold left mouse and draw rectangle over Mumbai region.
||Switch to the '''QGIS''' window.

The cursor is now seen as '''plus'''(+) sign.

Hold your left mouse button and draw a rectangle covering the area of interest.

|-
|| Point to Mumbai region.
|| For this demonstration I will select Mumbai region.

|-
|| In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.
||In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.

|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner.
||Keep other default settings as such.

Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on '''OK'''.

Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Once the process completes, close the pop-up windows by clicking on '''OK''' buttons.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button at the bottom right corner in the '''Clipper''' dialog-box .
|| Click on '''Close''' button at the bottom right corner in the '''Clipper''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Point to '''Clip-DEM layer'''.
||On the canvas you will see a new layer loaded.

|-
||Uncheck check boxes for '''srtm 51 09, Hillshade, Slope layers'''.
||Disable all the layers in the '''Layers Panel''', except '''Clip-DEM''' layer.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Now we are ready to generate contour lines for this map using '''Contour''' tool.

|-
|| Click on the '''Raster''' menu, select '''Extraction''', from the sub-menu, Click on '''Contour'''.
||Click on the '''Raster '''menu.

Scroll down to '''Extraction'''.

From the sub-menu, click on '''Contour'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Contour''' dialog-box.

From the '''Input file''' drop-down select '''Clip-DEM''' layer.
||'''Contour''' dialog-box opens.

From the '''Input file''' drop-down, select '''Clip-DEM''' layer.

|-
|| Click on '''Select '''button next to '''Output file '''field.

'''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog box opens.
||Click on '''Select '''button for the '''Output file'''.

Dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Name the file as '''Contour.shp.'''

Click on '''Save '''button.
||In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Contour.shp'''.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| In the '''Contour''' dialog box, select '''Interval between contour lines''' as 50.
||In the '''Contour''' dialog box, select '''Interval between contour lines''' as 50.

This will generate contour lines for 50 meter intervals.

|-
|| Click on the check-box next to '''Attribute name'''.
||Click on the check-box next to '''Attribute name'''.

Elevation value for each contour line will be recorded as an attribute '''E L E V'''.

|-
|| Check the box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.

Click on '''OK''' button.
||Check the box next to '''Load into canvas''' '''when finished'''.
Click on '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner in the contour dialog box.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on '''OK'''.

Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Once the process completes, close the pop-up windows by clicking on '''OK''' buttons.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close''' button to close the '''Contour''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Contour''' layer.
||A new layer '''Contour''' is added in the '''Layers panel'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''Contour''' '''Layer'''.

Select '''Styles'''.

Rotate the triangle to change the colour.
||Let us change the colour of the contour lines.

Right click on '''Contour''' layer.

Select '''Styles'''.

Rotate the triangle to change the colour.

Choose the colour of your choice.

|-
|| Uncheck check boxes for

'''srtm 51 09, Clip-DEM '''layer.
|| Hide the other layers by un-checking the check-boxes in the '''Layers panel'''.

|-
|| Right-click on the '''Contour''' layer, click on '''Open Attribute table'''.
||Open the '''Attribute table '''for the '''Contour''' layer.

|-
|| Point to '''ELEV''' column on the attribute table.

||In the attribute table, each line feature has an attribute named '''E L E V'''.

The value given in this column is the height in meters for that contour line.

|-
|| Click on '''ELEV''' column header.
||Click on the column header a few times to sort the values in descending order.

|-
|| Point to 1st row.
|| The first row represents the highest elevation in our data.

|-
|| Point to last row.
||Scroll down the table, the last row represents the lowest elevation.

|-
|| Click on the first row.

Click on '''Zoom map to the selected rows''' button in the menu bar.
||Scroll up and click on the first row to select it

Click on '''Zoom map to the selected rows''' button on the tool bar.

|-
|| Point to map on '''QGIS''' canvas.
||Switch to the '''QGIS''' window.

You will see the selected contour line highlighted in yellow.

|-
|| Point to the highlighted point.
||This is the area of the highest elevation in this '''data-set'''.

|-
|| Click on “'''Save As'''” tool on tool bar.

Type “Contour-Mumbai”

Select “'''Desktop'''” as Location.

Click on '''Save''' button.
||Save this project.

Click on “'''Save As'''” tool on the tool bar.

Give an appropriate name.

Save it at a convenient location.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Summary'''
|| Let us summarize,

In this tutorial we have learnt to

* Clip the area in '''DEM''' using the '''Clipper''' tool.

* Show '''contour''' lines for the '''DEM'''.

* Mark the highest elevated area on the '''contour''' map.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment '''

* Create '''contour '''lines for the area of your choice on the '''DEM'''.

* Find the highest elevation for the area.

||Here is the assignment.
* Create '''contour '''lines for the area of your choice on the '''DEM'''.

* Find the highest elevation for the area.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial Project'''
||This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Spoken Tutorial Workshops'''

|| The spoken tutorial project team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Forum for specific question'''

|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Acknowledgements'''
||The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune.

Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

QGIS/C4/Interpolation/English

2020-01-20T10:01:21Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with " {|border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Slide Number 1''' '''Title Slide''' || Welcome to this tutorial on '''Interpolation Methods''' in QGIS. |- || ''..."

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-

|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Interpolation Methods''' in QGIS.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about Interpolation methods.

* '''Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW)''' and

* '''Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN)'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| Here I am using

'''Ubuntu Linux''' OS version 16.04

'''QGIS''' version 2.18

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with QGIS interface.

For the prerequisite tutorials in this series, please visit this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Example for Demonstration'''

|| Data files required for this tutorial are provided in the Code files link.

Please download and extract the contents of the folder.

|-
|| Cursor on the code files folder.

Double click on the code file folder.
|| I have saved this folder on the Desktop.

Double-click on the folder to open it.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Airstations.shp'''
|| Locate '''AirStations.shp''' in the extracted folder.

This file shows meteorological stations located in Maharashtra.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Interpolation'''

Interpolation is a method to create continuous surface from discrete points.

Two methods of interpolation are available in QGIS.

* '''Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW)'''
* '''Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN)'''

|| Interpolation is a method to create continuous surface from discrete points.

Two methods of interpolation are available in QGIS.

* '''Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW)'''
* '''Triangulated Irregular Network (TIN)'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''About Interpolation'''
|| '''Interpolation Plugin''' is used to create '''interpolated raster''' from '''Point layer'''.

|-
|| Open the QGIS interface.

Click on '''Plugins''' menu, Select '''Manage and install Plugins'''.

In the '''Plugins''' dialog-box search for '''Interpolation plugin'''.

Check the check-box for '''Interpolation plugin'''.
|| Open the QGIS interface.

Here I have opened the QGIS interface.

Enable the interpolation plugin using '''Plugins''' menu as shown here.

Check the check-box for '''Interpolation plugin'''.

Close the dialog-box.

|-
|| Click on '''Raster''' menu.

Cursor on the interpolation option.
|| Open the '''Raster''' menu.

'''Interpolation''' option is now added in the '''Raster''' menu.

|-
|| Click on''' Add Vector Layer '''tool from the left panel.

Point to the dialog-box.
|| Click on '''Add Vector Layer''' tool.

'''Add vector layer''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Click on the '''Browse''' button>>'''Desktop'''>>'''Interpolation-code-files'''.
|| Click on '''Browse''' button and

Navigate to code files folder.

Here we will select two files.

|-
|| Click on '''AirStations.shp''' file.
|| Select '''AirStations.shp''' file.

|-
|| Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard and click on '''MH_Districts .shp'''.
|| Hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard and click on '''MH_Districts.shp'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Open''' button in the '''Open an OGR Supported Vector Layer''' dialog-box.

Click on '''Open''' button on the '''Add vector layer''' dialog-box.
|| Click on the '''Open''' button.

Click on '''Open''' button on the '''Add vector layer''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on the canvas.

Using cursor show the point features.
|| On the canvas we see map of Maharashtra state.

Locations of Air stations in each district are shown as point features.

|-
|| '''Add labels''' for Air Stations.

Right click on the '''Air Stations layer>> Properties'''.

'''Layer Properties''' dialog-box opens.
|| Let us label these '''point features'''.

Right click on the '''Air Stations layer'''.

Click on '''Properties '''option to open''' Layer Properties''' dialog box.

|-
|| Select the '''labels''' option located at the left side.
|| Select the '''Labels''' option located on the left panel.

|-
|| Click on the drop-down located at the top.

Select the '''Single Labels for this layer''' option from dropdown.
|| Click on the drop-down located at the top.

Select '''Show labels for this layer''' from the drop-down.

|-
|| From new menu click on the '''Label With''' Option.

Select '''Air_Pollut''' from the drop-down.
|| In the '''Label With''' drop-down select '''Air_Pollut'''.

Scroll down.

|-
|| Point to the options.
Click on '''OK''' button.
|| Here you will find various options to modify the label style.

Choose the required style and click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the canvas.
|| On the canvas, points with the labels will be displayed.

|-
|| Point towards the '''Air Stations''' layer on Layers panel.
|| Open the attribute table for '''Air Stations.shp''' layer.

|-
|| Cursor on the first column of the '''Attribute table'''.

Cursor on the '''Nox''' Column.
|| In the attribute table there are five columns.

In the 4th column, Nitrogen Oxides levels for every station is given.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.

Click on''' Close''' button.
|| We will interpolate '''Air Stations''' layer by the '''Nox''' attribute.

Here we will use '''IDW method''' for interpolation.

Close the attribute table.

|-
|| '''Slide number 8'''

'''IDW Interpolation'''

|| '''Inverse Distance Weighting''' method gives weights to sample points.

It is used for interpolating data such as temperature, rainfall, population etc.

|-
|| Open QGIS interface.
|| Back to the QGIS interface.

|-
|| Click on the '''Raster''' menu.

Locate the '''Interpolation''' Plugin.
|| Click on the '''Raster''' menu.

|-
|| Click on the '''Interpolation''' plugin.

Cursor on the dialog-box.
|| Click on the '''interpolation '''plugin.

'''Interpolation plugin''' dialog-box opens.
|-
|| Cursor on the '''Input'''.

Select '''Air Stations '''from''' Vector layers'''.

Cursor on the '''Air Stations'''.

|| In the''' Input''' section,

Select '''Air Stations''' as option as the '''Vector layers'''.

Here, by default, '''Air Stations''' layer is already selected.

|-
|| Select '''Interpolation''' attribute as '''NOx'''.
|| Select '''Interpolation''' attribute as '''NOx'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Add '''Button.

'''Air Stations.shp''' layer with '''NOx''' attribute is seen in the panel.

Click on '''Types '''drop-down and select '''Points.'''

|| Click on the '''Add '''Button.

This will add '''Air Stations.shp''' layer with '''NOx''' attribute.

Select '''Points '''in the''' Type '''drop-down.

Here '''Points''' is selected by default.

|-
|| Select '''Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW) '''from '''Interpolation Method'''

drop-down.
|| Go to the '''Output''' section.

Select '''Interpolation method''' as '''Inverse Distance Weighting'''.

Leave all the Settings as '''default'''.

|-
|| Click on the three dots button next to''' Output File'''.

Give the name as '''IDW _Stations'''.

Save it on the '''Desktop''' and click on '''Save''' button.
|| Click on the three dots button''' '''next to '''Output file'''.

Save the output as an '''IDW_Stations''' in the desire folder.

I will save it on '''Desktop'''.

|-
|| Check the check-box '''Add result to project'''.
|| Check, '''Add result to project''' if it is unchecked.

|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button.
|| Click '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.

Point to White areas.

|| The map with '''black''' and '''white''' areas will be displayed on the screen.

White areas represent high levels of '''Nitrogen Oxides'''.

|-
|| Point to black areas.
|| Black areas represent low levels of '''Nitrogen Oxides'''.

|-
|| Point Towards '''Interpolation_Stations''' layer.

Right click on '''IDW_Stations''' layer>>Select '''Properties'''.
|| For more clarity, we will change the symbology of layer.

Open '''Layer properties''' for the '''IDW''' layer.

|-
|| From the left panel, click on the '''Style''' option.

Select '''Render type''' as '''Single band Pseudocolor'''.
|| From the left panel, click on the '''Style '''option.

Select '''render type''' as '''Single band Pseudocolor'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Interpolation '''drop down and select '''Discrete'''.

Select '''Spectral''' from '''Color''' drop-down.

Check the check-box as '''Invert'''.
|| Select '''Discrete''' from '''Interpolation''' drop-down.

Choose '''Spectral''' from color drop-down.

Check the '''Invert''' check-box.

|-
|| Cursor on '''classify''' tab.

Click on '''Apply''' and '''OK'''.
|| Click on the '''classify''' button.

Leave all other settings as '''default'''.

Click on '''Apply''' and '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''the QGIS interface'''.

Point to red area.

Cursor on blue area.

|| Map with areas in '''Spectral''' colors is displayed on the canvas.

The red colored areas have high concentration of '''Nitrogen Oxides'''.

Blue areas have least concentration of '''Nitrogen Oxides'''.

|-
|| '''Save''' Your Results.

Give the name as''' IDW-Station'''.

Save it on the''' Desktop'''.

Click on '''Save '''button.

|| Save the project using '''Save''' tool from the tool bar.

Give an appropriate name.

Choose a convenient location.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide number 9'''

'''TIN Interpolation Method'''
|| Let us now learn about the '''Triangulated Irregular Network interpolation''' method.

'''TIN '''is used to create a surface formed by triangles.

This is based on '''nearest neighbor point '''information.

'''TIN '''method is commonly used for elevation data.

|-
|| Click on '''New''' tool on the tool bar.
|| Open a new '''QGIS''' window.

Click on '''New''' tool on the tool bar.

|-
|| '''Add Vector Layer>> Browser>> Navigate to Points.shp layer.'''

Right Click on '''Points.shp''' layer. Select '''Open Attribute Table'''.
|| Use the '''Add Vector Layer''' tool to load '''Points.shp''' layer.

Open '''Attribute table''' of '''Points''' layer.

|-
|| Point to '''Elevation '''data.
|| Notice the '''Elevation''' data for each '''Point feature.'''

|-
|| Close the '''Attribute''' table'''.
|| Close the '''Attribute''' table'''.

|-
|| Click on the '''Raster''' tab from the sub-menu select '''Interpolation'''.
|| Again open '''Interpolation window''' from '''Raster''' menu.

|-
|| In the '''Interpolation '''dialog-box select '''Points''' as '''Vector layers'''.

Select '''Elevation '''as''' Interpolation attribute'''.
|| In the''' Input''' section, select '''Points''' layer in the '''Vector layers''' drop-down.

Select '''elevation '''as''' Interpolation attribute'''.

|-
|| Click on''' Add''' button.

Cursor on the '''Points layer'''.
|| Click on '''Add '''Button.

This will add '''Points layer''' with '''Elevation attribute''' for '''interpolating'''.

'''Points''' in '''Type''' drop-down is chosen automatically.

Leave it as such.

|-
|| Select '''Triangular interpolation '''from the drop-down.

Click on the three dots button next to''' Output File'''.

Give the name as '''TIN-Stations.'''

Save it on the '''Desktop '''and click on '''Save '''button.

Click on '''OK '''button on the '''Interpolation plugin.'''
|| In the '''Output''' section, select '''Triangular interpolation''' as '''Interpolation method'''.

Save the '''output''' file as '''TIN-Stations''' and click '''OK.'''

|-
|| Cursor on the '''QGIS''' interface.
|| Map showing '''triangulated interpolation''' appears on the canvas.

|-
|| Right click on '''TIN-Stations '''layer>>Select '''Properties.'''

From the left panel, click on the '''Style '''option.

'''Select render '''type as '''Single band Pseudocolor. '''

Click on '''Interpolation '''drop down and select '''Discrete.'''

Select '''Spectral''' from '''Color''' drop-down.

Check the check-box as '''Invert.'''

Cursor on '''classify''' tab.

Click on''' Apply '''and''' OK.'''
|| Change the '''symbology''' for this layer.

Follow the same steps as we did for '''IDW''' layer.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.

Point to red area.

Point to blue area.
|| The map is now displayed in '''Spectral''' colors.

Areas in red represent high elevation.

Areas in blue represent low elevation.

|-
|| Save your Result
|| Save the maps using the '''Save''' tool on the toolbar.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Summary'''
|| Let us summarize,

In this tutorial we have learnt about two methods of Interpolation.

* '''Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW)'''

* '''Triangulated Irregular Network''' '''(TIN)'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Assignment'''
|| For the assignment,

Create IDW Interpolated map for Air Stations layer with SO2 attribute.

|-
|| Show the glimpse of the map.
|| Your map should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial Project'''

|| This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Spoken Tutorial Workshops'''

|| The spoken tutorial project team conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Forum for specific question'''

|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Acknowledgements'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

This tutorial is contributed by Ambadas Maske from College of Engineering Pune.

Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

QGIS/C4/Create-Contour-Lines/English

2019-12-20T05:39:25Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with " {|border=1 || '''Visual Cue''' ||'''Narration''' |- || '''Slide Number 1''' '''Title Slide''' || Welcome to this tutorial on '''Create Contour Lines''' in '''QGIS'''. |- ||..."

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
||'''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Create Contour Lines''' in '''QGIS'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''

|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,
* Clip the area in '''DEM''' using '''Clipper''' tool.

* Show '''contour''' lines for the '''DEM'''.

* And mark the highest elevated area on the '''contour '''map.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| Here I am using

'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04

QGIS version 2.18

And a working Internet connection.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with '''QGIS''' interface.

For the prerequisite tutorials in this series please visit this website.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Example file'''
||'''DEM''' data required to practise this tutorial is provided in the '''Code files''' link.

Please download and extract the contents of the folder.

|-
|| Cursor on the code files folder.

Double-click on the folder.
||I have saved this folder on the Desktop.

Double-click on the folder to open it.

|-
|| Right-click on '''srtm_51_09.tif '''file and open with '''QGIS''' Desktop.
|| Right-click on '''srtm.tif''' file and open with '''QGIS''' Desktop.

The map opens on the screen.

|-
|| Click on '''layer '''on the '''menu bar'''.

Click on '''Add Layer'''.

Click on '''Add Raster layer'''.

|| You can also open the '''tif '''file using '''Add Raster Layer '''option in '''Layer''' menu.

|-
|| Point to the DEM on canvas.
|| On the canvas you will see '''DEM''' of the terrain.

|-
|| Click on '''Raster menu >>Extraction>>Contour'''.
||'''Contour lines''' for this '''DEM''' can be generated using '''Contour tool''' in '''Raster menu'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About Contour lines'''

It is a line on a map joining points of equal height above or below sea level.

This will help us to determine the highest and least elevated areas on the map.
||About '''Contour lines'''.

It is a line on a map joining points of equal height above or below sea level.

This will help us to determine the highest and least elevated areas on the map.

|-
|| Cursor on the map on '''QGIS''' interface.
||We can draw contour lines for the selected area on this map.

|-
|| Click on '''Raster menu>>Extraction>>Clipper'''.
||We will use the '''Clipper''' tool in the '''Raster''' menu to cilp the area.

|-
|| Click on the menu item '''Raster'''.

Select '''Extraction''' from drop down.

Select '''Clipper'''.
||Click on the '''Raster '''menu.

Click on '''Extraction''' from drop down.

Click on '''Clipper'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Clipper''' dialog-box.
||'''Clipper''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Input file '''field.
||Select '''Input file''' as the '''DEM''' layer.

Here, by default this layer is already selected.

|-
|| Click on '''Select''' button next to '''Output file '''field.
||Click on '''Select''' button for '''Output file'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog box.

In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Clip-DEM.tif'''.

Click on '''Save '''button.
||'''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog box opens.

In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Clip-DEM.tif'''.

Click on '''Save '''button.

|-
|| In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box for '''No data value'''.
||In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box for '''No data value'''.

Let the value be zero.

|-
|| Under the heading '''Clipping mode''',

Click on '''Extent '''radio button.
||Under the heading '''Clipping mode''',

Click on '''Extent''' radio button.

|-
|| Cursor on '''QGIS''' window.

Point to cursor.

Hold left mouse and draw rectangle over Mumbai region.
||Switch to the '''QGIS''' window.

The cursor is now seen as plus(+) sign.

Hold your left mouse button and draw a rectangle covering the area of interest.

|-
|| Point to Mumbai region.
|| For this demonstration I will select Mumbai region.

|-
|| In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box, check the check-box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.
||In the '''Clipper''' dialog-box,

Check the check-box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.

|-
|| Click on '''OK''' button.
||Keep other default settings as such.

Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on '''OK'''.

Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Once the process completes, close the pop-up windows by clicking on '''OK''' buttons.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button in the '''Clipper''' dialog-box.
|| Click on '''Close''' button in the '''Clipper''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Point to '''Clip-DEM layer'''.
||On the canvas you will see a new layer loaded.

|-
||Uncheck check boxes for '''srtm 51 09, Hillshade, Slope layers'''.
||Disable all the layers in the '''Layers Panel''', except '''Clip-DEM layer'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the map.
|| Now we are ready to generate contour lines for this map using '''Contour''' tool.

|-
|| Click on the '''Raster''' menu, select '''Extraction''' , from the sub-menu, Click on '''Contour'''.
||Click on the '''Raster '''menu.

Scroll down to '''Extraction''', from the sub-menu, click on '''Contour'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Contour''' dialog-box.

From the '''Input file''' drop-down select '''Clip-DEM''' layer.
||'''Contour''' dialog-box opens.

From the '''Input file''' drop-down select '''Clip-DEM''' layer.

|-
|| Click on '''Select '''button next to '''Output file '''field.

'''Select the raster file to save the results to''' dialog box opens.
||Click on '''Select '''button for the '''Output file'''.

Dialog box opens.

|-
|| Name the file as '''Contour.shp.'''

Click on '''Save '''button.
||In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Contour.shp'''.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| In the '''Contour''' dialog box, select '''Interval between contour lines''' as 50.
||In the '''Contour''' dialog box, select '''Interval between contour lines''' as 50.

This will generate contour lines for 50 meter intervals.

|-
|| Click on the check-box next to '''Attribute name'''.
||Click on the check-box next to '''Attribute name'''.

Elevation value for each contour line will be recorded as an attribute '''ELEV'''.

|-
|| Check the box next to '''Load into canvas''' '''when finished'''.

Click on '''OK''' button.
||Check the box next to '''Load into canvas''' '''when finished'''.
Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on '''OK'''.

Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Once the process completes, close the pop-up windows by clicking on '''OK''' buttons.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' button.
|| Click on '''Close''' button to close the '''Contour''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Contour''' layer.
||A new layer '''Contour''' is added in the '''Layers panel'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''Contour''' '''Layer'''.

Select '''Styles'''.

Rotate the triangle to change the color.
||Let us change the color of the contour lines.

Right click on '''Contour''' '''Layer'''.

Select '''Styles'''.

Rotate the triangle to change the color.

Choose the color of your choice.

|-
|| Uncheck check boxes for

'''srtm 51 09, Clip-DEM '''layer.
|| Hide the other layers by unchecking the check-boxes in the '''Layers panel'''.

|-
|| Right-click on the '''Contour''' layer, click on '''Open Attribute table'''.
||Open the '''Attribute table '''for the '''Contour''' layer.

|-
|| Point to '''ELEV''' column on the attribute table.

||In the attribute table, each line feature has an attribute named '''ELEV'''.

The value given in this column is the height in meters for that contour line.

|-
|| Click on '''ELEV''' column header.
||Click on the column header a few times to sort the values in descending order.

|-
|| Point to 1st row.
|| The first row represents the highest elevation in our data.

|-
|| Point to last row.
||Scroll down the table, the last row represents the lowest elevation.

|-
|| Click on the first row.

Click on '''Zoom map to the selected rows''' button in the menu bar.
||Scroll up and click on the first row to select the first row.

Click on '''Zoom map to the selected rows''' button on the tool bar.

|-
|| Point to map on '''QGIS''' canvas.
||Switch to the '''QGIS''' window.

You will see the selected contour line highlighted in yellow.

|-
|| Point to the highlighted point.
||This is the area of the highest elevation in this dataset.

|-
|| Click on “'''Save As'''” tool on tool bar.

Type “Contour-Mumbai”

Select “'''Desktop'''” as Location.

Click on '''Save''' button.
||Save this project.

Click on “'''Save As'''” tool on the tool bar.

Give an appropriate name.

Save it at a convenient location.

Click on '''Save''' button.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Summary'''
|| Let us summarize,

In this tutorial we have learnt to

* Clip the area in '''DEM''' using the '''Clipper''' tool.

* Show '''contour''' lines for the '''DEM'''.

* Mark the highest elevated area on the '''contour''' map.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Assignment '''

* Create '''contour '''lines for the area of your choice on the '''DEM'''.

* Find the highest elevation for the area.

||Here is the assignment.
* Create '''contour '''lines for the area of your choice on the '''DEM'''.

* Find the highest elevation for the area.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial Project'''
||This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Spoken Tutorial Workshops'''

|| The spoken tutorial project team conducts workshops and gives certificates. For more details please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Forum for specific question'''

|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Acknowledgements'''
||The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from College of Engineering Pune.

Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Apps-On-Physics/C2/Reflection-and-Refraction/English

2019-12-19T09:33:55Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with " {|border=1 |- || '''Visual cue''' || '''Narration''' |- || '''Slide Number 1''' '''Title slide''' || Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Reflection and Refraction'''. |- ||..."

{|border=1
|-
|| '''Visual cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title slide'''
|| Welcome to the Spoken Tutorial on '''Reflection and Refraction'''.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 2 '''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will demonstrate,

'''Refraction of Light '''and

'''Reflection and Refraction of Light Waves Apps.'''
|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirements'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 16.04

Firefox web browser version 62.0.3
|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre-requisites'''

'''https://spoken-tutorial.org/'''
|| To follow this tutorial, learner should be familiar with '''Apps on Physics'''.

For the pre-requisites tutorials please visit this site.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Learning Goals'''
|| Using these '''Apps''', we will

* Demonstrate reflection and refraction of a light ray.

* Change the medium and angle of incidence to verify Snell's law.

* Demonstrate the formation of total internal reflection.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Learning Goals'''
||
* Explain the formation of a critical angle.

* Calculate the value of critical angle.

* Explain reflection and refraction of waves by Huygens’ principle.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Link for Apps on physics. '''

'''https://www.walter-fendt.de/html5/phen/'''
|| Use the given link to download the '''Apps.'''

|-
|| Open the '''Downloads '''folder.
|| I have downloaded the '''Apps on Physics '''to my '''Downloads''' folder.

|-
|| Right click on '''pulleysystem_en.htm''' file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser''' option.

Cursor on the '''App'''.
|| Right click on '''refraction_en.htm '''file.

Select the option '''Open With Firefox web Browser.'''

'''Reflection and Refraction of Light App''' opens in the browser.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| The''' App '''shows reflection and refraction of light through a given medium.

|-
|| Point to air and water on the interface
|| The default media are air and water.

|-
|| Point to air.

Point to water.
|| Note that the medium with lesser refractive index is shown in white background.

The medium with greater refractive index is shown in blue background.

|-
|| Point to the light that has been incident.
|| Light from the top left corner, strikes the boundary surface of the two media.

|-
|| Point to both reflection and refraction angles.
|| It shows reflection and refraction.

|-
|| Point to blue angels
|| Reflection is shown by the blue coloured angle.

|-
|| Point to black and blue angles.
|| Observe that the angle of incidence and reflection are the same.

|-
|| Point to the refraction.
|| Here we see the refraction of light.

|-
|| Show the phenomena with the motion of the cursor.
|| When light travels from rarer medium to denser medium, it bends towards normal.

|-
|| Cursor on the green panel.
|| On the green panel we have a choice to change a few parameters.

|-
|| Point to the drop downs.
|| Let us reverse the two media using the drop downs.

|-
|| Click on the first drop down and change the medium to water.
|| Select water as the upper medium.

|-
|| Click on second drop down.

Select air from the drop down.
|| Select''' '''air''' '''as the lower medium.

|-
|| Move the cursor to show the movements
|| Here the ray of light travels from denser to rarer medium.

The ray bends away from the normal.

|-
|| Click on both drop down to show the material medium.
|| Note that both the drop downs show the same material media.

|-
|| Point to each drop down.
|| Below the drop down, we see two text fields.

These are provided to enter the values of refractive indices.

|-
|| Enter the value 4 in the '''1st index of refraction '''and show the change.
|| Here we can also change the values manually between the range of 1 to 5.

|-
|| Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard.
|| Press '''F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh the '''App'''.

|-
|| Change the values from 0.1 degrees to 90 degrees and show the changes.

Click on '''F5''' key on the keyboard to refresh and show the default value.
|| Next '''Angle of incidence''' can be changed from 0.1 degrees to 90 degrees.

Press '''F5 '''key to see the default value.

It shows 30 degrees.

|-
|| Point below the text fields.
|| Below the text fields '''App''' shows the '''Angle of reflection and refraction'''.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| Graph shows the angle of refraction with angle of incidence.

|-
|| Click and drag the angle of incidence.

Drag it slowly.
|| We can also change the angle of incidence by dragging this red coloured ray.

|-
|| Point and show the changes when the angle of incidence is changed.
|| Notice the change in angle of reflection and refraction.

Simultaneously observe the graph.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now from the graph we will learn the two cases of '''Snell’s law'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Snell’s Law of Refraction'''

sin i / sin r = n21

“n21” is the refractive index of the second medium w.r.t first.
|| Before that let us state '''Snell’s law''' of Refraction.

Ratio of sine of angle of incidence to sine of angle of refraction is a constant.

n21 is the refractive index of the second medium with respect to first medium.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Snell’s Law of Refraction'''

'''Case1: '''If''' '''n21 > 1, angle of refraction is less than angle of incidence.

'''Case2: '''If''' '''n21 < 1, angle of refraction is greater than angle of incidence.
|| Here are the 2 cases of '''Snell’s law'''.

1. If n21 is greater than 1, angle of refraction is less than angle of incidence.

2. If n21 is less than 1, angle of refraction is greater than angle of incidence.

|-
|| Edit the value of '''Angle of incidence''' to 20 degrees.
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 20 degrees.

Observe that the angle of refraction has changed to 14.9.

|-
|| Point to the graph and values of the angles.
|| This graph shows the first case of Snell’s law.

Here angle of incidence is greater than the

angle of refraction.

|-
|| Point to the value of refractive index of the second medium.
|| Observe that the light ray bends towards the normal.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Let us see what happens, when incident ray passes from denser to rarer medium.

|-
|| Click on the first drop down and change the medium to diamond.
|| From the first drop down change the material medium to '''diamond'''.

|-
|| Point to show the refraction.
|| Notice that the light ray has bent away from the normal.

|-
|| Point to the graph.
|| This graph shows the second case of '''Snell’s law'''.

|-
|| Point to show Angle of refraction.
|| Here the angle of refraction is greater than the angle of incidence.

|-
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 30 degrees.
|| Increase the '''Angle of incidence''' to 30 degrees.

|-
|| Point to the refracted ray.
|| The refracted ray has bent still more further away from the normal.

|-
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence''' to 35 degrees.
|| Again increase the angle of incidence to

35 degrees.

In this case observe that the refraction is not possible.

|-
|| Point to the reflected ray.
|| Here the incident ray is totally reflected.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| This phenomenon is known as total internal reflection.

Here the critical angle is formed.

|-
|| Point to the Critical angle.
|| The critical angle for diamond and water is 33.3 degrees.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Critical angle'''

ic<nowiki>= sin</nowiki>-1(n2/n1)

ic<nowiki>= Critical angle</nowiki>

n1<nowiki>= Refractive index of first medium</nowiki>

n2<nowiki>= Refractive index of the second medium</nowiki>
|| Now we will calculate the critical angle using the formula.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Let us make a tabular column to calculate critical angle for two different media.

|-
||
|| Here I have calculated the critial angle for diamond and water.

|-
|| Point to the on the interface Critical angle.
|| The calculated value is comparable to the value shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Tabular column'''

|| Now enter these values in the table.

|-
|| Change the upper medium to water and lower medium to air.
|| Next change the upper medium to '''water''' and lower medium to '''air'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Tabular Column'''

Show one glimpse of the table
|| Note the refractive indices for both the media.

|-
|| Show the calculation''' '''for critical angle on a text-box or on a png.
|| Then calculate the critical angle using the above formula.

|-
|| Point to show the values.
|| Observe that the values are comparable.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Tabular column'''
|| Note these values in the table.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Assignment '''

Show the incomplete table.
|| As an assignment
* Note the values of refractive indices for the following media from the '''App'''.

* Calculate the critical angle for the two media.

* Compare the values with the ones shown in the '''App'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.
|| Now we will move on to the next '''App'''.

|-
|| Right click on '''refractionhuygens_en.htm'''<<

'''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.
|| Right click on '''refractionhuygens_en.htm '''file.

'''Open With Firefox Web Browser'''.

The''' App '''opens in the browser.

|-
|| Highlight the main topic from the screen.
|| '''App''' shows '''Reflection''' and '''Refraction''' of light waves using '''Huygens''' principle.

|-
|| Click on the '''Restart''' button.
|| Click on the '''Restart''' button.

|-
|| Point to the wavefront.
|| Here the plane wavefront is incident diagonally on the boundary of the media.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Point to the box and scroll the slider.(Highlight the box)
|| Explanation of each step is provided in this text box.

|-
|| Point to the wavefronts.
|| Note the change in media, when the wavefront is incident on the boundary.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to the pink point on the boundary.
|| Observe the pink points on the boundary between the media.

Each pink point is the source of spherical wavefront.

|-
|| Point to the waves in '''Medium1 '''and '''Medium 2'''.
|| These generating waves in the '''Medium 1 '''and''' Medium 2''' are the wavelets.

|-
|| Click on the''' Resume''' button.
|| Click on the''' Resume''' button.

|-
||
|| Note that the waves in '''Medium 2''' move with less velocity as compared to '''Medium 1'''.

This is because, the medium 2 has higher refractive index.

So here the waves move with less velocity.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point to the line drawn.
|| Observe the tangent drawn to all these spherical waves.

This line, here is the source for the secondary wavefront.

|-
|| Points on the wavelets.
|| So, the points on every wavelet result in the formation of secondary wavefront.

|-
||
|| Here the values of '''Angle of incidence''', '''reflection '''and '''refraction '''are given.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| Point and show the direction of propagation of the red and blue waves.
|| Direction of propogation changes when waves move from medium 1 to medium 2.

|-
|| Again click on the '''Next step''' button.
|| Again click on the '''Next step''' button.

|-
|| Point to direction of the propagation of waves.
|| Here the direction of the propagation of waves is shown.

|-
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.
|| Click on the '''Pause''' button.

|-
|| Point and show the perpendicular lines.
|| Observe that these lines of propagation are perpendicular to the wavefronts.

|-
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.
|| Click on the '''Resume''' button.

|-
|| Change '''Angle of incidence '''<nowiki>= 60 degrees.</nowiki>
|| Change the '''Angle of incidence '''to 60 degrees.

|-
|| Click on the '''Next step'''.
|| Click on the '''Next step '''button.

|-
|| Point the series of waves.
|| Here we can see a series of wavefronts that are incident on boundary surface.

|-
|| Cursor on both mediums.
|| Observe the speed and wavelength of wavefronts in both the media.

|-
|| Point to the denser medium.
|| The wavelength and speed of the wavefront decreases in the denser medium.

But the frequency of the plane wavefronts remains the same.

|-
|| make the refractive index of 1 to 2 and refractive index of 2 to 1.
|| Let us reverse the refractive indices and observe the formation of wavefronts.

|-
|| Point to the wavefronts.
|| Here the speed of the wavefront decreases, as it moves from denser medium.

|-
|| Cursor on the interface.

Point to show the critical angle.
|| This shows the total internal reflection.

Here the incident wavefront is completely reflected and not refracted.

This results in the formation of critical angle.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Assignment'''

Change the refractive index values of both media as given in the previous '''App'''.

Observe the formation of wavefront and give an explanation.

|| As an assignment

Change the refractive index values of both media as given in the previous '''App'''.

Observe the formation of wavefront and give an explanation.

|-
||
|| Let us summarize

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''Summary'''
|| Using these '''Apps''', we have
* Demonstrated reflection and refraction of a light ray.

* Changed the medium and angle of incidence to verify Snell's law.

* Demonstrated the formation of total internal reflection.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Summary'''
||
* Explained the formation of critical angle.

* Calculated critical angle.

* Explained reflection and refraction of waves by Huygens’ principle.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Acknowledgement'''

These Apps are created by Walter-fendt and his team.
|| These '''Apps''' were created by Walter-fendt and his team.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''About the Spoken Tutorial project.'''

|| The video at the following link summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 21'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops.'''

|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team,

conducts workshops and gives certificates.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 22'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''

Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question.

Explain your question briefly.

Someone from our team will answer them.
|| Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 23'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by MHRD Government of India.

|-
||
|| This is Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay

Thank you for joining.

|-
|}

PhET/C3/Radioactive-Dating-Game/English-timed

2019-12-18T09:33:30Z

Karwanjehimanshi95: Created page with " {|border=1 ||'''Time''' ||'''Narration''' |- ||00:01 ||Welcome to this '''tutorial''' on''' Radioactive Dating Game, '''an '''interactive PhET simulation.''' |- ||00:08 ||..."

{|border=1
||'''Time'''
||'''Narration'''

|-
||00:01
||Welcome to this '''tutorial''' on''' Radioactive Dating Game, '''an '''interactive PhET simulation.'''

|-
||00:08
||In this '''tutorial''', we will demonstrate, '''Radioactive Dating Game''', an '''interactive PhET simulation'''.

|-
||00:17
||Here I am using,

'''Ubuntu Linux OS''' version 16.04

'''Java''' version 1.8.0

'''Firefox Web Browser''' version 60.0.2

|-
||00:32
||Learners should be familiar with high school physics and chemistry.

|-
||00:37
||Using this '''simulation''', we will look at

'''Radioactive decay''' and '''half life'''

Decay rates

Measurement of radioactivity

'''Radioactive dating'''

|-
||00:51
||Please refer to the '''additional material''' provided with this '''tutorial'''.

|-
||00:55
||Let us begin.

|-
||00:58
||Use the given link to download the '''simulation'''.

|-
||01:02
||I have already downloaded the '''Radioactive Dating Game simulation''' to my '''Downloads folder'''.

|-
||01:10
||To open the '''jar file''', open the '''terminal'''.

|-
||01:14
||At the '''terminal prompt''', type '''cd Downloads''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
||01:22
||Type '''java space hyphen jar space radioactive-dating-game underscore en dot jar''', press '''Enter'''.

|-
||01:36
||'''File''' opens in the '''browser''' in '''html format'''.

|-
||01:41
||This is the '''interface''' for the '''Radioactive Dating Game simulation'''.

|-
||01:46
||Now we will explore the '''interface'''.

|-
||01:49
||The '''interface''' has four '''screens''':

'''Half Life'''

'''Decay Rates'''

'''Measurement'''

'''Dating Game'''

|-
||02:00
||We are already looking at the '''Half Life''' screen.

|-
||02:04
||At the top of the screen is an '''Isotope versus Time''' graph.

|-
||02:09
||Pay attention to the units of time.

|-
||02:12
||On the right side of the screen, you see a '''Choose Isotope''' panel.

|-
||02:17
||It has three options showing unstable nucleus decaying to stable nucleus.

|-
||02:25
||In the middle is the '''simulation''' panel containing a '''Bucket o’ Atoms'''.

|-
||02:31
||Note that it contains '''C-14''' atoms as the default selection is '''C-14'''.

|-
||02:38
||Attached to the bottom of the bucket is a '''button''' called “'''Add 10'''”.

|-
||02:44
||'''Stable and Unstable Nuclei'''

The strong nuclear force overcomes the electrostatic repulsion between protons.

|-
||02:54
||The energy associated with this force is the binding energy.

|-
||03:00
||The lower the binding energy, the more unstable is the nucleus.

|-
||03:06
||Such an unstable nucleus is said to be radioactive.

|-
||03:12
||Below the '''simulation''' panel is a '''Play/Pause button''' and a '''Step button''' next to it.

|-
||03:19
||In the '''simulation''' panel is a blue '''Reset All Nuclei button'''.

|-
||03:25
||It lets you return to the start but with the selected isotope.

|-
||03:30
||Below the right panel is a white '''Reset All button'''.

|-
||03:35
||It resets the '''simulation''' in this '''screen''' to all the default settings.

|-
||03:41
||Observe the '''Isotope versus time''' graph.

|-
||03:45
||There is a vertical red dashed line labeled '''Half Life''' near the 5000 year mark.

|-
||03:52
||The '''half-life''' of '''C-14''' is 5730 years.

|-
||03:58
||Along the '''y-axis''', you can see the red '''C-14''' symbol above the blue '''N-14''' symbol.

|-
||04:06
||'''C-14''' atoms will appear in the upper row and '''N-14''' atoms in the lower one.

|-
||04:13
||To the left of the '''Isotope''' label is a red circle.

|-
||04:17
||Numbers of '''C-14''' and '''N-14''' atoms shown by '''hash symbols''' will appear to the left of the circle.

|-
||04:26
||'''Radioactive Decay'''

'''Radioactive Decay ''' is the spontaneous conversion of an unstable nucleus into a stable nucleus.

|-
||04:36
||It involves the release of subatomic particles and their energy as radiation.

|-
||04:43
||It is of the following types:

'''Alpha decay'''

'''Beta decay'''

'''Gamma decay'''.

|-
||04:52
||'''Half-life''' is the time taken for half of the nuclei in a radioactive material to decay.

|-
||05:01
||Let us get back to the '''simulation'''.

|-
||05:04
||Click on '''Add 10''' and immediately click on the '''Pause button'''.

|-
||05:10
||Ten '''C-14''' atoms have been added to the '''simulation''' panel.

|-
||05:15
||Almost immediately, red '''C-14''' has started to decay to give blue '''N-14'''.

|-
||05:22
||Observe the atoms moving across the graph in the two rows.

|-
||05:28
||Note how the circle changes to blue as more '''N-14''' atoms form.

|-
||05:34
||Keep clicking on '''Step button''' to the right of '''Pause'''.

|-
||05:42
||The circle is half red and half blue.

|-
||05:47
||Observe that there are 5 blue '''N-14''' atoms in the graph.

|-
||05:54
||There are 5 '''C-14''' atoms and 5 '''N-14''' atoms in the '''simulation''' panel also.

|-
||06:01
||This is the definition of '''half-life'''.

|-
||06:04
||If you click again on '''Add 10''', another 10 '''C-14''' atoms will be added to the '''simulation''' panel.

|-
||06:12
||Predict the number of '''C-14''' atoms remaining after different periods.

|-
||06:18
||Perform the same '''simulation''' for the other nuclei.

|-
||06:23
||Click on the '''Decay Rates tab''' to go to that '''screen'''.

|-
||06:28
||The '''interface''' has a similar arrangement as the '''Half Life screen'''.

|-
||06:33
||Please explore this '''screen''' in the same way.

|-
||06:37
||Now, let us click on the '''Measurement tab''' to go to that '''screen'''.

|-
||06:42
||In the right panel, under '''Choose an Object''', we will stay with '''Tree''', the default selection.

|-
||06:50
||In the top left, under '''Probe Type''', we will retain the default selections, '''Carbon-14''' and '''Objects'''.

|-
||06:59
||In the bottom right corner, click on '''Plant Tree button'''.

|-
||07:04
||Immediately click on the '''Pause button'''.

|-
||07:07
||Observe 100% appear above '''Probe Type''' in the upper left corner.

|-
||07:14
||Keep clicking on the '''Step button''' to the right of '''Pause''' to move the simulation along.

|-
||07:23
||Above the graph, '''% of C-14''' is the default selection.

|-
||07:29
||The white box below the graph shows the number of years since the tree was planted.

|-
||07:35
||The red line shows % of '''C-14''' remaining in the tree.

|-
||07:41
||Click on the second '''C-14''' to '''C-12''' ratio '''radio button''' above the graph.

|-
||07:48
||Now the red line shows the '''C-14''' to '''C-12''' ratio in the tree.

|-
||07:53
||Click again on the % of '''C-14 radio button''' above the graph.

|-
||07:58
||Keep track of the % in the top left, the tree and the number of years below the graph.

|-
||08:09
||Note down the number of years and % of '''C-14''' when the tree

Loses its green color

Loses all its leaves

Falls over.

|-
||08:20
||Click on the '''Play''' or '''Step buttons''' to get approximately 50% in the top left window.

|-
||08:35
||Note the number of years after which you see 50% of '''C-14''' in the tree.

|-
||08:42
||Click on '''Rock''' and '''Uranium-238 radio buttons'''.

|-
||08:50
||Click on '''Erupt Volcano''' and '''Cool rock buttons'''.

|-
||08:58
||Measure '''U-238''' levels in the cooled volcanic rock.

|-
||09:04
||Click on the '''Air radio button''' to compare isotope levels in objects to air levels.

|-
||09:12
||Let us click on the last '''Dating Game tab''' to go to that '''screen'''.

|-
||09:17
||We can measure levels of '''C-14''', '''U-238''' or other '''custom nuclei''' in this '''screen'''.

|-
||09:25
||We see objects on and below the ground on which we can place the probe to measure these levels.

|-
||09:34
||'''Radioactive Dating'''

Carbon has two isotopes: '''C-12''' and '''C-14'''.

|-
||09:41
||Both are converted to carbon dioxide and are taken in by living organisms.

|-
||09:47
||When an organism dies, it no longer takes in any carbon. So levels of '''C-14''' and ratio of '''C-14''' to '''C-12''' fall.

|-
||09:57
||'''Radioactive Dating-Continued'''

Radioactive dating compares C-14 C-12 ratio of samples to recently dead specimens.

|-
||10:06
||It estimates how long the organism has been dead.

|-
||10:10
||'''Uranium-lead dating''' is used for rocks, archaeological artefacts etc.

|-
||10:17
||On the top, we see the graph like the ones in the previous screens.

|-
||10:22
||Let us keep the following default selections:

Under '''Probe Type''', '''Carbon-14'''

'''Objects'''

'''% of C-14'''

|-
||10:33
||We will drag the '''probe''' and place it on the animal skull on the ground, to the left.

|-
||10:40
||Observe a '''pop-up box''' that appears next to the skull.

|-
||10:45
||We see the text, “'''Estimate age of Animal Skull'''” and “'''years'''” next to the empty box below.

|-
||10:53
||Below this is a '''Check Estimate button'''.

|-
||10:57
||Observe that in the top left side, above '''Probe Type''', we see 98.2%.

|-
||11:04
||Let us drag the double-headed green arrow above the graph.

|-
||11:09
||In the white box above the arrow, % of '''C-14''' should be approximately 98.2%.

|-
||11:18
||Observe that '''t equals 123 yrs''' appears in the white box above the graph.

|-
||11:26
||Type 123 in the empty box below '''Estimate age of Animal Skull'''.

|-
||11:33
||Click '''Check Estimate button'''.

|-
||11:36
||The '''Estimate pop-up box''' disappears.

|-
||11:40
||A green text-box with 123 years appears in its place with a green '''smiley''' face next to it.

|-
||11:48
||We have successfully dated the animal skull by measuring the % of '''C-14''' remaining in it.

|-
||11:56
||As an '''assignment''',

Estimate ages of all the objects in the '''Dating Game screen'''.

|-
||12:03
||Correlate age in years with percentage of '''unstable''' nucleus.

|-
||12:08
||Correlate age in years with the depth at which the object is found.

|-
||12:13
||Remember to use '''C-14''' for animal remains and '''U-238''' for rocks and other objects.

|-
||12:20
||Let us summarize.

|-
||12:22
||In this '''tutorial''', we have demonstrated how to use the '''Radioactive Dating Game PhET simulation'''.

|-
||12:31
||Using this '''simulation''', we looked at:

'''Radioactive decay''' and '''half life'''

Decay rates

Measurement of radioactivity

'''Radioactive dating'''

|-
||12:46
||The video at the following link summarizes the '''Spoken Tutorial project'''.

|-
||12:52
||Please download and watch it.

|-
||12:55
||The '''Spoken Tutorial Project '''team conducts workshops using '''spoken tutorials''' and gives certificates on passing online tests.

|-
||13:04
||For more details, please write to us.

|-
||13:08
||Please post your timed queries in this forum.

|-
||13:12
||This project is partially funded by '''Pandit Madan Mohan Malaviya National Mission on Teachers and Teaching'''.

|-
||13:20
||'''Spoken Tutorial Project''' is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''', Government of India.

|-
||13:28
||More information on this mission is available at this link.

|-
||13:33
||This is '''Vidhya Iyer''' from '''IIT Bombay''', signing off.

|-
||13:37
||Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

Applications-of-GeoGebra/C2/Vectors-and-Matrices/English

2019-12-03T05:51:29Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{| border=1
||'''Visual Cue'''
||'''Narration'''
|-
||'''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
|| Welcome to this tutorial on '''Vectors and Matrices''' in '''Geogebra'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''
|| In this tutorial, we will learn about,

How to draw a '''vector'''

Arithmetic operations on '''vectors'''

How to create a '''matrix'''

Arithmetic operations on '''matrices'''

'''Transpose''' of a '''matrix'''

'''Determinant''' of a '''matrix'''

'''Inverse''' of a '''matrix'''

|-
|| '''Slide Number 3'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| Here I am using,

Ubuntu Linux OS version 14.04

GeoGebra version 5.0.388.0-d.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''Pre requisites'''

'''www.spoken-tutorial.org'''.
|| To follow this tutorial, you should be familiar with '''Geogebra''' interface.

If not, for relevant '''Geogebra''' tutorials please visit our website.

|-
||
|| Let us define a '''vector'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Vector'''
|| '''Vector''' is a quantity that has both '''magnitude''' and '''direction'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''GeoGebra''' window.
|| I have opened a '''GeoGebra''' window.

|-
|| Go to '''Options''' >> '''Font Size'''.

From Sub-menu >> '''20 pt'''(point) radio button.
|| Before I start this demonstration I will change the font size to 20.

Go to '''Options '''menu, scroll down to '''Font Size'''.

From the sub-menu select '''20 pt'''(point) radio button.

|-
|| Click on '''Vector''' tool,

Click on origin >> drag to draw a vector '''u'''. (draw the vector with angle less than 90 degree)
|| Let us draw a '''vector'''.

Click on '''Line tool''' drop down and select '''Vector''' tool.

Click on the Origin(0,0) and drag the mouse to draw a vector '''u'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Vector''' tool,

Click on Origin >> drag to draw a vector '''u'''. (draw the vector with angle less than 90 degree.)
| | Let us draw another '''vector v''' from the origin.
|-
| | Cursor on '''Graphics view'''.
| | Let us show the relation between '''vectors''' and a '''parallelogram'''.

|-
| | '''Slide Number 6'''

'''Parallelogram Law of Vector Addition'''

|| Consider two '''vectors''' as two adjacent sides of a '''parallelogram. '''

Then resultant of these '''vectors''' is the diagonal of the '''parallelogram'''.

|-
|| Point to input bar.

Type '''u+v ''' >> press enter.

Point to vector '''w''' in '''Graphics view''' and '''Algebra view.'''
|| Let's add the vectors '''u''' and '''v'''.

In the input bar, type '''u+v''' and press '''Enter'''.

Here '''vector w''', represents addition of the '''vectors u''' and '''v'''.

|-
|| Cursor on '''Graphics view.'''
|| Let's show that '''vector w''' is '''diagonal''' of the '''parallelogram'''.

|-
|| Cursor on the '''Graphics view'''.
|| To demonstrate this, let's complete the '''parallelogram'''.

|-
|| Click on '''Vector from Point '''tool.

Click on point ''' B''' >> vector '''v'''.

Point to the new vector.
|| Click on the '''Line''' drop-down and select '''Vector from Point''' tool.

Click on point '''B''' and '''vector v'''.

The new '''vector a''' same as '''vector v ''' is drawn.

|-
|| Click point '''C ''' >> click vector '''u'''.

point to vector '''b'''.
|| Now click on point '''C''' and '''vector u''' .

The new '''vector b''' same as vector '''u,''' is drawn.
|-
|| Click on '''Move''' tool >> drag '''B' '''.
|| Using '''Move''' tool move the labels.

|-
|| Point to the parallelogram '''ABB'C'''.

Point to the diagonal '''AB' '''.
|| '''Parallelogram ABB'C ''' is completed.

Notice that '''diagonal AB' ''' represents sum of '''vectors u''' and '''v'''.

|-
|| Press '''CTRL+Z'''
|| Press '''CTRL+Z''' to undo the process.

Retain the '''vector u'''.

|-
|| Point to vector '''u'''.
|| Now we have '''vector u''' on '''Graphics view'''.

|-
|| Point to the coordinates of the vector.
|| '''Cartesian coordinates''' of the '''vector''' are shown in the '''Algebra view'''.

|-
|| Point to the values.

Move point '''B''' using '''Move''' tool.
|| Here values of '''magnitude''' and angle of '''vector u''' are displayed.

If we move point '''B''', values change accordingly.

|-
|| Point to the '''Algebra view'''.

Right click on the vector.

Click on '''Polar coordinates'''.
|| In the '''Algebra view,''' right click on '''vector u'''.

A sub-menu appears.

Select '''Polar coordinates'''.

Observe the '''coordinates''' in the '''polar''' form.

|-
|| Right click on point '''B'''.

Click on '''Polar coordinates'''.
|| To change the values manually, right click on point '''B'''.

Select '''Polar coordinates'''.

|-
|| Double click to change the values.

Type '''5''' as magnitude; '''50''' as angle, press '''Enter'''. (5; 50)

Point to the vector.
|| Double-click on point '''B''' to change the values.

Type '''5''' as '''magnitude'''; '''50''' as angle and press '''Enter'''.

Notice the change in '''magnitude''' and angle of '''vector u'''.

|-
||
|| Let us multiply a '''vector''' by a '''scalar'''.

|-
|| Type '''2u''' in the '''input bar''' >> press '''Enter'''.

Type '''-2u''' >> press '''Enter'''.

Point to the vectors.
|| Type '''2u''' in the '''input bar''' and press '''Enter.'''

The '''magnitude''' of new '''vector''' is equal to 2u.

Type '''-2u''' and press '''Enter'''.

The '''magnitude''' of new '''vector''' is '''2u''', but in opposite direction.

|-
|| Point to the '''Zoom Out''' tool.
|| To view the new '''vectors''', use '''Zoom Out''' tool from tool bar.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 7'''

'''Assignment'''

Ex: u/3.
|| As an assignment,

1. Subtract the '''vectors u''' and '''v'''

2. Divide a '''vector''' by a '''scalar'''.
|-
||
|| Now we will move on to '''matrices'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 8'''

'''Matrix'''

'''mxn matrix'''
|| A '''matrix''' is an ordered set of numbers.

It is listed in a rectangular form as ‘m’ rows and ‘n’ columns.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 9'''

'''Identity Matrix'''
|| A unit matrix is I=[1].

It has m=n=1 and '''element''' is also 1.

An '''identity matrix''' is a '''square matrix'''.

It has all the diagonal elements as 1 and rest of the elements as 0.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Identity Matrix'''
|| X= [1 0, 1 0] is 2 by 2 '''identity matrix''' and

Y=[1 0 0, 0 1 0, 0 0 1] is 3 by 3 '''identity matrix'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 11'''

'''Create Matrices'''
|| In GeoGebra, we can create a '''matrix''' using:

'''Spreadsheet view '''

'''CAS view ''' and

'''Input bar'''.

|-
|| '''File''' >> '''New Window'''.
|| Let's open a new window.

|-
|| Go to '''View''' menu >> click '''Spreadsheet''' check box.
|| To create '''matrices''', we will close '''Graphics''' view and open '''Spreadsheet''' view.

|-
|| Type the '''elements''' of the '''matrix'''.

A= {{1, 3, 2},{2,4,0},{ 1,0,5}}

|| Type the '''elements''' of the '''matrix''' in the '''spreadsheet'''.

|-
|| Type the '''elements''' in '''A1'''.

Type 1 3 2.
|| Type the elements in the cells starting from '''A1'''.

Type the first row '''elements''' as 1 3 2.

|-
|| Type elements.

2 4 0 >> 1 0 5.
|| Similarly type the remaining '''elements'''.

|-
|| Select the matrix elements.

Click on '''Matrix'''.
|| To create a '''matrix''', select the '''matrix elements.'''

Click on''' List''' drop-down and select '''Matrix'''.

|-
|| Point to the dialog box.
|| '''Matrix''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Point to '''Name''' text box.

Type the name of the matrix as '''A'''.

Click on '''Create''' button.

Point to the matrix.
|| In the '''Name''' text box, type the name of '''matrix''' as '''A'''.

Click on '''Create''' button.

A 3 by 3 '''matrix''' is displayed in the '''Algebra view.'''

|-
|| Go to '''View''' menu click on '''CAS''' check box.
|| Let us create the same '''matrix''' using '''CAS view'''.

To open '''CAS view''', go to '''View''' menu, click on '''CAS''' check box.

|-
|| {{1, 3, 2},{2,4,0},{ 1,0,5}}
|| In the first box, type the '''elements''' of the '''matrix''' as shown and press '''Enter'''.

Here, inner curly brackets represent different rows.

|-
|| Click on X.
|| Close the '''CAS view'''.

|-
|| Point to the Algebra view.

B={{2,4, 6},{4,2,3},{5,3,4}}
|| Similarly, we will create another 3 by 3 '''matrix B'''.

Type the '''elements''' of the '''matrix''' in the '''spreadsheet''' as shown.

|-
|| Select the elements >> right click .

Point to sub-menu.
|| To create a '''matrix''', select the '''elements''' and right click.

A sub-menu opens.

|-
|| Select '''Create''' >> select '''Matrix'''.
|| Navigate to '''Create''' and select '''Matrix'''.

|-
||Right click on the matrix in '''Algebra view'''>> select '''Rename'''.

|| To rename the '''matrix''', right click on the '''matrix''' in the '''Algebra View'''.

Select '''Rename'''.

|-
|| '''Rename''' dialog box appears.
|| '''Rename''' dialog-box appears.

|-
|| Type the name as '''B ''' >> click on '''OK'''.
|| Type the name as '''B''' and click '''OK'''.

|-
|| Addition/Subtraction of Matrices.
|| We can add or subtract '''matrices''' only if they are of the same order.

|-
|| Cursor on Algebra view.
|| Now we will add the '''matrices A''' and '''B'''.

|-
|| Point to input bar.

Type '''A + B''' in input bar >> press '''Enter'''.
|| In the '''input bar''', type '''A + B'''and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to the '''Algebra view'''

A+B={{3,7,8},{6,6,3},{6,3,9}}
|| Addition '''matrix M1''' is displayed in the '''Algebra view'''.

|-
||
|| Now we will see multiplication of '''matrices'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Matrix Multiplication'''

|| Two '''matrices X''' and '''Y '''can be multiplied if,

number of columns of '''X''' is equal to the number of rows of '''Y'''.

'''X''' is '''m by n matrix, Y''' is '''n by p matrix'''.

'''X into Y '''is a '''matrix ''' of order '''m by p'''.

|-
|| Point to matrix '''C'''.

C={{4,4},{3,5},{1,2}}
|| Let us will create a 3 by 2 '''matrix C''' using the '''input bar.'''

In the '''input bar''', type the '''matrix C''' as shown and press '''Enter'''.

|-
||
|| Let us multiply the '''matrices A''' and '''C'''.

|-
|| Point to input bar.

In '''input bar''', type, '''A*C '''(asterisk) >>press '''Enter'''.
|| In the '''input bar''', type, '''A asterisk C ''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| A*C={{15,23},{20,28},{9,14}}
|| Product of '''matrices A''' and '''C''' is displayed as '''M2''' in the '''Algebra view'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 13'''

'''Assignment'''

|| As an assignment,

1. Subtract '''matrices'''

2. Multiply '''matrices''' of same order and different order.

|-
|| In input bar, type, '''transpose'''.

Select '''Transpose[Matrix]'''
|| To show '''transpose''' of '''matrix A'''- in the '''input bar''', type: '''transpose'''.

Select '''Transpose[Matrix]'''
|-
|| Type '''A''' in place of '''Matrix''' >> press '''Enter'''.

Transpose[A]={{1,3,2},{2,4,0}{1,0,5}}
|| Type '''A''' in place of '''Matrix''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Transpose[A]= {{1,2,1},{3,4,0},{2,0,5}}
|| Transpose of a '''matrix M3''' is displayed in the '''Algebra view'''.

|-
|| Point to matrix '''A.'''

|| Now, we will show '''determinant''' of '''matrix A'''.

|-
|| Point to the input bar.

Type, '''determinant'''

Select '''Determinant[Matrix]'''

Type '''A''' in place of '''Matrix''' >> press '''Enter'''.
|| In the input bar, type '''determinant'''

Select '''Determinant[Matrix]'''

Type '''A''' in place of '''Matrix ''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to the determinant value.

'''Determinant[A]=-18'''
|| Value of '''Determinant''' of '''matrix A''' is displayed in the '''Algebra view'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''Inverse of a Matrix'''
|| A '''square matrix P ''' has an '''inverse,''' only if the '''determinant''' of '''P''' is not equal to zero '''(|P|≠0)'''.

|-
|| In the input bar, type, '''invert'''

Select '''Invert[Matrix]'''
|| Now, we show '''inverse''' of '''matrix A'''.

In the '''input bar''', type, '''invert'''

Select '''Invert[Matrix]'''

|-
|| Type '''A''' in place of '''Matrix''' >> press '''Enter'''.
|| Type '''A''' in place of '''Matrix''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to inverse of '''A'''.

Invert[A]={{-1.11, 0.83, 0.44},{0.56,-0.17,-0.22},{0.22, -0.17, 0.11}}
|| Drag the border of '''Algebra view''' to see the inverse matrix

Inverse of '''matrix A''', '''M4''' is displayed in the '''Algebra view.'''

|-
|| Cursor on the '''Spreadsheet view'''.
|| If '''determinant''' value of a '''matrix''' is zero, its '''inverse''' does not exist.

For this we will create a new '''matrix D'''.

|-
|| D={{1,2,3},{4,5,6},{7,8,9}}
|| Type the '''elements''' of the '''matrix''' as shown.

|-
|| Select the elements >> right click.

Sub-menu opens.
|| Select the '''elements''' and right click to open a sub-menu.

|-
|| Select '''Create''' >> select '''Matrix'''.
|| Select '''Create '''and then select '''Matrix'''.

|-
|| Right-click on''' M5''' in the Algebra view.

Select '''Rename''' from the sub-menu.

Type '''D''' in the '''Rename''' text box.
|| Rename the '''matrix M5''' in the '''Algebra view''' as '''D'''.

|-
|| Type, '''determinant'''

Select '''Determinant[Matrix]'''
|| Using the '''input bar''', let us find the '''determinant'''.

Type '''determinant'''

Select '''Determinant[Matrix]'''

|-
|| Type '''D''' in place of '''Matrix''' >> press '''Enter'''.
|| Type '''D''' in place of '''Matrix''' and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to '''Algebra view'''.
|| We see that '''determinant''' of '''matrix D''' is zero.

|-
|| In the '''input bar''', type, '''Invert(D) >>''' press '''Enter'''.
|| Now, in the '''input bar''', type, '''Invert(D)'''

and press '''Enter'''.

|-
|| Point to '''L1 undefined ''' in the '''Algebra view'''.
|| '''L1 undefined''' is displayed in the '''Algebra view'''.

This indicates that inverse of '''matrix D''' cannot be determined.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Assignment'''
|| As an assignment,

Find the '''determinant''' and '''inverse''' of '''Matrices B ''' and '''C'''.

|-
||
|| Let's summarize.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Summary'''
|| In this tutorial, we have learnt,

How to draw a '''vector'''

Arithmetic operations on '''vectors'''

How to create a '''matrix'''

Arithmetic operations on '''matrices'''

'''Transpose''' of a '''matrix'''

'''Determinant''' of a '''matrix'''

'''Inverse''' of a '''matrix''' .

|-
|| '''Slide Number 17'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial project'''
|| The video at the following link summarises the Spoken Tutorial project.

Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 18'''

'''Spoken Tutorial workshops'''
|| The '''Spoken Tutorial Project ''' team:

conducts workshops using spoken tutorials and

gives certificates on passing online tests.

For more details, please write to us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 19'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''
|| Do you have questions in THIS Spoken Tutorial?

Please visit this site

Choose the minute and second where you have the question

Explain your question briefly

Someone from our team will answer them.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 20'''

'''Forum for specific questions:'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial forum is for specific questions on this tutorial

Please do not post unrelated and general questions on them

This will help reduce the clutter

With less clutter, we can use these discussion as instructional material.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 21'''

'''Acknowledgement'''
|| Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by NMEICT, MHRD, Government of India.

More information on this mission is available at this link.

|-
||
|| This is Madhuri Ganapathi from, IIT Bombay signing off.

Thank you for watching.
|-
|}

QGIS/C4/DEM-Analysis/English

2019-12-02T07:39:10Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-

|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
||Welcome to this tutorial on '''DEM Analysis''' in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''

|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,

* Download '''DEM''' data from '''SRTM''' data website.
* Show Hillshade of '''DEM'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| Here I am using

'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04

'''QGIS''' version 2.18 and

A working internet connection.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with '''QGIS '''interface.

To view the prerequisite tutorials in this series please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About DEM'''

'''Digital Elevation Model''' or''' DEM''' is a raster file.

It shows elevation data for each raster cell.
|| '''Digital Elevation Model''' or '''DEM''' is a raster file.

It shows elevation data for each raster cell.

|-
|| '''Slide number 7'''

'''About DEM'''
||'''DEMs''' are used to represent the bare earth terrain.

The terrain is usually devoid of vegetation and man-made features.

'''DEMs''' are used for calculations and analysis of an area, based on the elevation.
|-
|| '''Slide number 8'''

'''STRM website'''

'''Open Firefox/Chrome web browser.'''

Type [http://srtm.csi.cgiar.org/srtmdata/ http://srtm.csi.cgiar.org/srtmdata/]
|| Let us download '''DEM '''data.

Open the given link in any web browser.

[http://srtm.csi.cgiar.org/srtmdata/ http://srtm.csi.cgiar.org/srtmdata]

|-
|| Cursor on '''SRTM '''data website.

Click on '''SRTM data '''tab on top-left corner of the page.
|| '''Shuttle radar topography mission (SRTM) data''' website opens.

'''SRTM''' data from this website can be downloaded freely.

|-
|| Cursor on the '''Download Manager''' page.

Point to '''Tile Size''' and '''Format'''.

Point to radio button.

||On the '''Download Manager''' page, the elevation models are arranged into tiles.

Two options for '''Tile Size''' and '''Format''' are available.

We can choose the tile size and format by clicking the radio buttons.

|-
||Scroll down
||Scroll down the page to world map.

|-
||Cursor on +/- sign on the map.

||Use + sign on the left corner of the map to zoom in the world map.

|-
|| Click on the '''Maharashtra '''tile.
||Click on '''Maharashtra''' tile.

|-
||Click on '''Search'''.
||Click on '''Search''' button located on the top-left corner of the world map.

|-
||Cursor on''' Download''' window.
||'''Download''' window opens.

|-
|| Scroll down.

Click on '''Download SRTM'''.
|| Scroll down to '''Description''' heading.

Click on '''Download SRTM''' link at the bottom.

|-
||A dialog-box opens, select '''Save File''' option. Click on '''OK '''button.
||A dialog-box opens, select '''Save File''' option. Click on '''OK '''button.

|-
|| Open Downloads folder and point the '''zip file'''. ('''STRM 51_09''')
|| On my system, '''zip file '''downloads to the '''Downloads '''folder.

|-
||Right-click to extract the contents.
|| Extract the contents of the '''zip file'''.

Right-click and select '''Extract Here '''option.

|-
|| Double-click to open the folder.
Cursor on

|| Double-click on the extracted folder.

This is a '''DEM''' '''dataset'''.

Here we see many files with different file extensions.

|-
||Click on close button on the top-left corner.
||Close the folder.

|-
||Double-click on''' QGIS '''icon.
|| Open the '''QGIS '''interface.

|-
|| Click on '''layer '''on the '''menu bar'''.

Click on add '''layer'''.

Click on add '''Raster layer'''.

|| Click on, '''Layer menu '''on the '''menu bar'''.

Select '''Add Layer, '''from the '''sub-menu''', click on '''Add Raster Layer '''option.

|-
|| Point to '''Data source manager Raster''' dialog-box .

|| '''Data source '''dialog-box''' '''opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Browse'''.

Locate the SRTM folder.

|| Navigate to the '''SRTM '''folder downloaded from the '''SRTM ''' website.

|-
|| From the folder, select the file '''srtm_53_11.tif'''

Click '''Open '''button.

|| From the contents of the folder, select the file with '''.tif '''extension.

Click on '''Open '''button.

|-
||Point to the DEM on canvas.
||On the canvas you will see '''DEM''' of the terrain.

'''DEM''' contains all the '''3D information''' about the terrain.

|-
|| Point to the DEM on canvas.

Scroll to zoom in.
|| Each pixel on the raster image represents the average elevation at that location.

This elevation is given in meters.

|-
|| Point to the DEM on canvas.
|| Dark pixels represent areas with low altitude.

Lighter pixels represent areas with high altitude.

|-
||Cursor on canvas
||Let us begin the '''DEM '''analysis of this map.

|-
|| Click on the menu item '''Raster'''.

Select '''Analysis''' from drop down.

Select''' DEM (Terrain models).'''
|| Click on '''Raster '''menu on the menu bar.

Click on '''Analysis''' from drop down.

From the sub-menu click on '''DEM (Terrain models).'''

|-
||'''DEM (Terrain models)''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''DEM (Terrain models) '''dialog-box opens.

Input file field has '''DEM layer '''as the default selection.

|-
||Click on Select in front the '''Output file'''.
|| Click on '''Select '''button next to '''Output file'''.

|-
||Select the raster file to save the results to Dialog-box opens.
|| S'''ave the results to..''' Dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the File name text box, type '''Hillshade.tif .'''

Click on '''Save'''.

|| In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Hillshade.tif.'''

I will save it on the '''Desktop'''.

Click on '''Save '''button.

|-
||Cursor on DEM (Terrain models) dialog-box.
|| Select''' Hillshade''' as''' Mode '''option.

Here by default '''Hillshade '''is already selected.

|-
||Check the box next to Load into canvas when finished.
|| Check the check-box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.

Here by default it is already selected.

Leave the default settings as such.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''
||Click on '''Ok '''button.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on Ok.

|| A pop-up box opens with message '''Processing Completed'''.

Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
||Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' in '''DEM (Terrain models)''' dialog-box.
||Click on '''Close''' button on the '''DEM''' dialog-box.

|-
||Cursor on layers panel.
|| A new layer, '''Hillshade''' is now added in the '''Layers panel'''.

On the canvas you will see a raster map in '''Hillshade''' mode.

|-
||Cursor on canvas.
||This map is generated using light and shadow to create a 3D image.

|-
||Cursor on '''Hillshade''' layer.
|| To make the model more pronounced, we will use '''Hillshade''' as an overlay.

|-
||Cursor on canvas.
|| Now we will change the '''symbology''' of the original '''DEM''' layer.

|-
|| Right-click on the '''srtm_53_11''' layer in the Layers Panel.

Select '''Properties '''option.
|| Right-click on the '''srtm layer '''in the '''Layers''' Panel.

From the context menu select '''Properties '''option.

|-
||Cursor on '''Layer Properties''' dialog-box.
|| '''Layer Properties''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Select '''Style''' from left panel.
||Select '''Style''' from the left panel.

|-
||Click on Singleband pseudocolor in front of Render type.
|| Under '''Band Rendering '''section, change the '''Render type '''to '''Singleband pseudocolor.'''

|-
|| Under '''Load min/max values''', click on '''min/max'''.

|| Under '''Load minimum/maximum values''', click on '''minimum/maximum '''radio button.

|-
|| Scroll down.

Select '''linear Interpolation'''.

Choose '''Spectral'''.
|| Select''' Linear''' from '''Interpolation '''drop-down.

This is a default selection here.

From the '''Color '''drop-down select '''Spectral'''.

|-
|| Select '''Mode '''as '''Continuous'''.

Click on '''Classify '''button.

|| Scroll down.

Select '''Mode '''as '''Continuous '''from the drop down.

Click on '''Classify '''button.

|-
||Cursor on the panel.
|| '''5''' new color values are created.

The colors represent values of elevation of raster from lowest to highest.

|-
||Click on OK button.
||Click on '''Apply''' button and '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| In the '''Layers''' panel,

Uncheck the check-box for '''Hillshade''' layer.
|| In the '''Layers''' panel, disable the '''Hillshade''' layer .

Uncheck the check-box against '''Hillshade''' layer.

|-
||Point to the map.
||Now on the canvas you will see a map in spectral colors.

|-
||Cursor on the panel.
|| The red shaded terrain is least elevated and blue is most elevated.

Enable the '''Hillshade layer'''.

|-
|| Right-click on the '''Hillshade layer''' in the Layers Panel.

Select '''Properties''' option.
|| Open the '''Layers Properties''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Select '''Transparency''' from left panel.
|| Select '''Transparency''' from left panel.

|-
|| Set the '''Global transparency''' to 50%.
|| Set the '''Global transparency''' to 50% by dragging the slider.

|-
||Click on '''OK '''button.
|| Click on '''Apply '''button and '''OK '''button.

|-
|| Cursor on canvas.
Use mouse wheel to zoom in.
|| Zoom in the map.

On the canvas now we see an enhanced topography of the landscape.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Summary'''
|| Let us summarize,

In this tutorial we have learnt to

* Download '''DEM''' data from '''SRTM''' data website.
* Show Hillshade of '''DEM'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Assignment 1'''
|| Here is the assignment.

* Visualize the terrain using '''Slope''' mode for the raster map.
* Change the symbology for the '''Slope''' layer
* Hint: Select the '''Mode''' as '''Slope''' and use it as overlay.

|-
||Cursor on the interface.
||Your completed assignment should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial Project'''
||
* This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project
* Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Spoken Tutorial Workshops'''
||
* We conduct workshops using Spoken Tutorials and give certificates.
* Please contact us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Forum for Specific questions'''

||Please post your timed queries on this forum

|-
|| '''Slide number 17'''

'''Acknowledgements'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

|-
||
|| This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from college of Engineering Pune,

Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}

QGIS/C4/DEM-Analysis/English

2019-12-02T07:35:29Z

Karwanjehimanshi95:

{|border=1
|| '''Visual Cue'''
|| '''Narration'''
|-

|| '''Slide Number 1'''

'''Title Slide'''
||Welcome to this tutorial on '''DEM Analysis''' in '''QGIS'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 2'''

'''Learning Objectives'''

|| In this tutorial, we will learn to,

* Download '''DEM''' data from '''SRTM''' data website.
* Show Hillshade of '''DEM'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 4'''

'''System Requirement'''
|| Here I am using

'''Ubuntu Linux '''OS version 16.04

'''QGIS''' version 2.18 and

A working internet connection.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 5'''

'''Pre-requisites'''
|| To follow this tutorial you should be familiar with '''QGIS '''interface.

To view the prerequisite tutorials in this series please visit this website.
|-
|| '''Slide Number 6'''

'''About DEM'''

'''Digital Elevation Model''' or''' DEM''' is a raster file.

It shows elevation data for each raster cell.
|| '''Digital Elevation Model''' or '''DEM''' is a raster file.

It shows elevation data for each raster cell.

|-
|| '''Slide number 7'''

'''About DEM'''
||'''DEMs''' are used to represent the bare earth terrain.

The terrain is usually devoid of vegetation and man-made features.

'''DEMs''' are used for calculations and analysis of an area, based on the elevation.
|-
|| '''Slide number 8'''

'''STRM website'''

'''Open Firefox/Chrome web browser.'''

Type [http://srtm.csi.cgiar.org/srtmdata/ http://srtm.csi.cgiar.org/srtmdata/]
|| Let us download '''DEM '''data.

Open the given link in any web browser.

[http://srtm.csi.cgiar.org/srtmdata/ http://srtm.csi.cgiar.org/srtmdata]

|-
|| Cursor on '''SRTM '''data website.

Click on '''SRTM data '''tab on top-left corner of the page.
|| '''Shuttle radar topography mission (SRTM) data''' website opens.

'''SRTM''' data from this website can be downloaded freely.

|-
|| Cursor on the '''Download Manager''' page.

Point to '''Tile Size''' and '''Format'''.

Point to radio button.

||On the '''Download Manager''' page, the elevation models are arranged into tiles.

Two options for '''Tile Size''' and '''Format''' are available.

We can choose the tile size and format by clicking the radio buttons.

|-
||Scroll down
||Scroll down the page to world map.

|-
||Cursor on +/- sign on the map.

||Use + sign on the left corner of the map to zoom in the world map.

|-
|| Click on the '''Maharashtra '''tile.
||Click on '''Maharashtra''' tile.

|-
||Click on '''Search'''.
||Click on '''Search''' button located on the top-left corner of the world map.

|-
||Cursor on''' Download''' window.
||'''Download''' window opens.

|-
|| Scroll down.

Click on '''Download SRTM'''.
|| Scroll down to '''Description''' heading.

Click on '''Download SRTM''' link at the bottom.

|-
||A dialog-box opens, select '''Save File''' option. Click on '''OK '''button.
||A dialog-box opens, select '''Save File''' option. Click on '''OK '''button.

|-
|| Open Downloads folder and point the '''zip file'''. ('''STRM 51_09''')
|| On my system, '''zip file '''downloads to the '''Downloads '''folder.

|-
||Right-click to extract the contents.
|| Extract the contents of the '''zip file'''.

Right-click and select '''Extract Here '''option.

|-
|| Double-click to open the folder.
Cursor on

|| Double-click on the extracted folder.

This is a '''DEM''' '''dataset'''.

Here we see many files with different file extensions.

|-
||Click on close button on the top-left corner.
||Close the folder.

|-
||Double-click on''' QGIS '''icon.
|| Open the '''QGIS '''interface.

|-
|| Click on '''layer '''on the '''menu bar'''.

Click on add '''layer'''.

Click on add '''Raster layer'''.

|| Click on, '''Layer menu '''on the '''menu bar'''.

Select '''Add Layer, '''from the '''sub-menu''', click on '''Add Raster Layer '''option.

|-
|| Point to '''Data source manager Raster''' dialog-box .

|| '''Data source '''dialog-box''' '''opens.

|-
|| Click on '''Browse'''.

Locate the SRTM folder.

|| Navigate to the '''SRTM '''folder downloaded from the '''SRTM ''' website.

|-
|| From the folder, select the file '''srtm_53_11.tif'''

Click '''Open '''button.

|| From the contents of the folder, select the file with '''.tif '''extension.

Click on '''Open '''button.

|-
||Point to the DEM on canvas.
||On the canvas you will see '''DEM''' of the terrain.

'''DEM''' contains all the '''3D information''' about the terrain.

|-
|| Point to the DEM on canvas.

Scroll to zoom in.
|| Each pixel on the raster image represents the average elevation at that location.

This elevation is given in meters.

|-
|| Point to the DEM on canvas.
|| Dark pixels represent areas with low altitude.

Lighter pixels represent areas with high altitude.

|-
||Cursor on canvas
||Let us begin the '''DEM '''analysis of this map.

|-
|| Click on the menu item '''Raster'''.

Select '''Analysis''' from drop down.

Select''' DEM (Terrain models).'''
|| Click on '''Raster '''menu on the menu bar.

Click on '''Analysis''' from drop down.

From the sub-menu click on '''DEM (Terrain models).'''

|-
||'''DEM (Terrain models)''' dialog-box opens.
|| '''DEM (Terrain models) '''dialog-box opens.

Input file field has '''DEM layer '''as the default selection.

|-
||Click on Select in front the '''Output file'''.
|| Click on '''Select '''button next to '''Output file'''.

|-
||Select the raster file to save the results to Dialog-box opens.
|| S'''ave the results to..''' Dialog-box opens.

|-
|| In the File name text box, type '''Hillshade.tif .'''

Click on '''Save'''.

|| In the dialog-box, name the file as '''Hillshade.tif.'''

I will save it on the '''Desktop'''.

Click on '''Save '''button.

|-
||Cursor on DEM (Terrain models) dialog-box.
|| Select''' Hillshade''' as''' Mode '''option.

Here by default '''Hillshade '''is already selected.

|-
||Check the box next to Load into canvas when finished.
|| Check the check-box next to '''Load into canvas when finished'''.

Here by default it is already selected.

Leave the default settings as such.

|-
|| Click on '''Ok'''
||Click on '''Ok '''button.

|-
|| Finished dialog-box opens.

Click on Ok.

|| A pop-up box opens with message '''Processing Completed'''.

Click on '''OK''' button.

|-
||Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.
||Click '''OK''' button in the '''Qgis.bin''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Click on '''Close''' in '''DEM (Terrain models)''' dialog-box.
||Click on '''Close''' button on the '''DEM''' dialog-box.

|-
||Cursor on layers panel.
|| A new layer, '''Hillshade''' is now added in the '''Layers panel'''.

On the canvas you will see a raster map in '''Hillshade''' mode.

|-
||Cursor on canvas.
||This map is generated using light and shadow to create a 3D image.

|-
||Cursor on '''Hillshade''' layer.
|| To make the model more pronounced, we will use '''Hillshade''' as an overlay.

|-
||Cursor on canvas.
|| Now we will change the '''symbology''' of the original '''DEM''' layer.

|-
|| Right-click on the '''srtm_53_11''' layer in the Layers Panel.

Select '''Properties '''option.
|| Right-click on the '''srtm layer '''in the '''Layers''' Panel.

From the context menu select '''Properties '''option.

|-
||Cursor on '''Layer Properties''' dialog-box.
|| '''Layer Properties''' dialog-box opens.

|-
|| Select '''Style''' from left panel.
||Select '''Style''' from the left panel.

|-
||Click on Singleband pseudocolor in front of Render type.
|| Under '''Band Rendering '''section, change the '''Render type '''to '''Singleband pseudocolor.'''

|-
|| Under '''Load min/max values''', click on '''min/max.'''

|| Under '''Load min/max values''', click on '''min/max '''radio button.

|-
|| Scroll down.

Select '''linear Interpolation'''.

Choose '''Spectral'''.
|| Select''' Linear''' from '''Interpolation '''drop-down.

This is a default selection here.

From the '''Color '''drop-down select '''Spectral'''.

|-
|| Select '''Mode '''as '''Continuous'''.

Click on '''Classify '''button.

|| Scroll down.

Select '''Mode '''as '''Continuous '''from the drop down.

Click on '''Classify '''button.

|-
||Cursor on the panel.
|| '''5''' new color values are created.

The colors represent values of elevation of raster from lowest to highest.

|-
||Click on OK button.
||Click on '''Apply''' button and '''OK''' button at the bottom right corner.

|-
|| In the '''Layers''' panel,

Uncheck the check-box for '''Hillshade''' layer.
|| In the '''Layers''' panel, disable the '''Hillshade''' layer .

Uncheck the check-box against '''Hillshade''' layer.

|-
||Point to the map.
||Now on the canvas you will see a map in spectral colors.

|-
||Cursor on the panel.
|| The red shaded terrain is least elevated and blue is most elevated.

Enable the '''Hillshade layer'''.

|-
|| Right-click on the '''Hillshade layer''' in the Layers Panel.

Select '''Properties''' option.
|| Open the '''Layers Properties''' dialog-box.

|-
|| Select '''Transparency''' from left panel.
|| Select '''Transparency''' from left panel.

|-
|| Set the '''Global transparency''' to 50%.
|| Set the '''Global transparency''' to 50% by dragging the slider.

|-
||Click on '''OK '''button.
|| Click on '''Apply '''button and '''OK '''button.

|-
|| Cursor on canvas.
Use mouse wheel to zoom in.
|| Zoom in the map.

On the canvas now we see an enhanced topography of the landscape.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 10'''

'''Summary'''
|| Let us summarize,

In this tutorial we have learnt to

* Download '''DEM''' data from '''SRTM''' data website.
* Show Hillshade of '''DEM'''.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 12'''

'''Assignment 1'''
|| Here is the assignment.

* Visualize the terrain using '''Slope''' mode for the raster map.
* Change the symbology for the '''Slope''' layer
* Hint: Select the '''Mode''' as '''Slope''' and use it as overlay.

|-
||Cursor on the interface.
||Your completed assignment should look as shown here.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 14'''

'''About Spoken Tutorial Project'''
||
* This video summarizes the Spoken Tutorial project
* Please download and watch it.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 15'''

'''Spoken Tutorial Workshops'''
||
* We conduct workshops using Spoken Tutorials and give certificates.
* Please contact us.

|-
|| '''Slide Number 16'''

'''Forum for Specific questions'''

||Please post your timed queries on this forum

|-
|| '''Slide number 17'''

'''Acknowledgements'''
|| The Spoken Tutorial Project is funded by '''NMEICT, MHRD''' '''Government of India'''.

|-
||
|| This tutorial is contributed by Vaishnavi Honap from college of Engineering Pune,

Snehalatha Kaliappan and Himanshi Karwanje from IIT Bombay.

Thank you for joining.
|-
|}